CENTER OF TECHNOLOGICAL INITIATIVES, LLC

[email protected]

Custom-made machines for you

Welding machine
Welding machine Welding machine

Contact us:

http://cti-sumy.com.ua

[email protected]

[email protected]

https://www.facebook.com/cti.sumy

https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCyYGmKVZ2FwZ

noX4RV8Is0g

Semi-automatic welding

machine

This manual is brought to you by CTI LLC.

We have more than 10 years of experience in machine building and will gladly help

you to increase productivity at your manufacturing facility!

Taking into account the peculiarities of your manufacture we can make a custom

machine that will help you simplify the production process.

We offer to perform the whole range of works:

Designing Production Assembly

FANUC OPEN CNC

Ladder Editing Package (Windows)

OPERRATOR’S MANUAL

B-63484EN/05
 • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country
from where the product is exported.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.

This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by  or  in the main body.
B-63484EN/05 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warnings and Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as Notes. Read the Warnings,
Cautions, and Notes thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE
Notes is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warnings and Cautions.

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63484EN/05

1.1 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

The following warnings and note describe precautions on handling

CNCs, which must be observed to ensure safety when using machines
equipped with a CNC.

WARNING
1 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check
the entered data. Operating the machine with
incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage
to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to
the user.
2 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are
factory-set. Usually, there is no need to change
them. When, however, there is no alternative other
than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in
the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine
itself, or injury to the user.

NOTE
Command programs, parameters, and variables
are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC.
Generally, the contents of memory are not lost by a
power on/off operation. However, the contents of
memory may be erased by mistake, or important
data in nonvolatile memory may have to be erased
upon recovering from a failure.
To enable the restoration of data as soon as
possible if such a situation arises, always make a
backup of the data in advance.

s-2
B-63484EN/05 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.2 WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATING TO LADDER

EDITING PACKAGE (Windows)

Warnings and notes relating to Ladder Editing Package (Windows)

appear in this manual. Before using the software, read this manual
thoroughly and take time to read the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes in
this manual carefully.
In addition, "READ THE FOLLOWING:" which appears in the next
section, summarizes the note to be kept in mind when Ladder Editing
Package (Windows) is used, which is not described in the chapters in
this manual. Before using this software, also read this part.

1.3 READ THE FOLLOWING:…

The following summarizes the points that the user should keep in
mind when using Ladder Editing Package (Windows). Before using
Ladder Editing Package (Windows), read the following:

CAUTION
In this manual we have tried as much as possible
to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which
must not be done, or which cannot be done,
because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially
described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as “impossible”

s-3
B-63484EN/05 PREFACE

PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing Ladder Editing Package (Windows)
(Specification : A08B-9210-J511).
Ladder Editing Package (Windows) is a programming system for
developing sequence programs for FANUC PMCs.
This software runs on a FANUC OPEN CNC.
Use the sequence program development software listed below to
develop sequence programs, using a personal computer that operates
independently of a FANUC OPEN CNC. For how to use the software,
refer to the respective operator's manuals.
Name Operator’s Manual
FANUC LADDER FANUC LADDER Operator’s Manual (B-66131E)
FANUC LADDER-II FANUC LADDER-II Operator’s Manual (B-66184EN)
FANUC LADDER-III FANUC LADDER-III Operator’s Manual (B-66234EN)

This software runs under the Microsoft® Windows® environment. This

manual does not cover common basic Windows operations. If you are
a beginner to Windows, read the Windows manual first to learn the
basic Windows operations.
This manual describes the programming system-specific items
including the methods of installing, starting, and using this software.
For details on how to create sequence programs for FANUC PMCs
and how to operate PMCs, refer to the following manuals:
• FANUC PMC MODEL PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/
SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6
Ladder Language Programming Manual (B-61863E)
• FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A
FANUC Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5
FANUC Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A
FANUC Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A
PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN)
Read this manual thoroughly to ensure the correct use of Ladder
Editing Package (Windows).
NOTE
After purchasing this software, you can copy it for
use at your factory as needed. Attach a copy to a
machine to be shipped as a backup.
FANUC owns the copyright of the software. No one
is allowed to redistribute it, in part or in whole, to
any third party with an aim to use it for application
development.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America.

p-1
PREFACE B-63484EN/05

1.1 FEATURES OF LADDER EDITING PACKAGE (Windows)

This software has the following features:

Features
Using the FANUC PMC sequence program development environment
on an OPEN CNC offers a more comfortable manipulation
environment.
OPEN CNC

CNC/PMC Machine
HSSB, Ethernet
DI/DO

I/O operation
Online functions using HSSB or Ethernet
by using the
- Monitoring and debugging sequence programs
PMC I/O
- Executing and stopping sequence programs
- Transferring sequence programs
- Writing to flash ROM
- Setting and displaying PMC parameters

Keyboard

Ladder Editing Input and

Floppy disk Mouse editing
Package

Printer

Drawing

Hard disk
Outline Diagram

NOTE
1 Depending on the PMC model, the online functions that use HSSB or Ethernet
have different specifications or cannot be used. For details on the functions, refer to
the relevant PMC programming manual.
2 For Ethernet, I/O operations that use [HOST] of the PMC I/O function cannot be
performed.
3 Multiple Ladder Editing Package (Windows) programs can be started at the same
time.
Multiple Ladder Editing Package (Windows) programs cannot be connected to one
PMC at the same time. For one PC, Ladder Editing Package (Windows) can be
connected to a maximum of eight PMCs.
p-2
B-63484EN/05 PREFACE

• Main functions
⋅ Inputting, displaying, editing, and outputting sequence
programs
⋅ Monitoring and debugging sequence programs
(Displaying the signal status, alarms, and PMC status, and
ladder diagram online monitoring)
⋅ Setting and displaying PMC parameters
⋅ Executing and stopping sequence programs
⋅ Transfer to and from the PMC (RAM)
⋅ Writing to flash ROM
⋅ Printing sequence programs
• Supported PMC models
PMC-SA1/SA3/SA5/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/SC3/SC4
30i-A PMC / 31i-A PMC / 32i-A PMC

• PMC models and supported functions

The following table lists the available functions for each PMC
model:
Function
Step I/O device
PMC model Multi-path Multiple Extended Online Offline
sequence Handy Memory
PMC comments function function function PMC
program File card
PMC-30i-A PMC A A B B A A B A A
PMC-30i-A PMC(EXT) A A A*4 B A A B A A
PMC-31i-A PMC A A B B A A B A A
PMC-31i-A PMC(EXT) A A A*4 B A A B A A
PMC-32i-A PMC A A B B A A B A A
*4
PMC-32i-A PMC(EXT) A A A B A A B A A
PMC-SA1 B B B B B A A A C
PMC-SA3 B B B B B A A A C
PMC-SA5 B B B B A A A A C
*1
PMC-SB3 B B B B C A A A C
PMC-SB4 B B B B C *1 A A A A
PMC-SB4(STEP SEQ) B B B A C *1 A A A A
PMC-SB5 B B B B A A A A A
PMC-SB6 B B B B A A A A A
PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ) B B B A A A A A A
PMC-SB7 B B B B A A B A A
PMC-SB7(STEP SEQ) B B B A A A B A A
PMC-SC3 B B B B C *1 A A A C
PMC-SC4 B B B B C *1 A A A A
*1
PMC-SC4(STEP SEQ) B B B A C A A A A
PMC-PA3 B B B B C *2 A A A A
PMC-NB B B B B C *3 A A A A
PMC-NB2 B B B B C *3 A A A A
PMC-NB2(STEP SEQ) B B B A C *3 A A A A
PMC-NB6 B B B B A A C C A
A : Available, B: Not available
C : Available under certain conditions (The supported functions vary depending on the CNC and PMC series and edition.
Refer to the following Note.)

p-3
PREFACE B-63484EN/05

NOTE
*1 • Available when the PMC software series and edition are 4066/12, 4068/11, or
later and the CNC software series and edition are B0A1/23, B1A1/20, BDA1/12,
BEA1/12, or later.
*2 • Available when the PMC software series and edition are 4074/01 or later. Not
available with the 4075 series. The supported CNC software series and editions
are 8838/01, 883C/02, 8839/01, 8834/07, 883E/03, and later.
• Available when the PMC software series and edition are 4078/04 or later. The
supported CNC software series and editions are 8880/11 and later.
*3 • Available when the PMC software series and edition are 4048/10, 4068/08, or
later.
• Not available with the 4046 or 4047 PMC software series.
*4 • Available when the PMC software series and edition are 406N/13 or later.
• In extended function, symbol is maximum 40 characters. Comment is maximum
255 characters and 4 kinds available for multi-comment. And local symbol and
automatic address assigment are supported.

p-4
B-63484EN/05 PREFACE

1.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS WITH OPEN CNC

The configurations of systems with an OPEN CNC are summarized

below.

1. System in which the CNC incorporates a personal computer

board (MMC-IV)

With MMC-IV CNC

incorporated

Machine

• Manipulating the CRT/MDI

If the system is used with a CRT/MDI, the full keyboard
keys that are not initially available on the CRT/MDI keypad
are assigned as listed below. For details, refer to the
FANUC MMC-IV Operator's Manual (B-62494E).

Key correspondence table

Full keyboard CRT/MDI
Ctrl Custom
Tab System
Alt Alter
Back Space Can
Esc HELP

• Program backup copy storage

PMC flash memory

NOTE
The CRT/MDI keypad cannot be used to activate a
Japanese-language entry system. To enter
comments in Japanese, use the full keyboard.

2. System in which a CNC is connected to a commercial personal

computer via a high-speed serial bus

High-speed CNC
serial bus
Personal Machine
computer

• Program backup copy storage

PMC flash memory

p-5
PREFACE B-63484EN/05

3. System in which more than one CNC is connected to a

commercial personal computer via a high-speed serial bus

CNC
High-speed
serial bus Machine

Machine
Personal
computer

Machine

The configuration of the connection shown above is called an

HSSB multiconnection. Inserting more than one HSSB board
into personal computer slots enables the personal computer to be
connected to more than one CNC. With this configuration, up to
eight CNCs can be connected to one personal computer.

• Program backup copy storage

PMC flash memory

4. System in which a CNC is connected to a FANUC intelligent

terminal via a high-speed serial bus

Intelligent
terminal CNC
High-speed
serial bus
Machine

• Manipulating the CRT/MDI

See "1.System in which the CNC incorporates a personal
computer board (MMC-IV)"

• Program backup copy storage

PMC flash memory

p-6
B-63484EN/05 PREFACE

1.3 CHECKING THE PACKAGE CONTENTS

The package contains the following:

• CD-ROM disks
FANUC Ladder Editing Package (Windows) (A08B-9210-J511)

NOTE
You must read the release note (READMEJ.TXT)
on the “\Disk1 folder” of the product package. The
release note provides detailed information on the
package and information not included in the
operator's manual.

p-7
PREFACE B-63484EN/05

1.4 ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

This manual is organized as follows:

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Describes general precautions that must be observed to ensure
the safe use of this software.
PREFACE
Briefly describes the main features of this software. Also
describes how to use this manual and other information to
understand the use of this software.
1. SETUP
Describes the software operating environment and explains how
to set up this software to ready it for use.
2. BASICS
Describes the basic items that the user should understand before
using this software.
3. CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
Describes how to create and edit sequence programs.
4. PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
Describes how to print sequence programs.
5. COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION
Describes how to compile and decompile programs and also
describes ladder program protection by password.
6. MNEMONIC EDITING
Describes conversion to mnemonic files and the mnemonic file
format.
7. INPUT/OUTPUT
Describes input/output of sequence programs (loading sequence
programs from the PMC and storing them into the PMC).
8. EXECUTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
Describes how to execute and stop sequence programs.
9. DIAGNOSIS
Describes the online diagnosis functions including ladder
monitoring, signal tracing, and signal analysis.
10. EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION
11. CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
Describes how to convert DOS sequence programs to Windows
sequence programs.
12. ERROR MESSAGES
Describes the error messages displayed by this software.
APPENDIX
Provides information that is to be read as necessary.

p-8
B-63484EN/05 PREFACE

1.5 NOTATION CONVENTIONS IN THIS MANUAL

This manual uses the following notation and conventions:

• Menus, commands, and screens

Notation example Explanation
[File] menu Menu names appear in brackets ([ ]).
[Setting…] Command names appear in brackets ([ ]).
[Program List] screen As the name of a screen, the title
displayed on the title bar of the screen
appears in brackets ([ ]).
<OK> button Command buttons on the screen appear
in angle brackets (< >).

• Keys and their operation

Notation example Explanation
[Enter] key Key names are indicated in brackets ([ ]).
[Ctrl]+[Tab] key When two or more keys are held down at
the same time by pressing them
sequentially, the keys are connected
using “+”, as shown on the left.
Direction keys The [→], [←], [↑], and [↓] keys are
collectively called direction keys.

• Mouse operations
Example of notation Explanation
Click To press and then immediately release a
mouse button.
Double-click To click a mouse button twice in rapid
succession.
Drag To move the mouse while holding down
a mouse button, and then releasing the
button at a desired position.

• Folders
Directories and folders are collectively referred to as folders.

p-9
PREFACE B-63484EN/05

• PMC models
In this manual, the PMC models are abbreviated as follows:

PMC Model Abbreviations

Abbreviation PMC model
30i-A PMC PMC for Series 30i-A (1st-path PMC)
30i-A PMC(2nd) PMC for Series 30i-A PMC(2nd-path PMC)
30i-A PMC(3rd) PMC for Series 30i-A PMC(3rd-path PMC)
30i-A PMC(DCS) PMC for Series 30i-A PMC(Dual Check Safety)
30i-A PMC(EXT) PMC for Series 30i-A (1st-path PMC, Extended function)
30i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) PMC for Series 30i-A PMC(2nd-path PMC, Extended function)
30i-A PMC(3rd,EXT) PMC for Series 30i-A PMC(3rd-path PMC, Extended function)
30i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) PMC for Series 30i-A PMC(Dual Check Safety, Extended function)
31i-A PMC PMC for Series 31i-A (1st-path PMC)
31i-A PMC(2nd) PMC for Series 31i-A PMC(2nd-path PMC)
31i-A PMC(3rd) PMC for Series 31i-A PMC(3rd-path PMC)
31i-A PMC(DCS) PMC for Series 31i-A PMC(Dual Check Safety)
31i-A PMC(EXT) PMC for Series 31i-A (1st-path PMC, Extended function)
31i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) PMC for Series 31i-A PMC(2nd-path PMC, Extended function)
31i-A PMC(3rd,EXT) PMC for Series 31i-A PMC(3rd-path PMC, Extended function)
31i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) PMC for Series 31i-A PMC(Dual Check Safety, Extended function)
32i-A PMC PMC for Series 32i-A (1st-path PMC)
32i-A PMC(2nd) PMC for Series 32i-A PMC(2nd-path PMC)
32i-A PMC(3rd) PMC for Series 32i-A PMC(3rd-path PMC)
32i-A PMC(DCS) PMC for Series 32i-A PMC(Dual Check Safety)
32i-A PMC(EXT) PMC for Series 32i-A (1st-path PMC, Extended function)
32i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) PMC for Series 32i-A PMC(2nd-path PMC, Extended function)
32i-A PMC(3rd,EXT) PMC for Series 32i-A PMC(3rd-path PMC, Extended function)
32i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) PMC for Series 32i-A PMC(Dual Check Safety, Extended function)
PMC-SA1 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1
PMC-SA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA3
PMC-SA5 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA5
PMC-SB3 FANUC PMC-MODEL SB3
PMC-SB4 FANUC PMC-MODEL SB4
PMC-SB5 FANUC PMC-MODEL SB5
PMC-SB6 FANUC PMC-MODEL SB6
PMC-SB7 FANUC PMC-MODEL SB7
PMC-SC3 FANUC PMC-MODEL SC3
PMC-SC4 FANUC PMC-MODEL SC4
PMC-PA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL PA3
PMC-QC FANUC PMC-MODEL QC
PMC-NB FANUC PMC-MODEL NB
PMC-NB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2
PMC-NB6 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB6

• One more abbreviation

This manual also uses the abbreviation listed below.

Abbreviation Name
OPEN CNC FANUC OPEN CNC
MMC-IV FANUC MMC-IV
HSSB High Speed Serial Bus

p-10
B-63484EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1 SETUP..................................................................................................... 1
1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................... 2
1.2 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION ..................................................... 4
1.2.1 Installation ................................................................................................................4
1.2.2 Uninstallation ...........................................................................................................9

2 BASICS ................................................................................................. 11
2.1 SYSTEM FILES ........................................................................................... 12
2.2 START AND END........................................................................................ 13
2.2.1 Starting Ladder Editing Package (Windows) .........................................................13
2.2.2 Starting Ladder Editing Package (Windows) (Online Connection) .......................13
2.2.3 Terminating Ladder Editing Package (Windows) ..................................................13
2.3 WINDOW NAMES AND FUNCTIONS......................................................... 14
2.3.1 Main Menu .............................................................................................................15
2.3.2 Toolbar ...................................................................................................................16
2.3.3 Edit Toolbar............................................................................................................17
2.3.4 Soft Keys ................................................................................................................17
2.3.5 Status Bar ...............................................................................................................17
2.3.6 Status Monitor ........................................................................................................17
2.4 DISPLAYING VERSION INFORMATION .................................................... 18
3 CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS......................... 19
3.1 SEQUENCE PROGRAMS........................................................................... 20
3.1.1 Procedure for Creating Sequence Programs...........................................................20
3.1.2 PMC Programming Method ...................................................................................24
3.1.3 Work Folders and Online Program Files................................................................25
3.1.4 PMC Type (Step Sequence and I/O Link Expansion) Setting ...............................26
3.1.5 Device Selection.....................................................................................................27
3.2 EDITING TITLES ......................................................................................... 29
3.2.1 Procedure................................................................................................................29
3.3 EDITING LADDER DIAGRAMS................................................................... 31
3.3.1 Preparing for Offline Editing .................................................................................31
3.3.2 Preparing for Online Editing ..................................................................................31

c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63484EN/05

3.3.3 Method of Displaying the Ladder Diagram Editing Screen ...................................33

3.3.4 Changing Ladder Programs....................................................................................39
3.3.5 Inserting Ladders from the Edit Window into a Ladder Program..........................42
3.3.6 Entering Basic Instructions ....................................................................................44
3.3.7 Entering Function Instructions ...............................................................................48
3.3.8 Entering Horizontal Lines ......................................................................................52
3.3.9 Entering and Deleting Vertical Lines .....................................................................53
3.3.10 Adding Ladder Subprograms .................................................................................54
3.3.11 Deleting Ladder Subprograms................................................................................55
3.3.12 Editing Net Comments ...........................................................................................56
3.3.13 Deleting Net Comments .........................................................................................59
3.3.14 Adding Page Breaks ...............................................................................................60
3.3.15 Deleting Page Breaks .............................................................................................61
3.3.16 Deleting Nets..........................................................................................................62
3.3.17 Search .....................................................................................................................63
3.3.17.1 Context menu..................................................................................................... 66
3.3.17.2 Soft key.............................................................................................................. 67
3.3.18 Collective Display ..................................................................................................68
3.3.18.1 Setting collective display extraction conditions ................................................ 68
3.3.18.2 Executing collective display .............................................................................. 72
3.3.18.3 Modifying collective display extraction conditions........................................... 73
3.3.18.4 Deleting collective display extraction conditions .............................................. 74
3.3.19 Setting Ladder Display...........................................................................................75
3.3.20 Changing Signal Addresses and Function Instruction Parameters in the Display
Window ..................................................................................................................80
3.3.21 Changing Contacts and Coils in the Display Window ...........................................81
3.3.22 Checking the Number of Program Steps ................................................................82
3.3.23 Replace ...................................................................................................................83
3.3.24 Changing Ladder Programs on the Display Window.............................................86
3.3.24.1 Changing the ladder editing mode ..................................................................... 86
3.3.24.2 Inserting an edit line .......................................................................................... 87
3.3.24.3 Entering basic instructions................................................................................. 88
3.3.24.4 Entering function instructions............................................................................ 91
3.3.24.5 Entering horizontal lines.................................................................................... 95
3.3.24.6 Entering and deleting vertical lines ................................................................... 96
3.3.25 Deleting Symbol or Comment Data .......................................................................97
3.3.26 Undo / Redo ...........................................................................................................98
3.3.26.1 Setting the maximum number of undo operations ............................................. 99
3.3.27 Ladder Diagram is Outputted to the Text File......................................................100

c-2
B-63484EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.3.27.1 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 100

3.3.27.2 The example of an output file .......................................................................... 103
3.3.27.3 Ladder diagram without the net number is output to the text file.................... 104
3.3.28 Automatic Input of Timer, Counter, Rising/Falling-edge Numbers.....................105
3.3.28.1 Automatic input of the TMR parameter of a functional instruction ................ 106
3.3.28.2 Automatic input of the CTR parameter of a functional instruction ................. 107
3.4 EDITING STEP SEQUENCES .................................................................. 108
3.4.1 Step Sequence Configuration ...............................................................................111
3.4.2 Entering Steps ......................................................................................................118
3.4.3 Entering Transitions .............................................................................................119
3.4.4 Beginning of Selective Branch.............................................................................120
3.4.5 End of Selective Branch .......................................................................................120
3.4.6 Beginning of Parallel Branch ...............................................................................121
3.4.7 End of Parallel Branch .........................................................................................121
3.4.8 Specifying Jump-to Label ....................................................................................122
3.4.9 Specifying Label Jump.........................................................................................123
3.4.10 Checking Syntax ..................................................................................................124
3.4.11 Adding Step Sequence Subprograms ...................................................................125
3.4.12 Deleting Step Sequence Subprograms..................................................................126
3.4.13 Search ...................................................................................................................127
3.5 EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS ................................................... 128
3.5.1 Symbol and Comment Data..................................................................................128
3.5.2 Procedure..............................................................................................................130
3.5.3 Toolbar .................................................................................................................133
3.5.4 Context Menu .......................................................................................................133
3.6 EDITING MESSAGES ............................................................................... 134
3.6.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................134
3.6.2 Models and Quantity of Usable Characters..........................................................136
3.6.3 Memory Addresses Required to Display Messages .............................................136
3.6.4 New Line Character, Numeric Data .....................................................................137
3.6.5 Tool Bar................................................................................................................139
3.6.6 Status Bar .............................................................................................................140
3.6.7 Shortcut Keys .......................................................................................................140
3.7 EDITING I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT ..................................................... 141
3.7.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................141
3.7.2 Tool Bar................................................................................................................143
3.7.3 Shortcut Keys .......................................................................................................143
3.8 EDITING SYSTEM PARAMETERS........................................................... 144
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63484EN/05

3.8.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................144
3.9 SAVING PROGRAMS WITH NAMES ....................................................... 149
3.9.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................149
3.9.2 About the Deletion of the Unused Net Comment.................................................149
3.10 IMPORTING PROGRAMS ........................................................................ 150
3.10.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................150
3.10.2 Import of the External Symbol File......................................................................156
3.11 EXPORTING PROGRAMS........................................................................ 159
3.11.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................159
3.11.2 Export of the External Symbol file.......................................................................163
3.12 CHECKING DUPLICATE COIL ................................................................. 166
3.12.1 Duplicate Coil Screen...........................................................................................166

4 PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS ................................................ 170

4.1 PRINTING TITLES .................................................................................... 171
4.1.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................171
4.2 PRINTING LADDER DIAGRAMS .............................................................. 173
4.2.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................173
4.3 PRINTING STEP SEQUENCES................................................................ 176
4.3.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................176
4.4 PRINTING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS ................................................. 178
4.4.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................178
4.5 PRINTING MESSAGES ............................................................................ 180
4.5.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................180
4.6 PRINTING I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT................................................... 182
4.6.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................182
4.7 PRINTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS ........................................................ 184
4.7.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................184
4.8 PRINTING CROSS-REFERENCES .......................................................... 186
4.8.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................186
4.9 PRINTING BIT ADDRESS MAPS.............................................................. 190
4.9.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................190
4.10 SETTING UP COMMON OPTIONS .......................................................... 192
4.10.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................192
4.11 SAVING AND READING OPTION FILE .................................................... 193
4.11.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................193
4.12 SETTING UP PRINTER ............................................................................ 195
4.12.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................195
c-4
B-63484EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.12.2 Setting up Pages ...................................................................................................196

4.12.3 Setting Property....................................................................................................201

5 COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION............................................ 202

5.1 COMPILATION .......................................................................................... 203
5.2 DECOMPILATION ..................................................................................... 208
5.3 AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION............................. 213
5.4 PROTECTING LADDER PROGRAMS BY PASSWORDS ........................ 214
5.4.1 Partial Protect Functions ......................................................................................215
5.5 AUTOMATIC NUMBERING OF TMRB/ TMRBF/ DIFU/DIFD.................... 217
6 MNEMONIC EDITING ......................................................................... 219
6.1 CONVERTING SOURCE PROGRAMS TO MNEMONIC FILES ............... 220
6.1.1 Converts to the External Symbol File ..................................................................221
6.2 CONVERTING MNEMONIC FILES TO SOURCE PROGRAMS ............... 223
6.2.1 Addition of Symbol/Comment and Net comment................................................225
6.3 MNEMONIC FILE FORMAT ...................................................................... 227
6.4 MNEMONIC FILE SAMPLE....................................................................... 231
6.4.1 Single Format .......................................................................................................231
6.4.1.1 Parameter ......................................................................................................... 231
6.4.2 Title ....................................................................................................................239
6.4.2.1 Symbol and comment ...................................................................................... 239
6.4.2.2 Ladder.............................................................................................................. 240
6.4.2.3 Message ........................................................................................................... 241
6.4.2.4 I/O module ....................................................................................................... 241
6.4.3 ALL format...........................................................................................................242
6.5 CONVERTING STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS TO MNEMONIC FILES 243
6.6 MNEMONIC OPTIONS.............................................................................. 244
6.7 FORMAT OF EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE ................................................. 245
6.7.1 Option...................................................................................................................245
6.7.2 Sample of an External Symbol File......................................................................246
6.7.3 Operation to Import from CSV-file......................................................................247

7 INPUT/OUTPUT .................................................................................. 248

7.1 SETTING UP COMMUNICATION ............................................................. 249
7.1.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................249
7.1.2 Setting Options .....................................................................................................251
7.2 LOADING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS FROM THE PMC
(DURING DISCONNECTION WITH THE PMC) ........................................ 252
7.2.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................252

c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63484EN/05

7.3 LOADING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS FROM THE PMC

(DURING CONNECTION WITH THE PMC) .............................................. 259
7.3.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................259
7.4 STORING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS IN THE PMC
(DURING CONNECTION WITH THE PMC) .............................................. 261
7.4.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................261
7.5 STORING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS IN THE PMC
(DURING CONNECTION WITH THE PMC) .............................................. 267
7.5.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................267
7.6 WRITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS INTO F-ROM .................................. 269
7.6.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................269
7.7 COMPARING WITH PMC ......................................................................... 270
7.7.1 Menu Bar..............................................................................................................270
7.7.2 Program Transfer Wizard .....................................................................................271
7.7.2.1 Selecting a transfer method.............................................................................. 271
7.7.2.2 Selecting a transfer direction ........................................................................... 271

8 EXECUTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS ................ 272

8.1 EXECUTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS ................................................... 273
8.2 STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS ..................................................... 274
9 DIAGNOSIS......................................................................................... 275
9.1 LADDER MONITORING............................................................................ 276
9.1.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................276
9.1.2 [Monitor] Screen ..................................................................................................276
9.1.3 [Edit] Screen.........................................................................................................277
9.1.3.1 Multiple used check of the functional instruction parameter number.............. 278
9.1.4 Signal Trigger Stop Function ...............................................................................279
9.1.4.1 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 279
9.1.4.2 Executing the signal trigger stop function ....................................................... 280
9.1.4.3 Terminating the signal trigger stop function.................................................... 281
9.1.4.4 [Trigger Parameter] screen .............................................................................. 282
9.1.4.5 Context menu................................................................................................... 283
9.1.4.6 Shortcut key list ............................................................................................... 283
9.1.5 Mnemonic Monitor...............................................................................................284
9.2 SIGNAL STATUS ...................................................................................... 287
9.2.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................287
9.2.2 Toolbar .................................................................................................................288
9.2.3 Status Bar .............................................................................................................288
9.2.4 Context Menu .......................................................................................................289

c-6
B-63484EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS

9.2.5 Shortcut Keys .......................................................................................................289

9.3 PMC PARAMETERS ................................................................................. 290
9.3.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................290
9.3.2 Timer ....................................................................................................................290
9.3.2.1 Toolbar............................................................................................................. 291
9.3.2.2 Status bar ......................................................................................................... 291
9.3.2.3 Context menu................................................................................................... 291
9.3.2.4 Shortcut keys ................................................................................................... 292
9.3.3 Counter .................................................................................................................292
9.3.3.1 Toolbar............................................................................................................. 292
9.3.3.2 Context menu................................................................................................... 293
9.3.3.3 Shortcut keys ................................................................................................... 293
9.3.4 Keep Relay ...........................................................................................................293
9.3.4.1 Toolbar............................................................................................................. 293
9.3.4.2 Context menu................................................................................................... 294
9.3.4.3 Shortcut keys ................................................................................................... 294
9.3.4.4 Data for PMC control software........................................................................ 294
9.3.5 Data Table ............................................................................................................295
9.3.5.1 Toolbar............................................................................................................. 296
9.3.5.2 Status bar ......................................................................................................... 297
9.3.5.3 Shortcut keys ................................................................................................... 297
9.3.5.4 Input data range ............................................................................................... 297
9.3.5.5 Context menu................................................................................................... 297
9.3.6 Setting PMC Setting Parameters ..........................................................................298
9.3.6.1 Programmer protect function ........................................................................... 298
9.3.6.2 Procedure ......................................................................................................... 299
9.3.6.3 Setting items .................................................................................................... 299
9.3.6.4 Warning message............................................................................................. 301
9.3.6.5 Setting screen of the selectable I/O link assignment function ......................... 302
9.4 PMC ALARM STATUS .............................................................................. 304
9.4.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................304
9.4.2 Switching the Language in Which PMC Alarm Messages Are Displayed ..........305
9.5 PMC STATUS............................................................................................ 306
9.5.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................306
9.5.2 Display Items........................................................................................................307
9.6 SIGNAL TRACING .................................................................................... 308
9.6.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................308
9.6.2 Toolbar .................................................................................................................309
9.6.3 Status Bar .............................................................................................................309
9.6.4 Context Menu .......................................................................................................310

c-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63484EN/05

9.6.5 Shortcut Keys .......................................................................................................310

9.6.6 [Signal Trace Parameter] Screen ..........................................................................310
9.6.7 Automatic Trace Function at Power-On...............................................................311
9.7 SIGNAL ANALYSIS ................................................................................... 312
9.7.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................312
9.7.2 Toolbar .................................................................................................................313
9.7.3 Status Bar .............................................................................................................314
9.7.4 Context Menu .......................................................................................................314
9.7.5 Shortcut Keys .......................................................................................................315
9.7.6 [Signal Analysis Parameter] Screen .....................................................................315
9.7.7 [Signal Analysis Format] Screen..........................................................................317
9.7.8 [Gridline Format] Screen......................................................................................318
9.7.9 Automatic Signal Sampling Function at Power-On .............................................318
9.8 CLEARING PMC AREAS .......................................................................... 319
9.8.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................319
9.9 ACTIVATING THE I/O LINK ...................................................................... 320
9.9.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................320
9.10 SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION ..................................................................... 321
9.10.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................321
9.10.2 Toolbar .................................................................................................................321
9.10.3 Status Bar .............................................................................................................322
9.10.4 Setting Trace Parameters......................................................................................323
9.10.5 Setting Details of Trace Mode..............................................................................325
9.10.6 Setting Trace Parameters (Sampling Addresses)..................................................326
9.10.7 Context Menu .......................................................................................................328
9.10.8 Shortcut Keys .......................................................................................................328
9.10.9 Automatic Sampling Function at Power-On ........................................................328

10 EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION .................................. 329

10.1 ABOUT SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA ........................................................ 330
10.1.1 Relation between the Global Symbol and the Local Symbol...............................331
10.1.2 About the Symbol Type .......................................................................................333
10.1.3 About the Distinction of Symbol and Address.....................................................333
10.2 EDITING SYMBOL AND COMMENT ........................................................ 334
10.2.1 Toolbar .................................................................................................................334
10.2.2 Context Menu .......................................................................................................335
10.2.3 Add New Symbol and Comment..........................................................................336
10.2.4 Modifying Symbol and Comment Data ...............................................................337
c-8
B-63484EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS

10.2.5 Cut, Copy and Paste of Symbol or Comment Data ..............................................338

10.2.6 Deleting Symbol and Comment Data...................................................................338
10.2.7 Search ...................................................................................................................339
10.3 EDITING LADDER DIAGRAMS................................................................. 340
10.3.1 How to View whole Program ...............................................................................340
10.3.2 How to Display and Modify Ladder Program......................................................340
10.3.3 How to Create Ladder Program............................................................................341
10.3.4 Tool Tip................................................................................................................342
10.3.5 Comment of Contact and Coil..............................................................................343
10.3.6 How to Change Symbol or Address .....................................................................343
10.3.6.1 Search Function ............................................................................................... 343
10.3.6.2 Collective display function .............................................................................. 345
10.3.6.3 Replace function .............................................................................................. 347
10.3.7 How to Add Sub-program ....................................................................................350
10.3.8 Notes at Editing Ladder Program .........................................................................351
10.3.9 Input of Jump Label by Symbolic Name..............................................................352
10.4 AUTOMATIC ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION ............................... 356
10.4.1 Set Screen .............................................................................................................356
10.4.2 Set of Symbol .......................................................................................................357
10.4.3 Address Decision..................................................................................................358
10.5 CONVERTING TO SOURCE PROGRAMS............................................... 359
10.6 CONVERTING TO MNEMONIC ................................................................ 360
10.7 SYSTEM PARAMETER............................................................................. 361
10.7.1 Set of Display Language for Comment ................................................................361
10.8 COMPILATION .......................................................................................... 362
10.9 DECOMPILATION ..................................................................................... 363
10.10 PRINTING ................................................................................................. 364
10.10.1 Printing the System Parameters............................................................................364
10.10.2 Printing the Symbol Comment .............................................................................365
10.10.3 Printing the Ladder Diagram ................................................................................366
10.10.4 Printing Cross Reference......................................................................................367
10.10.5 Printing the Bit Address .......................................................................................367
10.11 SIGNAL STATUS ...................................................................................... 368
10.11.1 Toolbar .................................................................................................................368
10.12 T ADDRESS (TIMER)................................................................................ 369
10.12.1 Toolbar .................................................................................................................369
10.13 C ADDRESS (COUNTER)......................................................................... 369

c-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63484EN/05

10.13.1 Toolbar .................................................................................................................369

10.14 K ADDRESS (KEEP RELAY) .................................................................... 370
10.14.1 Toolbar .................................................................................................................370
10.15 D ADDRESS (DATA TABLE)..................................................................... 370
10.15.1 Toolbar .................................................................................................................370
10.16 SIGNAL TRACING .................................................................................... 371
10.16.1 Toolbar .................................................................................................................371
10.17 TOOLTIPS INDICATION ........................................................................... 372
10.18 MNEMONIC FILE FORMAT ...................................................................... 373
10.18.1 System Parameter .................................................................................................373
10.18.2 Symbol Comment.................................................................................................374
10.18.3 Ladder...................................................................................................................376

11 CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS.......................................... 377

11.1 CONVERTING FROM DOS-VERSION FANUC LADDER-II ..................... 378
11.1.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................378
11.2 CONVERTING TO DOS-VERSION FANUC LADDER-II ........................... 380
11.2.1 Procedure..............................................................................................................380
11.3 CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS BETWEEN PMC MODELS .... 381
11.3.1 Conversion by Changing System Parameters.......................................................381
11.3.2 Using System Program Data for Another Program ..............................................383
11.3.3 Converting Step Sequence Programs between Different Models.........................384

12 ERROR MESSAGES .......................................................................... 385

12.1 ERROR MESSAGE FORMAT ................................................................... 386
12.1.1 Function Symbols.................................................................................................386
12.1.2 Message Classification .........................................................................................387
12.2 ERROR MESSAGES................................................................................. 388
12.2.1 File ....................................................................................................................388
12.2.2 Title Editing..........................................................................................................389
12.2.3 I/O Module Editing ..............................................................................................389
12.2.4 System Parameter Editing ....................................................................................390
12.2.5 Ladder/Step Sequence Editing .............................................................................390
12.2.6 Message Editing ...................................................................................................394
12.2.7 Print ....................................................................................................................394
12.2.8 Compile ................................................................................................................394
12.2.9 Decompile ............................................................................................................399
12.2.10 Mnemonic Conversion .........................................................................................401

c-10
B-63484EN/05 TABLE OF CONTENTS

12.2.11 Input/Output .........................................................................................................408

12.2.12 Online ...................................................................................................................408

APPENDIX
A CABLE FOR DATA TRANSFER ........................................................ 413
B CONVERSION USING A SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERTER ............ 414
C LANGUAGE PROGRAM LINK FUNCTION........................................ 416
D MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL.................. 418
D.1 FILE FORMAT OF A MESSAGE SOURCE FILE ...................................... 422
D.1.1 Sample File...........................................................................................................424
D.1.2 Usable Characters.................................................................................................425
D.1.3 Entering Special Characters .................................................................................429
D.1.3.1 New line character ........................................................................................... 429
D.1.3.2 Numeric data.................................................................................................... 429
D.1.3.3 Reservation character....................................................................................... 430
D.2 USAGE ...................................................................................................... 431
D.3 ERROR MESSAGES................................................................................. 435
D.3.1 Error List ..............................................................................................................435

E THE DATA FORMAT OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE............... 437

E.1 OPTION OF IDENTIFICATION CODE ...................................................... 438
E.2 ABOUT THE CHARACTER OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE............. 440
E.3 COMPATIBILITY OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE ............................. 441

c-11
B-63484EN/05 1.SETUP

1 SETUP
This chapter describes the operating environment of Ladder Editing
Package (Windows). This chapter also describes how to set up Ladder
Editing Package (Windows) to make software ready for use.

-1-
1.SETUP B-63484EN/05

1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

The operating environment required for this software is as follows:

• Computer
PC/AT-compatible computer running Windows 98 SE, Me,
NT4.0, 2000 or XP.

• For Windows 98 SE
⋅ Pentium 133MHz or better CPU
⋅ 16MB or more memory (32MB or more recommended)

• For Windows NT 4.0

⋅ Pentium 166MHz or better CPU
⋅ 24MB or more memory (32MB or more recommended)

• For Windows Me or 2000

⋅ Pentium 166MHz or better CPU
⋅ 32MB or more memory (64MB or more recommended)

• For Windows XP
⋅ Pentium II 333MHz or better CPU
⋅ 64MB or more memory

• Hard disk
⋅ 30MB of free space required (at installation)
⋅ 120MB of free space required (at execution)

NOTE
Time required for ladder diagram editing and
processing of symbols and net comments is
affected by the free spaces of memory and the
hard disk. When handling a source program
including many ladders, symbols, comments, or net
comments or editing ladder diagrams on multiple
screens, allocate much more free spaces as far as
possible.

• Device driver
FANUC Open CNC Drivers and Libraries (A02B-0207-K737)
or
FANUC Open CNC Drivers and Libraries
(A02B-0207-K730(HSSB))

-2-
B-63484EN/05 1.SETUP

• CNC functions
Options for FANUC open-ended CNCs
<For Series 150 / Series 150i>
⋅ Expansion driver library function (A02B-0207-J801)
⋅ Ladder editing package function (A02B-0207-J821)
<For Series 16 / Series 18 / Series 16i / Series 18i / Series 21i>
⋅ Expansion driver library function (A02B-0207-J800)
⋅ Ladder editing package function (A02B-0207-J820)
<For Series 160 / Series 180 / Series 160i / Series 180i / Series
210i>
⋅ Expansion driver library function (A02B-0207-J800)
⋅ Ladder editing package function (A02B-0207-J820)
<For Series 0i-B / Series 0i-C>
⋅ Expansion driver library function (A02B-0207-J800)
⋅ Ladder editing package function (A02B-0207-J820)
<For Power Mate i-MODEL D/ Power Mate i-MODEL H>
⋅ Expansion driver library function (A02B-0259-J847)
⋅ Ladder editing package function (A02B-0259-J848)
<For Series 30i / Series 300i / Series 300is-MODEL A>
⋅ Expansion driver library function (A02B-0207-J900)
⋅ Ladder editing package function (A02B-0207-J820)
<For Series 31i / Series 310i / Series 310is-MODEL A>
⋅ Expansion driver library function (A02B-0207-J900)
⋅ Ladder editing package function (A02B-0207-J820)
<For Series 32i / Series 320i / Series 320is-MODEL A>
⋅ Expansion driver library function (A02B-0207-J900)
⋅ Ladder editing package function (A02B-0207-J820)

NOTE
It is recommended that the Ladder Editing Package
(Windows) be used on Windows 98 SE, Windows
NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows Me, or Windows
XP.

-3-
1.SETUP B-63484EN/05

1.2 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION

This section describes how to install or uninstall this software.

1.2.1 Installation

Procedure
1 Preparation prior to installation

1-1 Before installation, see Section 1.1, "OPERATING

ENVIRONMENT" to check the environment of the
computer being used.

2 Starting the installer

2-1 If any programs are running, terminate them.

2-2 Set the disk (A08B-9210-J511) in the CD-ROM drive.

Windows automatically starts installation.

2-3 If Windows does not automatically start installation, click

[Start Menu] - [Run]. Type the following in the Open field,
and then click <OK>

(CD-ROM drive name):\LepAutoRun.exe

3 Starting setup and confirming the license agreement

3-1 Ladder Editing Package (Windows) setup starts, displaying

the [Choose Setup Language] screen. Select Japanese or
English, and then click the <OK> button.

Fig. 1.2.1 (a)

-4-
B-63484EN/05 1.SETUP

3-2 The [Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Ladder

Editing Package[Windows]] screen appears.

Fig. 1.2.1 (b)

3-3 Click the <Next> button. Then, the [License Agreement]

screen appears.

Fig. 1.2.1 (c)

3-4 When you agree to the terms of the license agreement, and
wish to continue installation, click the <Yes> button.
Clicking the <No> button stops installation.

-5-
1.SETUP B-63484EN/05

4 Entering user information

4-1 The [Customer Information] screen appears.

Fig. 1.2.1 (d)

4-2 Enter [User Name], [Company Name], and [Serial Number]

and then click the <Next> button. Then, the [Registration
Confirmation] screen appears.

Fig. 1.2.1 (e)

4-3 Check that the registration information is correct. To

continue the installation, click the <Yes> button. Clicking
the <No> button returns you to the [User Information]
screen.

-6-
B-63484EN/05 1.SETUP

5 Selecting the installation destination and program folder

5-1 The [Choose Destination Location] screen appears.

Fig. 1.2.1 (f)

5-2 By default, the program is installed in C:\Program

Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\Ladder Editing Package.
To change the installation destination, click the [Browse…]
button, and then select the installation destination.

5-3 Click the <Next> button.

5-4 The [Select Program Folder] screen appears.

Fig. 1.2.1 (g)

5-5 Select the program folder in which you want to install the
program or create a folder. Then, click the <Next> button.

-7-
1.SETUP B-63484EN/05

6 Starting file copy operation and ending the installation

6-1 The [Start Copying Files] screen appears.

Fig. 1.2.1 (h)

6-2 Information for starting the program file copy operation is

displayed. To change the information, click the <Back>
button. Check that the displayed information is correct, and
then click <Next>. Then, file copy operation starts.

6-3 As the file copy operation terminates, the [Maintenance

Complete] screen appears.

Fig. 1.2.1 (i)

6-4 Clicking [Finish] terminates installation.

-8-
B-63484EN/05 1.SETUP

1.2.2 Uninstallation

Procedure
1 Terminating Ladder Editing Package (Windows)

1-1 Ladder Editing Package (Windows) cannot be uninstalled

while it is running. Terminate Ladder Editing Package
(Windows), and then uninstall it.

2 Starting the uninstaller

2-1 Click [Start Menu] - [Settings] - [Control Panel].

2-2 On the [Control Panel] screen, click [Add/Remove

Programs].

2-3 The [Add/Remove Programs Properties] screen appears.

Fig. 1.2.2 (a)

2-4 Select Ladder Editing Package (Windows), and then click

<Add/Remove>.

-9-
1.SETUP B-63484EN/05

3 Confirming uninstallation

3-1 A dialog box appears, asking whether you really want to

uninstall the program. Select <OK>.

Fig. 1.2.2 (b)

4 Executing uninstallation

The installed files, folders, and start menu items are deleted, and
the original system settings are restored.
Uninstallation then ends.
The uninstaller sometimes cannot uninstall all the files and
folders of Ladder Editing Package (Windows), such that some
files or folders may remain after uninstallation. Should this occur,
restart the system, and then delete the remaining files/folders by
using My Computer or Explorer.

- 10 -
B-63484EN/05 2.BASICS

2 BASICS
This chapter describes the basic items the user should understand
before using Ladder Editing Package (Windows).

- 11 -
2.BASICS B-63484EN/05

2.1 SYSTEM FILES

The system consists of the files described below.

• *.DLL
Install dynamic link library (DLL) files used for node selection in
the Windows system directory. For details, refer to the document
file saved on the following expansion driver/library disks.
⋅ Expansion driver/library disk (for Windows,
A02B-0207-K726)
⋅ Driver/library disk (for Windows, A02B-0207-K727 and for
Windows 95, A02B-0207-K730)

- 12 -
B-63484EN/05 2.BASICS

2.2 START AND END

This section describes how to start and end Ladder Editing Package
(Windows).

2.2.1 Starting Ladder Editing Package (Windows)

To start this software, use the following procedure:

Procedure
1 Click the [Start] button.
2 From the [Start] menu, select [Program].
3 From the [Program] menu, select the [Ladder Editing
Package(Windows)] folder.
4 From the [Ladder Editing Package(Windows)] folder, select
Ladder Editing Package (Windows).

2.2.2 Starting Ladder Editing Package (Windows) (Online

Connection)
By specifying the following argument in the executable file of Ladder
Editing Package (Windows), you can automatically connect Ladder
Editing Package (Windows) to a specified port.

• For an HSSB port

LEP.exe/COM =<NODE-number>
Example) LEP.exe/NODE=0

• For an Ethernet port

LEP.exe /H=<host-name>:<port-name>
Example) LEP.exe/H=190.0.55.55:8193

2.2.3 Terminating Ladder Editing Package (Windows)

To terminate this software, use the following procedure:

On the [File] menu, click [Exit]. Alternatively, click (<Close>

button) in the upper right corner of the parent window.

- 13 -
2.BASICS B-63484EN/05

2.3 WINDOW NAMES AND FUNCTIONS

This section describes the names and functions of the windows

displayed by this software.

As shown in the figure below, child windows are displayed within the
parent window. These are required for operations such as the creation
of sequence programs for the FANUC PMC
Main menu
Toolbar
Parent window

Edit toolbar

Child window

Child window

Status bar Soft keys

Fig. 2.3

• Parent window
The main window of this software.
Multiple child windows can be displayed within the parent
window.
• Child window
Child windows are displayed within the parent window.
Child windows are used for displaying and editing FANUC PMC
sequence programs.

- 14 -
B-63484EN/05 2.BASICS

2.3.1 Main Menu

Each main menu has submenus, as listed below.

Table 2.3
Main menu Submenu Reference chapter, section, or subsection
File Save As 3.9 SAVING PROGRAMS WITH NAMES
Import 3.10 IMPORTING PROGRAMS
Export 3.11 EXPORTING PROGRAMS
Print 4 PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
Preview 4 PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
Exit 2.2.3 Terminating Ladder Editing Package (Windows)
Edit Undo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Select All 3.3 EDITING LADDER DIAGRAMS
Add Data 3.5 EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS
Search Data 3.6 EDITING MESSAGES
Delete 3.7 EDITING I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT
Delete All
Find
Replace
Jump
View ToolBar
Status Bar
Softkey
Edit ToolBar 3.3 EDITING LADDER DIAGRAMS
Program List
Grid Lilne
Zoom
Diagnose Signal Status 9.2 SIGNAL STATUS
PMC Parameter 9.3 PMC PARAMETERS
Timer 9.3.2 Timers
Counter 9.3.3 Counters
Keep Relay 9.3.4 Keep Relays
Data Table 9.3.5 Data Table
Set Up 9.3.6 Setting PMC Parameters
PMC Alarm Status 9.4 PMC ALARM STATUS
PMC Status 9.5 PMC STATUS
Signal Trace 9.6 SIGNAL TRACING
Signal Analysis 9.7 SIGNAL ANALYSIS
Ladder Online/Offline 3.5 EDITING LADDER DIAGRAMS
Monitor/Editor 3.5 EDITING LADDER DIAGRAMS

- 15 -
2.BASICS B-63484EN/05

Table 2.3
Main menu Submenu Reference chapter, section, or subsection
Tool Mnemonic Convert 6.1 CONVERTING SOURCE PROGRAMS TO MNEMONIC FILES
Source Program Convert 6.2 CONVERTING MNEMONIC FILES TO SOURCE PROGRAMS
Data Conversion 11 CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
Data File→LAD File 11.1 CONVERSION FROM DOS FANUC LADDER-II
Data File←LAD File 11.2 CONVERSION TO DOS FANUC LADDER-II
Compile 5.1 COMPILATION
Decompile 5.2 DECOMPILATION
Communication 7.1 SETTING COMMUNICATION
Device Select
Load from PMC 7.1, 7.2 LOADING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS FROM PMC
Store to PMC 7.3, 7.4 STORING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS IN PMC
Clear PMC Memory 9.8 CLEARING PMC AREAS
I/O Link Restart 9.9 ACTIVATING THE I/O LINK
Backup 7.6 WRITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS INTO F-ROM
Program Run/Stop 8 RUNNING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
Option
Window Cascade
Tile
Arrange Icons
Help Topic
Help
About version information

2.3.2 Toolbar
The toolbar contains a set of buttons used for file operations and
editing.

<1><2><3> <4> <5> <6><7><8>

Fig. 2.3.2

<1> Print
Prints a program.
<2> About version information
Displays version information.
<3> Context-sensitive help
Displays the help text for the portion specified with the mouse.
<4> Run/stop program
Runs or stop a Ladder program.
<5> Online/Offline
Switches the system between online and offline modes.
<6>, <7> Ladder monitor, Online editing
Switches the system between ladder monitor and online editing.
<8> Signal trigger stop
Runs the signal trigger stop function.

- 16 -
B-63484EN/05 2.BASICS

2.3.3 Edit Toolbar

The edit tool bar contains a set of buttons used for editing ladder
diagrams.
You can input contacts and coils by using the edit tool bar.

2.3.4 Soft Keys

To perform operations with the currently selected child window, you
can select the displayed soft keys either by using the mouse or by
pressing keys. You can change the display size of soft keys using
[Softkey] in the [View] menu.

Fig. 2.3.4

2.3.5 Status Bar

The status bar provides information such as a sequence program name
and PMC model name.

2.3.6 Status Monitor

The target of connection (Loader or path number) and the state of the
communication with PMC are displayed on the top-right side of the
main window.
Non-display/display of Status monitor can be switched by [status
monitor] in [View] menu.

• When communicating to the first PMC

- 17 -
2.BASICS B-63484EN/05

2.4 DISPLAYING VERSION INFORMATION

This section describes how to display the version information of this

software for purposes of, for example, maintenance.

Procedure
1 Select [Help] - [About version information…].

Fig. 2.4

- 18 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3 CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE

PROGRAMS
This chapter describes how to create and edit sequence programs. A
sequence program consists of a title, system parameters, symbols,
comments, I/O modules, messages, and ladder/step sequences.

- 19 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.1 SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

This section describes sequence programs.

3.1.1 Procedure for Creating Sequence Programs

The following flowchart illustrates the procedure for creating a
sequence program.
Start control system development

Determine targets of control (machine and CNC)

Specify control behavior (calculate the number of DI/DO points and determine scale of control)

Specify interfaces (assign DI/DO )

Create sequence program (design, address mapping, coding)

Enter, edit, debug, and print sequence program

Off-line function
On-line function

Yes
New ?

No
Edit ladder Edit mnemonic
diagram
- Monitor/Edit ladder diagram
- Monitor signals

No
Debug ?

Debug completed? Yes

No No
Compile (Link)
Yes
Yes
Print ? Decompile

End Print sequence program

End

In online function, programming and monitoring are carried out on a personal computer
connected to the PMC.
In offline function, programming is carried out on a personal computer not connected to the
PMC.
The other PMC programming systems (for use on OPEN CNC) include FANUC LADDER
(DOS) , FANUC LADDER-II (DOS) and FANUC LADDER-III (Windows).
Refer to the following manuals:
- FANUC LADDER (for Use on PC) Operator's Manual (B-66131E)
- FANUC LADDER-II Operator's Manual (B-66184EN)
- FANUC LADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234EN)

- 20 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

• Sequence programs

A sequence program consists of the data listed below.

• Title data
• System parameters
• Symbols/comments
• Message data
• I/O module data
• I/O module comments
• Ladder level 1
• Ladder level 2
• Ladder level 3
• Ladder subprograms
• Step sequence subprograms
• Net comments
• Memory card format data

- 21 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

In Ladder Editing Package (Windows), a file with extension .LAD

(hereafter called a LAD file) holds all sequence program data.
Sequence program (LAD file)

Source program

System parameters
Title data
Symbols/comments
Message data
I/O module data
I/O module comments
Ladder level 1
Ladder level 2
Ladder level 3
Subprogram P1
Subprogram P2
:

Subprogram Pn
Net comments

Object code
Memory card format data

NOTE
1 In Ladder Editing Package (Windows), a sequence
program to be printed or edited offline is called a
source program.
2 An I/O module comment is one given to a module
address in the I/O unit. See Section 3.7, “Editing
I/O Module Assignment,” for details.

- 22 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

• Data flow

Ladder Editing Package (Windows)

Source program Mnemonic program

Mnemonic conversion
System parameters Conventional mnemonic not
using step sequences
Title data Source conversion
Symbols/comments
Message data
I/O module data
I/O module comments
Ladder level 1
Ladder level 2
Ladder level 3
Subprogram P1
Subprogram P2
:

Subprogram Pn
Net comments

Compile/Decompile

Object code
Memory card format data

CNC

- 23 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.1.2 PMC Programming Method

The ladder method is one of the most extensively used methods for
programming PMC-based sequence control. Because this method was
originally based on control circuits in relay panels, it was initially easy
for sequence control engineers to understand. As the number of PMC
functions has increased, however, sequence programs have become
large and complicated. To cope with this situation, we have introduced
step sequence programming.

• What is the step sequence method?

The step sequence method is a sequence control programming
method that is based on a programmable controller. This method
is intended to represent a flow of control directly using a
flowchart. With this method, an individual control module is
described using the conventional ladder method. Therefore, the
step sequence method allows the user to visually describe the
entire process flow. So, it is suitable for total process control.
See “Introduction--Features of Ladder Editing Package
(Windows) and its Functions Classified by PMC Model,” for
details on the models that can use step sequences.

• Sequence configuration
Ladder programs can take any one of the following five
configurations.
⋅ Ladder level 1
⋅ Ladder level 2
⋅ Ladder level 3
⋅ Ladder subprogram
⋅ Step sequence subprogram

NOTE
Ladder level 3 is omissible.

LEVEL1 (LADDER)

LEVEL2 (LADDER)

LEVEL3 (LADDER)

Sub Program P1 (Step Sequence)

Sub Program P2 (LADDER)

Sub Program P3 (LADDER)

:
Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)

- 24 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.1.3 Work Folders and Online Program Files

• Work folder
A program work folder is created automatically on a path set up
in the TMP environment variable. The work folder is called
WFLAD* where * represents any number.

• User file folder

A user file folder, called MyFladder, is created automatically in
the work folder mentioned above. A user file can be saved if
required, along with other data files, to a LAD file, when LAD
programs are saved.
When PMC parameters are transferred with the input/output
function, PMC_PRM.PRM in the user file folder is initially set
for a parameter file transfer destination and transfer source file
name.

• Online program file

If communication is started with no program open, a program is
loaded from the PMC, and the following LAD files are created
automatically in the LAD folder.
⋅ If connected with the main PMC:
PMC0000.LAD to PMC0009.LAD
⋅ If connected with the loader PMC:
PMC1000.LAD to PMC1009.LAD
⋅ If connected with 1’st PMC:
PMC0000.LAD to PMC0009.LAD
⋅ If connected with 2’nd PMC:
PMC0100.LAD to PMC0109.LAD
⋅ If connected with 3’rd PMC:
PMC0200.LAD to PMC0209.LAD
⋅ If connected with PMC for Dual check safety:
PMC0800.LAD to PMC0809.LAD

These files are referred to as online program files.

When there is an online program file, and if communication is

started with no program opened, an online program file that
matches that on the PMC is opened automatically. Therefore, the
program can be debugged online without loading it from the
PMC so often.

NOTE
Up to ten online program files can be held. When
you finish debugging program, save the program
file under a different file name.

- 25 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.1.4 PMC Type (Step Sequence and I/O Link Expansion) Setting
When the PMC type cannot be identified during start of
communication (because the PCM sequence program does not exist or
is corrupted), the PMC type of a new sequence program can be set.

Procedure
1 If the PMC type cannot be identified during start of
communication, the [PMC Type Setting] dialog box
automatically appears. Use this dialog box to enable or disable
[LEVEL3 Program Using], [Step sequence], and [I/O Link
expansion].

Fig. 3.1.4

2 Click the <OK> button to confirm the PMC type of a new

sequence program to be created.

NOTE
1 Addition or deletion can be performed for a level 3
program that has been newly created (only for level
3-enable models).
2 While another sequence program is being edited,
the system asks if you want to create a new
program, before displaying the [PMC Type Setting]
dialog box. After determining whether there is no
need to save the editing program, create a new
program.

- 26 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.1.5 Device Selection

Selection of CNC Main and LOADER

When the Loader control board is attached and both the Main side and
the Loader side PMC can communicate, the following dialog is
displayed.
Please specify the connected controller. When current controller is
changed, the communication with PMC is executed again.

Procedure
1 If the loader has been installed, the following dialog box
automatically appears at the start of communication.

Fig. 3.1.5 (a)

2 Select the device you want to connect using the [↑] and [↓] keys.
3 Click the <Exec> button.

NOTE
Selected connection is effective until the
communication is disconnected. To change
connection, please disconnect the communication
and reestablish the communication from the
communication in tool menu again.

- 27 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Selection of Multi-path PMC

[Selection of device] dialog box appeares by the following operation.

• Starting the communication to PMC when no program is opened.

• Starting the communication to PMC when PMC type of the
opened program does not support Multi-path PMC.
• Selecting [Device select…] in TOOL menu.

In the [Selection of device] dialog, specify the PMC path you want to
connect. When you change the destination, perform communication
with the PMC again.

Procedure
1 The [Selection of device] dialog appears. (Only the PMC paths to
which you can connect are displayed.)

Fig. 3.1.5 (b)

2 Select the path you want to connect using the [↑] and [↓] keys.
3 Click the <OK> button.

NOTE
1 It is not possible to connect with two or more PMC
paths at the same time.
2 When PMC type of the opened program support
Multi-path PMC and the connection to PMC is
started, LADDER EDITING PACKAGE (Windows)
is automatically connected with the PMC path of
the opened program.
3 [Selection of device] dialog is not displayed when
there is only one PMC path which can be
connected. (When selecting [Device select…] in
TOOL menu, [Selection of device] dialog is
displayed.)

- 28 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.2 EDITING TITLES

This section describes how to enter a title for a program created by the
machine tool builder.

NOTE
Titles can be displayed and edited only when the
current programmer mode (offline/online) is offline.
To change the programmer mode to offline, select
[Ladder] - [Online/Offline].

3.2.1 Procedure
1 Double-click the <Title> item in the [Program List] screen. The
[Edit Title] screen appears.

Fig. 3.2.1 (a)

Fig. 3.2.1 (b)

- 29 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

1-1 Set the necessary data. The maximum number of characters

that can be entered is as listed below:

Table 3.2.1
Maximum number of
Data
characters that can be entered
Machine Tool Builder Name 32
Machine Tool Name 32
PMC & CNC Name 32
PMC Program No. 4
Edition No. 2
Program Drawing No. 32
Date of Programming 16
Program Designed By 32
ROM Written By 32
Remarks 32

2 To close the [Edit Title] screen, click the <Close> button.

<Close> button

- 30 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3 EDITING LADDER DIAGRAMS

This section describes how to edit ladder diagrams.

Two different methods can be used to edit ladder diagrams. The first
method is offline editing, in which a personal computer for editing
ladder diagrams is used standalone, that is, without being connected to
the CNC (PMC). The second method is online editing, in which a
personal computer for editing ladder diagrams is connected to the
CNC (PMC).

3.3.1 Preparing for Offline Editing

Procedure
1 Check the current programmer mode (offline or online) on the
status bar.

Programmer mode

Blank : Offline : Online

Fig. 3.3.1

2 If the current programmer mode is online, select [Ladder] -

[Online/Offline] to change the current programmer mode to
offline.

3.3.2 Preparing for Online Editing

Starting online editing

Procedure
1 Check the current programmer mode (offline or online). (See Fig.
3.3.1.)
2 If the programmer mode is offline, select [Ladder] -
[Online/Offline] or click the [On Line/Off Line Change] button
to change the programmer mode to online.
3 When you select a ladder program which is not currently used in
the PMC, Ladder Editing Package (Windows) automatically
stores or loads the ladder program. (See Section 5.3,
"AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION,"
for details.)
4 After that, automatic decompilation is performed and ladder
monitoring starts.
5 Then, select [Ladder] - [Ladder Mode] to change the ladder mode
(monitor or editor) to editor.

- 31 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

NOTE
1 If a ladder program to be edited online does not
match one in the PMC, it is impossible to change
the ladder mode to edit. Before trying to match the
ladder to be edited to that in the PMC, store or load
the ladder program to be edited.
2 A level 3 program can be added by right-clicking
the [Program List] screen and then clicking [Add
LEVEL3]. Level 3 programs can be added only
when the current programmer mode is offline.

Terminating online editing

Procedure
1 Select [Ladder] - [Online/Offline] or click the [On Line/Off Line
Change] button to change the programmer mode to offline. If the
ladder program in the PMC is not updated, the following dialog
box appears. Update the ladder program.

Fig. 3.3.2

2 After that, a dialog box appears, which prompts you to perform

decompilation to make the contents of the ladder program in the
PMC consistent with those of the ladder program on the personal
computer. Perform decompilation.

NOTE
Back up any online-edited ladder program in the
PMC to F-ROM of the PMC. (See Section 7.6,
"WRITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS INTO
F-ROM," for details.)

- 32 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.3 Method of Displaying the Ladder Diagram Editing Screen

Procedure
1 Select [View] - [Program List]. The [Program List] screen
appears. (Usually, this screen appears automatically when a LAD
file is created or opened.)

Ladder program

Step sequence program

Fig. 3.3.3 (a)

2 On the [Program List] screen, double-click the ladder program

you want to edit. Alternatively, select the ladder program and
press the [Enter] or [F10] key.

- 33 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Summary of the ladder diagram editing screen

Resize button Address display format Update button

Ladder program name Undo button

Search button

Zoom-out button

Zoom-in button

Display always button Display window

Insert button
Delete all button

Replace button

Edit window

Error status Display net [total number of nets] Ladder mode Input mode

Fig. 3.3.3 (b)

Global search button Browse button

Fig. 3.3.3 (c)

Display window
Ladder program is displayed here.

Edit window
Ladder program is edited here. When the ladder program in this
window is inserted or overwrote to the display window, the
ladder program in the display window is changed

Insert button
Inserts ladders in the ladder program (display window) to the edit
window.

- 34 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Replace button
Replaces ladders in the ladder program (display window) with
those in the edit window.

Erase all button

Erases all ladders from the edit window.

Update button (for online editing only)

Updates the ladders in the PMC with the those in the display
window.

Undo button (for online editing only)

Returns the ladders in the display window to the state existing
the last time the [Restore] button was pressed. (This operation
nullifies all the changes you made after the latest update.

Zoom-in button
Magnifies ladder diagrams.

Zoom-out button
Reduces (shrinks) ladder diagrams.

Resize button
Make the size of a ladder diagram display match the window
size.

Search button
Searches the display or edit window for an address or symbol.

Address display format

Specifies the display format for ladders on the display or edit
window.

Error status
Displays information about errors.

Display net [total number of nets]

On the display window, displays the range of displayed net
numbers and the total number of nets. On the edit window,
displays the current cursor position.

Ladder mode
Display the current ladder mode (monitor or edit). To change the
ladder mode, select [Ladder] - [Monitor/Editor].

Input mode
To change the input mode (insert or overwrite), press the [Insert]
key.

- 35 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Display always Ctrl+T

Keeps the ladder diagram editing window displayed.
When the ON, multiple Ladder windows can be displayed at the
same time. When the OFF, if another ladder diagram editing
window is opened, the displayed window is automatically closed.
The default is specified by Always display a window of the
Ladder tab of the option. (choose [Option...] from the [Tool]
menu)

Global search Ctrl+F2

Changes the search mode to global search.

Display Ctrl+W
Opens a window for browsing another part of the ladder diagram
being edited.

Soft keys
The following shows the soft keys that can be used with the edit
window.

• Normal state

Fig. 3.3.3 (d)

• When the Shift key is pressed

Fig. 3.3.3 (e)

• When the Ctrl key is pressed

Fig. 3.3.3 (f)

NOTE
To display soft keys, select [View] - [Softkey].

Edit tool bar

Fig. 3.3.3 (g)

The edit tool bar contains buttons for entering relays and coils, using
the mouse. When you click a button on the edit tool bar and move the
mouse pointer to the edit window, the mouse pointer changes its shape
to the relay or coil corresponding to the clicked button. Under this
condition, left-clicking causes the relay or coil to be entered in the
current mouse pointer position. Right-clicking resumes the usual
mouse pointer shape.

- 36 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

NOTE
1 To display the edit tool bar, select [View] - [Edit
ToolBar].
2 The edit tool bar can be detached from the window
to which it belongs and moved to any position on
the screen by clicking between its buttons and
dragging.

Shortcut keys
Table 3.3.3
Shortcut key Function
[F2] Down Coil Search
[Shift] + [F2] Up Coil Search
[Ctrl] + [F2] Global Search
[F3] Search next (downward)
[Shift] + [F3] Search next (upward)
[Ctrl] + [F3] Seach Address
[F4]

[Shift] + [F4]

[F5]

[Shift] + [F5]
[Ctrl] + [F5] Replace
[F6] S
[Shift] + [F6] R
[F7] Vertical line (Left side)
[Shift] + [F7] Vertical line (Right side)
[Ctrl] + [F7] Insert element
[F8] Horizontal line
[Shift] + [F8] Clear element (repeatable)
[Ctrl] + [F8] Insert line
[F9] Function instruction
[Shift] + [F9] Net comment
[Ctrl] + [F9] Insert Net (forward)
[Ctrl] + [F10] Insert Net (backward)
[Delete] Clear element
[Ctrl] + [A] Edit – Select all
[Ctrl] + [C] Edit – Copy
[Ctrl] + [D] Edit – Address display switch
[Ctrl] + [F] Edit – Search
[Ctrl] + [G] Edit – Jump to specified net number
[Ctrl] + [H] Edit – Replace
[Ctrl] + [R] Restore (for Online editting)
[Ctrl] + [T] Stay opened
[Ctrl] + [U] Update (for Online editting)
[Ctrl] + [V] Edit – Paste
[Ctrl] + [W] View
[Ctrl] + [Y] Redo
[Ctrl] + [Z] Undo

- 37 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Table 3.3.3
Shortcut key Function
[Home] Display left end
[End] Display right end
[Ctrl] + [Home] Jump to beginning
[Ctrl] + [End] Jump to end
[Ctrl] + [↑] Jump to previous net
[Ctrl] + [↓] Jump to next net
[Ctrl] + [PageUp] Jump to next page
[Ctrl] + [PageDown] Jump to previous page

Context menu
Right-clicking the ladder editing screen or pressing [Shift]+[F10]
displays the context menu. See Table 3.3.3 for details of each
function.

Fig. 3.3.3 (h)

- 38 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.4 Changing Ladder Programs

This subsection describes how to modify ladder programs.

NOTE
1 To modify a ladder program, copy ladders from the
display window to the edit window. Then, change
them on the display window and substitute the
ladders on the display window with those modified
on the edit window.
2 If there is a ladder error in the ladders on the edit
window, it is impossible to select the <Insert> and
<Replace> buttons.
3 Double-clicking a ladder on the display window
causes the ladders in the same net as the clicked
ladder to be copied to the edit window.

Procedure
1 On the display window, position the cursor to the ladder you
want to modify, using the cursor control keys.

Fig. 3.3.4 (a)

- 39 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

2 Press the [Enter] key. (Alternatively, double-click the ladder you

want to modify.)

Fig. 3.3.4 (b)

3 Modify the ladder on the edit window.

For an explanation of how to operate ladders on the edit window,
see the subsections listed below:

Table 3.3.4
Operation Subsection
Entering basic instructions 3.3.6 “Entering Basic Instructions”
Entering horizontal lines 3.3.8 “Entering Horizontal Lines”
Entering and deleting vertical
3.3.9 “Entering and Deleting Vertical Lines”
lines
Entering function instructions 3.3.7 “Entering Function Instructions”

- 40 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

4 After you finished modifying ladders, click the <Replace>

button.

Fig. 3.3.4 (c)

5 Select the replacement position, using the [↓] key or [↑] key, and
then click the <Exec> button

Fig. 3.3.4 (d)

- 41 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.5 Inserting Ladders from the Edit Window into a Ladder

Program
This subsection describes how to insert ladders from the edit window
into a ladder program (on the display window).

NOTE
1 If there is a ladder error in a ladder in the edit
window, it is impossible to select the <Insert> and
<Replace> buttons.
2 Double-clicking a ladder in the display window
causes the ladders in the same net as the clicked
ladder to be copied to the edit window.

Procedure
1 In the edit window, create the ladders you want to insert into a
ladder program.
For an explanation about how to operate the ladders on the edit
window, see the subsections listed below:

Table 3.3.5
Operation Subsection
Entering basic instructions 3.3.6 “Entering Basic Instructions”
Entering horizontal lines 3.3.8 “Entering Horizontal Lines”
Entering and deleting vertical
3.3.9 “Entering and Deleting Vertical Lines”
lines
Entering function instructions 3.3.7 “Entering Function Instructions”

Fig. 3.3.5 (a)

- 42 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Click the <Insert> button.

Fig. 3.3.5 (b)

3 Select the insertion position, using the [↓] key or [↑] key, and
then click the <Exec> button.

Fig. 3.3.5 (c)

- 43 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.6 Entering Basic Instructions

This subsection describes how to enter basic instructions (relays and
coils) in the edit window.

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a basic
instruction, using the cursor control keys. (Alternatively, click
the point.)

Fig. 3.3.6 (a)

2 Press the key that corresponds to the basic instruction you want
to enter.

Table 3.3.6
Key Basic instruction
[F5]

[Shift] + [F5]

[F6]

[Shift] + [F6]
[Shift] + [F7] S
[Shift] + [F8] R

- 44 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3 Position the cursor to the basic instruction you entered, using the
cursor control keys, and then press the [Enter] key. (Alternatively,
double-click the basic instruction.)

Fig. 3.3.6 (b)

4 Enter an address or symbol, and then press the [Enter] key.

Fig. 3.3.6 (c)

- 45 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

After entering an address or symbol, you can enter basic instructions

using function keys.

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a basic
instruction, using the cursor control keys. (Alternatively, click
the point.)

Fig. 3.3.6 (d)

2 Enter an address or symbol.

Fig. 3.3.6 (e)

- 46 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3 Press the key that corresponds to the basic instruction you want
to enter. (See Table 3.3.6.)

Fig. 3.3.6 (f)

- 47 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.7 Entering Function Instructions

This subsection describes how to enter function instructions in the edit
window.

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a
function instruction, using the cursor control keys. (Alternatively,
click the point.)

Fig. 3.3.7 (a)

2 Press the [F9] key to display the [Select function] dialog box.

Fig. 3.3.7 (b)

- 48 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3 Select the function instruction you want to enter, and then press
the <OK> button.

Fig. 3.3.7 (c)

4 Enter the parameters for the instruction you entered.

Fig. 3.3.7 (d)

- 49 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

After entering a function instruction number or name, you can enter a

function instruction using the [F9] key.

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a
function instruction, using the cursor control keys. (Alternatively,
click the point.)

Fig. 3.3.7 (e)

2 Enter a function instruction number or name.

Fig. 3.3.7 (f)

- 50 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3 Press the [F9] key.

Fig. 3.3.7 (g)

- 51 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.8 Entering Horizontal Lines

This subsection describes how to enter horizontal lines in the edit
window.

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a
horizontal line. (Alternatively, click the point.)

Fig. 3.3.8 (a)

2 Press the [F8] key.

Fig. 3.3.8 (b)

- 52 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.9 Entering and Deleting Vertical Lines

This subsection describes how to enter and delete vertical lines in the
edit window.

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a vertical
line, using the cursor control keys. (Alternatively, click the
point.)

Fig. 3.3.9 (a)

2 Press the [F8] key, and then press the [↑] or [↓] key. The vertical
line is entered. (To delete the vertical line, hold down the [Shift]
key and then press the [↑] or [↓] key.)

Fig. 3.3.9 (b)

- 53 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.10 Adding Ladder Subprograms

This subsection describes how to add ladder subprograms.

Procedure
1 Right-click on the program list screen, and then click [Add
sub-program F9].

Fig. 3.3.10 (a)

2 The [Add sub-program] dialog box appears.

Fig. 3.3.10 (b)

3 Enter [sub-program].

4 Select [Ladder] from [Kind of Ladder].

5 Enter [Symbol] and [RelayComment], and then click the <OK>

button.

6 The subprogram is added, and the screen for the added ladder
program appears.

- 54 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.11 Deleting Ladder Subprograms

This subsection describes how to delete subprograms.

Procedure
1 On the program list screen, position the pointer to the
subprogram you want to delete and right-click. Then, click
[Delete sub-program F6].

Fig. 3.3.11 (a)

2 The following dialog box appears. To delete the subprogram,

click <Yes>.

Fig. 3.3.11 (b)

3 Delete the symbols and relay comments from a subprogram.

Fig. 3.5.11 (c)

3-1 Click the right mouse button and select [Property].

3-2 Click the [Symbol&RelayComment Delete] button.

- 55 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.12 Editing Net Comments

This subsection describes how to edit net comments.

Procedure for adding net comments

Procedure
1 In the display window, position the mouse pointer to the point
where you want to add a net comment, and then right-click.

Fig. 3.3.12 (a)

2 Select [Insert] - [Net comment] , and then enter a net comment.

Fig. 3.3.12 (b)

- 56 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

To check the number of characters in the entered net comment,

press the <Preview> button.
The preview screen appears.

Fig. 3.3.12 (c)

3 After you finish entering the net comment, press the <OK>
button.

Fig. 3.3.12 (d)

- 57 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Procedure for editing net comments

Procedure
1 In the display window, double-click the net comment you want
to modify.
The [Net comment] screen appears.

Fig. 3.3.12 (e)

2 Edit the character strings for the net comment. After you finish
editing, press the <OK> button. The net comment in the display
window is updated.

- 58 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.13 Deleting Net Comments

This subsection describes how to delete net comments.

Procedure
1 In the display window, position the mouse pointer to the net
comment you want to delete, and then right-click.

Fig. 3.3.13 (a)

2 Select [Delete] - [Net comment].

3 The following dialog box appears. To delete the net comment,

select <OK>.

Fig. 3.3.13 (b)

- 59 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.14 Adding Page Breaks

This subsection describes how to add page breaks.

Procedure
1 In the display window, position the mouse pointer to the point
where you want to add a page break, and then right-click.

Fig. 3.3.14

2 Select [Insert] - [New page]. The page break is added.

- 60 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.15 Deleting Page Breaks

This subsection describes how to delete page breaks.

Procedure
1 In the display window, position the mouse pointer to the page
break you want to delete, and then right-click.

Fig. 3.3.15 (a)

2 Select [Delete] - [New page].

3 The following dialog box appears. To delete, select <OK>.

Fig. 3.3.15 (b)

- 61 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.16 Deleting Nets

This subsection describes how to delete nets.

Procedure
1 In the display window, select the range of nets you want to delete,
using the mouse or cursor control keys.

2 Position the mouse pointer to the selected range, and then

right-click.

Fig. 3.3.16 (a)

3 Select [Net] from [Delete].

4 The following dialog box appears. To delete it, select <OK>.

Fig. 3.3.16 (b)

- 62 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.17 Search
This subsection describes the ladder program search function.

Procedure
1 Choose [Search] from the [Edit] menu.
The [Search] screen appears.

Fig. 3.3.17 (a)

1-1 Search kind

Select Address/Symbol or Functional instruction.

1-2 Program
Click the <Select> button to open the [Program select
dialog] screen, then select a search target program.

1-3 Global search

Check this check box to select multiple search target
programs at a time.

Fig. 3.3.17 (b)

- 63 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

2 When Address/Symbol is selected

Fig. 3.3.17 (c)

2-1 Instruction for search

Check search target instructions.

All
Searches for all types of instructions.

Select
Select a desired instruction you want to search for.

Write coils
Searches for only write coils.

3 When Function instruction is selected

Fig. 3.3.17 (d)

3-1 Parameter
Enter parameters as search conditions according to
Functional instruction selected in Search kind.

- 64 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

4 Specify a character string you want to search for.

4-1 Search string

Enter a character string to be searched for.
In a character string to be found, two types of wildcards can
be used: a question mark (?) and an asterisk (*). A wildcard
substitutes for one or multiple characters.
A question mark (?) is used to represent zero or one
character. This wildcard can be used more than once to
represent characters.
An asterisk (*) represents zero or more characters.
Multiple addresses can be specified by delimiting them
from each other by a comma (,) or semicolon (;). (Example:
Y0.0;X0.0)

4-2 Wildcard search

Check this check box if a specified character string to be
found includes wildcards.

4-3 Multiple search strings

Check this check box to specify multiple character strings to
be searched for.

4-4 Search direction

Select Upper direction or Lower direction as the direction of
search.

4-5 Search result list display

Check this check box to display the search results on the
[Search result list (call)] screen in a batch.
The [Search result list (call)] screen displays program
numbers, net numbers, ladder diagrams, and coil comments.

Fig. 3.3.17 (e)

- 65 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

5 Execute search operation.

If Search result list display is checked, click the <Exec> button.
In other cases, click the <Next search> button.

6 Clear search condition settings.

Click the [Clear] button. The setting of each item is initialized.

3.3.17.1 Context menu

Search is possible with the easy operation by right-click operation of
the mouse. The context menu is displayed by the right-click after you
move cursor to the address or the functional instruction to search. You
can search by displayed "Find" menu.

Fig. 3.3.17.1

In the open ladder source program, the relay address,

Search the coil address, the functional instruction, and the
byte address are searched.
In all ladder source program, the relay address, the
Global search coil address, the functional instruction, and the byte
address are searched.
In the open ladder source program, the coil address is
Coil Search
searched.
In all ladder source program, the coil address is
Global coil search
searched.

NOTE
1 The editing screen separated into the display and
the editing window is not supported.
2 The [Monitor] and the [Signal Trigger] of the online
mode are not supported.
3 The step sequence programs is not supported.

- 66 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.17.2 Soft key

The address, the symbol and the functional instruction in ladder
diagram can be searched by the soft key. Two modes of operation can
be chosen by the following check of the option screen: From the
[Tool] menu, choose [Options], then click [Ladder] tab.

Table 3.3.17.2
Shortcut
Setting Soft key display Explanation
key
No check [F2] Down Coil Search The address and the symbol of the cursor position are taken in, and
the downward coil of cursor is searched.
[F3] Down Search The downward contact, coil and functional instruction of cursor are
searched using the conditions inputted in the search screen.
[Shift]+[F2] Up Coil Search The address and the symbol of the cursor position are taken in, and
the upward coil of cursor is searched.
[Shift]+[F3] Up Search The upward contact, coil and functional instruction of cursor are
searched using the conditions inputted in the search screen.
[Ctrl]+[F2] Global Search The search range changes the global or the local.

[Ctrl]+[F3] Search Address The address and the symbol of the cursor position are taken in.
Check [F2] Down Coil Search The address and the symbol of the cursor position are taken in, and
the downward coil of cursor is searched.
[F3] Down Search The address, the symbol and the functional instruction of the cursor
position are taken in, and the downward coil of cursor is searched.
[Shift]+[F2] Up Coil Search The address and the symbol of the cursor position are taken in, and
the upward coil of cursor is searched.
[Shift]+[F3] Up Search The address, the symbol and the functional instruction of the cursor
position are taken in, and the upward coil of cursor is searched.
[Ctrl]+[F2] Global Search The search range changes the global or the local.

- 67 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.18 Collective Display

Collective display is a function with which nets extracted under
multiple search conditions can be monitored (in the online mode) and
displayed in one window.

3.3.18.1 Setting collective display extraction conditions

Procedure
1 Double-click the <Collective Display> item on the [Program
List] screen. The [Collective Display] screen appears.
For buttons and input items, see the next page and later.

Fig. 3.3.18.1 (a)

Fig. 3.3.18.1 (b)

- 68 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Click the <Add Condition> button. The [Search] screen appears.

Fig. 3.3.18.1 (c)

2-1 After setting search conditions, click the <OK> button.

For each setting item, see Subsection 3.3.17, "Search."

3 The [Setting of search condition-name] screen appears.

Fig. 3.3.18.1 (d)

3-1 A character string that consists of the words "Search of"

added to the start of a character string set in Search string on
the [Search] screen is displayed. (Example: Search of Y0.0)
A set character string can be modified.
A set character string is displayed as a search condition
name in the search condition list on the [Search Monitor]
screen.

3-2 After setting a desired character string, click the <OK>

button.

- 69 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4 The [Collective Display] screen updated appears.

Fig. 3.3.18.1 (e)

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to add search conditions.

Fig. 3.3.18.1 (f)

5-1 <Edit Condition> button

This button is used to edit the search condition where the
cursor is placed.

5-2 <Rename Condition> button

This button is used to rename the search condition where
the cursor is placed.

5-3 <Delete Condition> button

This button is used to delete the search condition where the
cursor is placed.

- 70 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

6 Check the check boxes of search conditions to be enabled, then

set a desired collective display condition name in Condition
Name.

Fig. 3.3.18.1 (g)

6-1 Click the <OK> button.

Extracted nets are collectively displayed on the screen.
The same information can also be monitored in the online
mode.
An extraction condition is added to the <Collective
Display> item on the [Program List] screen.

Fig. 3.3.18.1 (h)

- 71 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.18.2 Executing collective display

Procedure
1 On the [Program List] screen, move the mouse pointer to the
extraction condition used for collective display execution, then
click the right mouse button.

Fig. 3.3.18.2 (a)

2 Choose [Open]. Then, the extracted nets are collectively

displayed on the screen. The same information can also be
monitored in the online mode.

Fig. 3.3.18.2 (b)

- 72 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.18.3 Modifying collective display extraction conditions

Procedure
1 On the [Program List] screen, move the mouse pointer to an
extraction condition to be modified, then click the right mouse
button.

Fig. 3.3.18.3

2 Choose [propeRty]. Then, the [Collective Display] screen

appears.
For extraction condition setting, see Subsection 3.3.18.1, "Setting
collective display extraction conditions."

- 73 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.18.4 Deleting collective display extraction conditions

Procedure
1 On the [Program List] screen, move the mouse pointer to an
extraction condition to be deleted, then click the right mouse
button.

Fig. 3.3.18.4 (a)

2 Choose [Delete]. Then, a message for checking whether the

selected condition may be deleted appears.
Click the <Yes> button to execute deletion.
Click the <No> button to cancel deletion.

Fig. 3.3.18.4 (b)

- 74 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.19 Setting Ladder Display

You can do the setting relevant to display and operation of the ladder
diagram.

• The number of contacts and coil per row can be specified.

• The address, symbol, and comment of the basic instruction
pointed with the mouse can be displayed.
• The grid lines can be displayed on the ladder diagram.
• The ladder diagram editing and display can be edited in one
display window.
• Multiple Ladder windows can be displayed at the same time.
• The undo number operated in the ladder diagram edit can be
specified.

Procedure
1 From the [Tool] menu, choose [Options], then click [Ladder] tab.

Fig. 3.3.19 (a) The comment is 1 set.

- 75 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Fig. 3.3.19 (b) The comment is 2 sets.

Fig. 3.3.19 (c) The comment is 4 sets.

1-1 Number of contacts + coil a line

Set the desired number of contacts and coils per row. A
value from 8 to 20 (columns) can be set.

NOTE
1 If the number of contacts and coils per row is
changed, a ladder diagram in the edit window and
clipboard is deleted, and reediting is disabled.
2 A net that has more relays or coils than the set
number of contacts and coils is displayed as a
continuation net as conventionally done.

- 76 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

1-2 ToolTips
When the pointer is positioned to a basic instruction in a
ladder diagram, the information such as the address, the
symbol and the comment is displayed. Tool tip is displayed
when checked.

1-3 Grid
Specifies that grid lines are displayed on the ladder diagram.
It is displayed when checked.

1-4 Editing ladder diagram on display window

Specifies that the ladder diagram is edited in the display
window. The display and editing of a ladder diagram are
possible in one window when checking.

1-5 Always display a window

Specifies that the ladder diagram editing window is always
displayed. Multiple Ladder windows can be displayed at the
same time when checked.

1-6 Undo max number

The operation of you in the ladder editing screen can be
restored. The maximum number of the operations (Ctrl+Z)
to restore is specified.

1-7 Search using the address/symbol on cursor

You can specify the way of the search by the soft key, and
the search by the context menu in the ladder edit display.
When there is no check of this item, you can search by F3
key in the online monitor. The search condition is set up in
the search screen.

1-8 Show comment of contact

Select the comment which you want to display as the
comment of contact in ladder edit display. When the
comment is 4 sets, the comment of status bar can be
specified by this item.

1-9 Show comment of Coil

Select the comment which you want to display as the
comment of coil in ladder edit display.

- 77 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

2 Click the <Details...> button. A dialog box appears. In this dialog

box, specify the character font, colors, and connection line
thickness displayed in a ladder diagram.

Fig. 3.3.19 (d)

2-1 Font
Click the <Setting...> button. A dialog box appears. In this
dialog box, specify the font name, style, and size of
characters displayed in a ladder diagram.

Fig. 3.3.19 (e)

- 78 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2-2 Colors
Click the <Setting...> button. A dialog appears. In this
dialog box, specify the colors of items displayed in a ladder
diagram.

Fig. 3.3.19 (f)

2-3 Signal Off/Step Sequence

Specifies the thickness of connection lines in the signal off
state or in step sequence.

2-4 Signal On/Error Net

Specifies the thickness of connection lines in the signal on
state or in an erroneous net.

2-5 ToolTips Font

Click the <Setting...> button. A dialog appears. In this
dialog box, specify the font name, style, size, and color of
characters for tool tip display.

Fig. 3.3.19 (g)

- 79 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.20 Changing Signal Addresses and Function Instruction

Parameters in the Display Window
This subsection describes how to change signals addresses and
function instruction parameters in the display window.

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the signal address or function instruction
parameter you want to change.

2 Press and hold down the [Shift] key and press the [Enter] key,
and the address or parameter will enter the change-enabled state.
(You can also key in directly after positioning the cursor.)

Fig. 3.3.20

3 Change the signal address or function instruction parameter, and

press the [Enter] key.

NOTE
1 You can also enter a symbol as a signal address.
2 You cannot change function instruction numbers or
the first parameters of the function instructions
ADDB, AND, COMPB, DIVB, EOR, MULB, OR,
and SUBB.

- 80 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.21 Changing Contacts and Coils in the Display Window

This subsection describes how to change contacts and coils in the
display window.

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the contact or coil you want to change.

Fig. 3.3.21 (a)

2 Click the soft key that corresponds to the contact or coil you
want to change. (You can also change the contact or coil to the
one selected with the edit toolbar.)

Fig. 3.3.21 (b)

NOTE
You cannot insert or delete contacts/coils. Nor can
you enter horizontal/vertical lines.

- 81 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.22 Checking the Number of Program Steps

This subsection describes how to check the total number of steps in a
ladder program and the number of steps in each subprogram.

Procedure
1 On the [Program List] screen, position the pointer to a program
for which you want to check the number of program steps and
click the right mouse button. Then, click [Properties].

Fig. 3.3.22 (a)

2-1 Ladder
The total number of steps in the program is displayed.

Fig. 3.3.22 (b)

2-2 LEVEL1
Displays the number of steps in each of LEVEL1 to
LEVEL3.

Fig. 3.3.22 (c)

- 82 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2-3 Sub-program
Displays the number of steps in each subprogram.

Fig. 3.3.22 (d)

NOTE
1 If a step sequence program is contained, the total
number of program steps is not displayed.
2 The number of steps in a step sequence program
is not displayed.
3 In online mode, the number of program steps is not
displayed.

3.3.23 Replace
This subsection describes the ladder program replace function.

Procedure
1 From the [Edit] menu, choose [Replace].
The [Replace] screen appears.

Fig. 3.3.23 (a)

- 83 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

1-1 Program
Click the <Select…> button to open the [Program select
dialog] screen. Then, select the program in which you want
to search for a string.

Fig. 3.3.23 (b)

1-2 Search string

Enter a character string you want to search for.
In a character string to be searched for, two types of
wildcards can be used: a question mark (?) and an asterisk
(*).

1-3 Replace string

Enter a character string you want to replace with.
In a character string to be replaced with, two types of
wildcards can be used: a question mark (?) and an asterisk
(*).

NOTE
1 A wildcard can substitute for one or multiple
characters.
2 A question mark (?) represents one character. This
wildcard can be used more than once to represent
characters.
3 An asterisk (*) represents zero or more characters.

1-4 Wildcard search

Check this check box if a character string to be replaced
with includes wildcards.

- 84 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Execute replace operation.

2-1 <Next search> button
Searches for the target character string.

2-2 <Replace> button

Replaces [Search string] with [Replace string].

2-3 <Replace all> button

Replaces all occurrences of [Search string] with [Replace
string].

2-4 <Cancel> button

Cancels replace operation and closes the [Replace] dialog
box.

2-5 <Clear> button

Places all items in their initial state.

3 Wild card
3-1 Asterisk (*)
The following types of wildcard replacement using asterisks
are available:
Character string to be replaced with
Y200 Y* Y200.1 Y*.1 Y200.*
X100 A B B B B
searched for
string to be
Character

X* A B B B B
X100.0 B B A B B
X*.0 B B A C A
X100.* B B A A A
A : Can be replaced.
B : Cannot be replaced.
C : Can be replaced only when the signal names are the
same.
(Example) X*.0 → X*.1

The following types of wildcard specifications are not

available:
X1* X1*1 X*1 X*1*
X1*.0 X1*1.0 X*1.0 X*1*.0
X1*.* X1*1.* X*1.* X*1*.*
X*.* *.*

3-2 Question (?)

The following types of wildcard replacement using question
marks are available:
Can be replaced. Cannot be replaced.
X0??0 → Y0??0 X0??0 → Y0?00
X0??0 → Y0?0?
X0??0 → Y0???
X0??0 → Y0??0.0
X0??0.0 → Y0??0.0 X0??0.0 → Y0??0.?
X0??0.0 → Y0??0

- 85 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

NOTE
1 Address P can be replaced with another character
string only in the CALL and CALLU instructions.
2 No wildcards can be used for replacing an address
using a symbol.
3 No wildcards can be used in a signal name.

3.3.24 Changing Ladder Programs on the Display Window

This subsection describes how to modify a ladder program only on the
display window without using the edit window.

3.3.24.1 Changing the ladder editing mode

From the [Tool] menu, choose [Option].
In the [Option] dialog box, click the [Ladder] tab.

Fig. 3.3.24.1

Check [Editing ladder diagram on display window] under Method of

editing ladder diagram (Offline).

- 86 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.24.2 Inserting an edit line

Procedure
Move the cursor to a position where you want to enter an edit line,
using direction keys. Click the right mouse button and select the
[Insert] menu.

Fig. 3.3.24.2

- 87 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.24.3 Entering basic instructions

1 This subsection describes how to enter basic instructions (relays
and coils).

Procedure
1-1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a
basic instruction, using the cursor control keys.
(Alternatively, click the point.)

Fig. 3.3.24.3 (a)

1-2 Press the key that corresponds to the basic instruction you
want to enter.

Table 3.3.24.3
Key Basic instruction
[F4]

[Shift] + [F4]

[F5]

[Shift] + [F5]
[F6] S
[Shift] + [F6] R

- 88 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

1-3 Position the cursor to the basic instruction you entered,

using the cursor control keys, and then press the [Enter] key.
(Alternatively, double-click the basic instruction.)

Fig. 3.3.24.3 (b)

1-4 Enter an address or symbol, and then press the [Enter] key.

Fig. 3.3.24.3 (c)

- 89 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

2 After entering an address or symbol, you can enter basic

instructions using function keys.

Procedure
2-1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a
basic instruction, using the cursor control keys.
(Alternatively, click the point.)

Fig. 3.3.24.3 (d)

2-2 Enter an address or symbol.

Fig. 3.3.24.3 (e)

- 90 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2-3 Press the key that corresponds to the basic instruction you
want to enter. (See Table 3.3.24.3.)

Fig. 3.3.24.3 (f)

3.3.24.4 Entering function instructions

1 This subsection describes how to enter function.

Procedure
1-1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a
function instruction, using the cursor control keys.
(Alternatively, click the point.)

Fig. 3.3.24.4 (a)

- 91 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

1-2 Press the [F9] key to display the [Select function] dialog
box.

Fig. 3.3.24.4 (b)

1-3 Select the function instruction you want to enter, and then
press the <OK> button.

Fig. 3.3.24.4 (c)

- 92 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

1-4 Enter the parameters for the instruction you entered.

Fig. 3.3.24.4 (d)

2 After entering a function instruction number or name, you can

enter a function instruction using the [F9] key.

Procedure
2-1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a
function instruction, using the cursor control keys.
(Alternatively, click the point.)

Fig. 3.3.24.4 (e)

- 93 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

2-2 Enter a function instruction number or name.

Fig. 3.3.24.4 (f)

2-3 Press the [F9] key.

Fig. 3.3.24.4 (g)

- 94 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.24.5 Entering horizontal lines

This subsection describes how to enter horizontal lines.

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a
horizontal line. (Alternatively, click the point.)

Fig. 3.3.24.5 (a)

2 Press the [F8] key.

Fig. 3.3.24.5 (b)

- 95 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.24.6 Entering and deleting vertical lines

This subsection describes how to enter and delete vertical lines.

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a vertical
line, using the cursor control keys. (Alternatively, click the
point.)

Fig. 3.3.24.6 (a)

2 Press the [F7] key to enter a vertical line at the left of the cursor
position. Press [Shift]+[F7] to enter a vertical line at the right of
the cursor position. To delete a vertical line, press the same soft
key again.

Fig. 3.3.24.6 (b)

- 96 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.25 Deleting Symbol or Comment Data

This subsection describes how to delete symbol or comment data in
ladder diagram editing.

Procedure
1 Move the cursor to the position of a basic instruction for which
you want to delete symbol or comment data, using direction
keys.
2 Click the right mouse button and choose [Property].

Fig. 3.3.25 (a)

2 Click the <Delete> button. The symbol or comment data is

deleted.

Fig. 3.3.25 (b)

- 97 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.26 Undo / Redo

This subsection describes the operation of Undo / Redo function on
the ladder edit screen.

Procedure
1 Select [Edit]-[Undo] from the menu-bar, or click the toolbar
button, or push the shortcut key of [Ctrl]+[Z]. Then the previous
edit operation in the ladder edit screen is canceled.
2 Select [edit]-[Redo] from the menu-bar, or click the toolbar
button, or push the shortcut key of [Ctrl]+[Y]. Then the operation
canceled by Undo function is executed again.

Fig. 3.3.26 (a)

Fig. 3.3.26 (b)

- 98 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.26.1 Setting the maximum number of undo operations

Procedure
1 Select [Tool]-[Option]. Then click the [Ladder] tab.
2 Move the cursor to [Undo max number], and set the maximum
number of Undo operations.(Range of setting : 0 - 50)
3 Click the [OK] button.

Fig. 3.3.26.1

NOTE
1 This function is effective to the following edit operations.
- Ladder editing in the direct ladder edit screen
(Includes “Change of PMC address by Replace
function”.)
- Addition and deletion of sub-program (P1/P2…) in
program list screen.
2 Undo log is erased by the following operation.
- Changing the “Number of contacts + coil a line”
- Changing the “Method of editing ladder diagram”
- Changing the online mode
- Executing the Decompilation
- Importing the source program
3 There is a case that the operation cannot be canceled
correctly, when the nets which contain the error are
connected.

- 99 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.27 Ladder Diagram is Outputted to the Text File

The ladder diagram is outputted to the text file in the form currently
displayed on the Ladder edit display. The outputted text file can be
opened by text editors, such as "notepad", or it can be printed. Also, it
can reduce the file size. The ladder diagram of the All ladder, the
Sub-program, the Search result list, the Collective display and the
Duplicate Coil can be outputted.

NOTE
1 The editing screen separated into the display and
the editing window is not supported.
2 If the programmer mode is offline, this function is
available.
3 The step sequence programs is not supported.

3.3.27.1 Procedure
1 The Ladder program to output is displayed.

Fig. 3.5.27.1 (a)

- 100 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 [Output a text format file...] is selected from the [Tool] menu.

Fig. 3.5.27.1 (b)

3 Input the output file name. Push the <Save> button and the file is
outputted.

Fig. 3.5.27.1 (c)

- 101 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

NOTE
1 The menu item can not be selected if there is an
error net.
2 It is necessary to display and select the window of
the ladder.
3 As to the storing folder of the text file,
You can choose the default of the storing folder by
the Specify the same folder as a LAD file for
working directory in the [General] tab of the option.
(select the [Tool] - [Option...])

Checked .............. The same folder as the LAD file.

(Initial value) It is useful when saving at the
same folder as the LAD file.
Not checked......... The folder stored previously.
It is useful when saving to a
specified folder each time.

- 102 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.27.2 The example of an output file

Header information

Ladder program

Fig. 3.5.27.2

Header information
Header information changes according to the kind of outputted
program.
Program Title
All Ladder Diagram(ALL)
LEVEL1 Ladder Diagram(LEVEL1)
Sup-program Ladder Diagram(P0001)
Search result list Ladder Diagram Search result list(*)
Collective Display Ladder Diagram Collective Display(*)
Duplicate Coil Duplicate Coil List
• In the Search result list and the Collective Display, the
number of nets and the number of steps are not outputted.
• * : The Search condition and the condition name of
Collective Display are displayed.

Item Contents
File name LAD file name
PMC Type The model of PMC
Date Date the file was created.
* Date is dependent on "Regional options".

- 103 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.3.27.3 Ladder diagram without the net number is output to the text
file
The setting to output the ladder diagram without the net number in the
text file has been added. Since the net numbers are not output, you can
compare the ladder diagrams before and after the modifications using
the function of a text editor.

Setting
1 Click [Option...] in [Tool] menu.
2 Click [Ladder] tab on [Option] window.
3 Check Output the text file without the net number.

Fig. 3.3.27.3

Operation
1 The Ladder program to output is displayed
2 [Output a text format file...] is selected from the [Tool] menu.
3 Input the output file name. Push the <Save> button and the file is
outputted.

- 104 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.3.28 Automatic Input of Timer, Counter, Rising/Falling-edge

Numbers
This function automatically inputs the unused numbers for the
parameters of functional instructions during ladder editing of offline
mode and online mode. With this function, you can omit your
operation to find out the unused parameter numbers.

Supported PMC models

30i/31i/32i-A Extended function
Supported
30i/31i/32i-A (*1)
*1: This function can be used when ladder edit has selected the
interface of one pane; "Editing ladder diagram on display
window". This function cannot be used when ladder edit has
selected the interface of two panes; "Display Window" and "Edit
Window".

Supported instructions
The 1st parameter of the following functional instructions is the target
of automatic input.
SUB3(TMR)
SUB24(TMRB)
SUB77(TMRBF)
SUB5(CTR)
SUB56(CTRB)
SUB57(DIFU)
SUB58(DIFD)

Operation
1 Move cursor to the 1st parameter and push the [F6] key. The
unused parameter number will be input.

Fig. 3.3.28

- 105 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

NOTE
1 Details are different between SUB3 (TMR) and
SUB5 (CTR).For details, see "Automatic input of
the TMR parameter of a functional instruction" and
"Automatic input of the CTR parameter of a
functional instruction", described later.
2 If you perform this operation with a parameter
number already input, an unused parameter
number subsequent to that number will be set.
3 If you perform this operation just after you enter the
parameter numbers, an unused parameter number
subsequent to input number will be set. If you click
"Auto" with the mouse, the same result as the item
2 is obtained.
4 If an attempt is made to perform this operation on a
function instruction to which this operation is not
applicable, the following error message will be
displayed.
'Cannot perform "Auto" on the instruction.'
If no unused number for parameters is found, the
following error message will be displayed.
'No unused parameter number.'
5 This function cannot be used when ladder edit in
the interface of two panes is selected; "Display
Window" and "Edit Window".

3.3.28.1 Automatic input of the TMR parameter of a functional

instruction
When inputting the TMR parameter, you must consider precision.
Some contents of the display differ in offline editing and online
editing.

Offline editing
(1) Range of parameter numbers subject to this automatic input
Timer numbers with their precision default setting being 8 ms
(timer number 9 and subsequent numbers) are assumed to be
subject to this automatic input.

Online editing
(1) Range of parameter numbers subject to this automatic input
The timer number 9 or later is assumed to be subject to this
automatic input.
(2) Display of setting and precision of an input timer number
In online editing, the preset value and accuracy value of an input
timer number are displayed in the status line in the following
format.

- 106 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Fig. 3.3.28.1

NOTE
All models are supporting the display of the TMR
number, the preset value and accuracy value on
the status line. If the automatic input of the TMR
parameter is supported, "Auto" will be displayed on
the [F6] key.

3.3.28.2 Automatic input of the CTR parameter of a functional

instruction

Online editing
In online editing, the preset value and current value of an input
counter number are displayed in the status line in the following
format.

Fig. 3.3.28.2

NOTE
All models are supporting the display of the CTR
number, the preset value and current value on the
status line. If the automatic input of the CTR
parameter is supported, "Auto" will be displayed on
the [F6] key.

- 107 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.4 EDITING STEP SEQUENCES

This section describes how to edit step sequence programs.

NOTE
Step sequence programs can be displayed and
edited only when the current programmer mode
(offline/online) is offline. To change the
programmer mode to offline, select [Ladder] -
[Online/Offline].

How to display the step sequence edit screen

Procedure
1 Select [View] - [Program List]. The [Program List] screen
appears. (Usually, this screen appears automatically when a LAD
program is created or opened.)

Ladder program

Step sequence program

Fig. 3.4 (a)

2 On the [Program List] screen, double-click the step sequence

program you want to edit. Alternatively, select the step sequence
program, and then press the [Enter] or [F10] key.

- 108 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Summary of step sequence program edit screen

Address display method selection button
Step sequence program name
Search button
Check button

Zoom-in button

Zoom-out button

Cursor

Information about element in cursor position Cursor position

Fig. 3.4 (b)

Zoom-out button
Reduces the step ladder screen display.

Zoom-in button
Magnifies the step ladder screen display.

Search button
Searches for a step number and action.

Address display method selection button

Switches between address and symbol displays.

Check button
Check program syntax.

Information about element in the cursor position

Displays a step number, action (subprogram), and label number.

Cursor position
Displays the row and column of the current cursor position.

- 109 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

NOTE
The step sequence program edit screen consists of
32 horizontal elements by 64 vertical lines.

Soft keys
• When the Shift key is not pressed (the cursor is on the
“processing step line”)

Fig. 3.4 (c)

• When the Shift key is pressed (the cursor is on the “processing

step line”)

Fig. 3.4 (d)

• When the Shift key is not pressed (the cursor is on the “condition
specification TR”)

Fig. 3.4 (e)

• When the Shift key is pressed (the cursor is on the “condition

specification TR”)

Fig. 3.4 (f)

NOTE
To display soft keys, select [View] - [Softkey].

Context menu
Right-clicking the step sequence program edit screen displays this
menu.

Fig. 3.4 (g)

- 110 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Shortcut keys
Table 3.4
Shortcut key Function
[F3] Search (downward)
[Shift] + [F3] Search (upward)
Enter step program (step line)
[F5]
Enter transition (transition line)
[Shift] + [F5] Enter label jump (step line)
Enter initial step program (step line)
[F6]
Enter beginning of selective branch (transition line)
Enter jump-to label (step line)
[Shift] + [F6]
Enter end of selective branch (transition line)
Enter block step program (step line)
[F7]
Enter beginning of parallel branches (transition line)
Enter end of block step (step line)
[Shift] + [F7]
Enter end of parallel branch (transition line)
[F8] Enter continuation line
[F9] Check syntax
[Shift] + [F9] Zoom
[Del] Clear element
[Ctrl] + [C] Edit - Copy
[Ctrl] + [F] Edit - Search
[Ctrl] + [G] Edit - Jump to specified position
[Ctrl] + [V] Edit - Paste
[Ctrl] + [X] Edit - Cut
[Home] Display left end
[End] Display right end
[Ctrl] + [Home] Jump to beginning
[Ctrl] + [End] Jump to end

3.4.1 Step Sequence Configuration

A step sequence program consists of the following elements:

Step
A step is a unit of processing in a program.

• A step number [Sn] necessary to control execution and a

subprogram [Pm] that describes actual processing are defined for
a step.
• Each step is always assigned with a step number. A duplicate
step number cannot be used in a program.
• A step can be in any one of three logical states: running, stopping,
and stopped. The running state is also called an active state. The
stopping and stopped states are collectively referred to as
inactive states.

- 111 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Table 3.4.1
State Processing Sn.0
The step is active.
Active Running The corresponding action program 1
(subprogram) is running.
The step is shifting from running to stopped.
The corresponding action program
Stopping 0
(subprogram) is executed only once. After this it
Inactive is stopped.
The step is inactive.
Stopped The corresponding action program 0
(subprogram) is not running.

NOTE
The state of a specified step can be read through a
contact; it cannot be written, however.
Sn.0 (where n represents a step number, which
can take a value from 1 to 1000)
Step numbers are used in a program so that
transition between steps can be controlled in detail.
Using step numbers makes it possible for any
subprogram to detect the state of any step.
However, the use of step numbers adversely
affects program transportability and ease of
understanding. Do not use step numbers
excessively.

Initial step
An initial step is a step that automatically becomes active when the
program starts running. Except for this point, the initial step behaves
in the same manner as ordinary steps. Control can be passed from a
usual step to the initial step again. In this case, the initial step behaves
in exactly the same manner as an ordinary step.

• A step number [Sn] necessary to control the execution and a

subprogram [Pm] that describes the actual processing are defined
for an initial step.
• All initial steps become active when no other step is running.
• Each block must have at least one initial step. It can have any
number of initial steps.
• If a block has no initial step, it is not executed even if called.
• Each initial step is always assigned a step number. A duplicate
step number cannot be used in a program.
• If there are initial steps in the middle of parallel branching, there
must be at least one initial step in each flow.

- 112 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Transition
A transition represents a condition under which transition occurs from
one step to another.

• There must be only one transition between steps.

• The transition of processing from one step to another is carried
out as described below:

When S1 is running, only S1 and P101 are

processed. The other steps or transitions are not
executed. Even if P102 is satisfied, it is invalid
unless S2 is running.

Transition from S1 to S2 can occur if P101 is

satisfied. When P101 is satisfied, S1 ends
regardless of the state of S1, allowing S2 to start.

• When a signal becomes on in a transition, its state is held even

after state transition occurs. So, if you do not want to maintain
the state, you must turn off the signal, using another subprogram.

[Example of setting transition conditions]

In this example, after an M7 code is decoded using the DEC
function instruction, control is passed to the next step.

Subprogram P1

Subprogram P101

NOTE
The TRSET function instruction is intended to
describe that a transition condition is satisfied. It is
used in a subprogram that is called from the
transition.

- 113 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Beginning of selective branch

A branch occurs from one step to two or more steps, passing control to
a step below a transition where the condition is satisfied.

• A transition is placed below a branch.

• A step leading to the first transition where the transition
condition is satisfied becomes active.
• If transition conditions for more than one step are satisfied
simultaneously, transition occurs to the leftmost step.
• A branch can occur to up to 16 flows.

End of selective branches

Two or more flows that branched out gather back into one flow.

• The number of branching flows must match that of the gathering

flows.

Beginning of parallel branch

A branch occurs from one step to two or more steps, which become
active simultaneously.

• A transition is placed above a branch.

• After branching, all steps become active simultaneously and are
executed.
• A branch can occur to up to 16 flows.

- 114 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

End of parallel branch

Two or more flows that branched out gather into one flow.

• How parallel flows gather again is explained below.

If transition P120 is satisfied, the processing

of steps S10 and S20 is terminated, and step
S21 becomes active.

• How wait processing occurs is explained below.

Even if transition P109 is satisfied, transition

does not occur to S20 unless S11 and S16 are
active.

If P109 is satisfied when both S11 and S16 are

active, the processing of S11 and S16 is
terminated, and step S20 becomes active. In
this case, P109 contains the end conditions for
both S11 and S16.

If you want to set separate end conditions

for steps S11 and S16, specify P111 and
P116 as end conditions, and describe S12
and S17 as dummy steps, as shown on the
left.

Step and subprogram numbers must be

specified for a dummy step, too. In
(Dummy) (Dummy) addition, P110 must be specified as a
dummy transition that is always on.

- 115 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Jump
A jump is processed in conjunction with a transition to control the
execution of steps.

• A jump-to label [Ln] is specified.

• The step at a jump destination becomes active.
• The jump destination must be within the same program.
• It is impossible to jump from outside to inside a parallel branch
and vice versa.
• It is impossible to jump from one parallel branch flow to another.

Label
A label represents a jump destination.

• A jump-to label [Ln] is defined.

Block step
The block step is a step for representing a subprogram described with
step sequences.

• A step number [Sn] necessary to control execution and a

subprogram [Pm] that describes actual processing are defined for
a block step.
• A step number must be assigned to a step.
• Duplicate step numbers cannot be used in a program.
• There must always be a transition below a block step.

Transition P102 cannot be omitted. A subprogram for

P102 must be a dummy transition that is always
satisfied.

Write a condition for terminating step S21 in transition

P121.

If transition P102 is exchanged with P121, processing

at step S21 does not work normally.

- 116 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Initial block step

The initial block step is an initial step in a block.

• A step number [Sn] necessary to control execution and a

subprogram [Pm] that describes actual processing are defined for
an initial block step.
• The function and representation of the initial block step are the
same as for the initial step.

End block step

The end block step represents the end of the steps in a block.

• An end block step is created to end block step processing.

• Each block must have at least one end block step. It can have any
number of end block steps.

- 117 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.4.2 Entering Steps

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a step.

2 Press the [F5] key.

3 The [Action] dialog box appears. Enter the necessary items.

(An idle step number is used automatically.)

Fig. 3.4.2

4 After you finish entering the items, press the <OK> button.

S12
P518

NOTE
To change a step number, action, or label, position
the cursor to the desired element, and then press
the [Enter] key. Alternatively, double-click the
element. The [Action] dialog box appears.

- 118 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.4.3 Entering Transitions

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter a
transition.

2 Press the [F5] key.

3 The [Action] dialog box appears. Enter the desired action.

Fig. 3.4.3

4 After you finish entering the action (subprogram), press the

<OK> button.

P519

NOTE
To modify an action, position the cursor to the
relevant element, and then press the [Enter] key.
Or, double-click the element. The [Action] dialog
box appears.

- 119 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.4.4 Beginning of Selective Branch

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter the
beginning of a selective branch.

2 Press the [F6] key.

3.4.5 End of Selective Branch

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter an end of
selective branch.

2 Hold down the [Shift] key, and then press the [F5] key.

S1 S2

- 120 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.4.6 Beginning of Parallel Branch

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point (transition line) where you want
to enter the beginning of parallel branch.

2 Press the [F7] key.

P100

3.4.7 End of Parallel Branch

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point where you want to enter the end
of a parallel branch.

2 Hold down the [Shift] key, and then press the [F6] key.

S1 S2

- 121 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.4.8 Specifying Jump-to Label

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point (step line) where you want to
enter a jump-to label (a label to which a jump is to be made).

2. Hold down the [Shift] key, and then press the [F6] key.

←
S1

3 The [Action] dialog box appears. Enter the label name.

Fig. 3.4.8

4 After you finish entering the label name, press the <OK> button.

← L10
S1
P500

- 122 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.4.9 Specifying Label Jump

Procedure
1 Position the cursor to the point (step line) where you want to
enter a label jump.

2 Hold down the [Shift] key, and then press the [F5] key.

←L10
S1

P10 P10

→
S2

P10

3 The [Action] dialog box appears. Enter the label.

Fig. 3.4.9

4 After you finish entering the label, press the <OK> button.

←L10
S1

P10 P10

→ L10
S2

P10

- 123 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.4.10 Checking Syntax

Procedure
1 Press the [F9] key.

• If no error is found, the following dialog box appears.

Fig. 3.4.10 (a)

• If an error is found, the following dialog box appears.

Fig. 3.4.10 (b)

- 124 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.4.11 Adding Step Sequence Subprograms

This subsection describes how to add step sequence subprograms.

Procedure
1 Right-click the program list screen, and then click [Add
sub-program F9].

Fig. 3.4.11 (a)

2 The [Add sub-program] dialog box appears.

Fig. 3.4.11 (b)

3 Enter [sub-program].
4 Select [Step Sequence] from [Kind of Ladder].
5 Enter [Symbol] and [RelayComment], and then click the <OK>
button.
6 The step sequence subprogram is added, and the screen for the
added subprogram appears.

- 125 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.4.12 Deleting Step Sequence Subprograms

This subsection describes how to delete step sequence subprograms.

Procedure
1 Position the pointer to the step sequence subprogram that you
want to delete from the program list screen, and then right-click.
Then, click [Delete sub-program F6].

Fig. 3.4.12 (a)

2 The following dialog box appears. To delete, click <Yes>.

Fig. 3.4.12 (b)

- 126 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.4.13 Search
This subsection describes the step sequence program search function.

Procedure
1 Choose [Find] from the [Edit] menu.
The [Find] screen appears.

Fig. 3.4.13

1-1 Search type

Select Step number, Label number, or Symbol/address.

1-2 Search string

Enter a character string to be searched for.
No wildcard can be used.

2 Execute search operation.

For downward search operation, click the <OK> button. For
upward search operation, click the <OK> button while holding
down the [Shift] key.

- 127 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.5 EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS

This section describes how to edit symbols and comments.

NOTE
Symbols and comments can be displayed and
edited only when the current programmer mode
(offline/online) is offline. To change the
programmer mode to offline, select [Ladder] -
[Online/Offline].

3.5.1 Symbol and Comment Data

Names and comments can be assigned to the input signals and internal
relays used in sequence programs.
These names and comments are generically referred to as symbol and
comment data.

(1) PMC model which does not support the multiple comments

Table 3.5.1 (a)

Definition Display
Character string assigned to a
contact or coil (on a one-to-one INPUT
Symbol
basis) and used in place of a
PMC address
X0.0 Y0.0
Character string assigned to a
Relay comment contact or coil to describe the
RELAY RELAY
contents at a PMC address
COMMENT COMMENT

Y0.0
COIL
Character string assigned to a coil
Coil comment COMMENT
to describe it

Assigned to an arbitrary position

Net comment between nets to describe the
(* HERE IS NET *)
program
(* COMMENT *)

Table 3.5.1 (b)

Symbol Relay comment Coil comment
ASCII characters ASCII characters ASCII characters
Usable characters (except lowercase Kana and Kanji Kana and kanji
letters) Half-size kana Half-size kana
Maximum number of
16 bytes 16 bytes 30 bytes
characters
Maximum number of units
20,000 20,000 20,000
that can be registered
Duplicate definition Not allowed Allowed Allowed

- 128 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Table 3.5.1 (c)

Net comment
Usable characters ASCII characters, kana, kanji, half-size kana
Number of usable steps 2 steps/net comment
Maximum number of
64 bytes/line or 4095 bytes/net comment
characters
Maximum number of lines 100 lines/net comment
Maximum number of units
Approx. 20,000
that can be registered

(2) PMC model which supports the multiple comments

Table 3.5.1 (d)

Definition Display
Character string assigned to a
contact or coil (on a one-to-one INPUT
Symbol
basis) and used in place of a PMC
address
X0.0 Y0.0
Character string assigned to a 1st OMMENT
Comment
contact and a coil to describe it. of coil
(for a contact and a coil) 1st comment
One of comment sets is displayed.
of contact

Assigned to an arbitrary position

Net comment between nets to describe the
(* HERE IS NET *)
program
(* COMMENT *)

Table 3.5.1 (e)

Symbol Coil comment
ASCII characters
ASCII characters (except
Usable characters Kana and kanji
lowercase letters)
Half-size kana
Maximum number of
16 bytes 30 bytes
characters
Maximum number of units
40,000 40,000
that can be registered
Duplicate definition Not allowed Allowed

Table 3.5.1 (f)

Net comment
Usable characters ASCII characters, kana, kanji, half-size kana
Number of usable steps 2 steps/net comment
Maximum number of
64 bytes/line or 4095 bytes/net comment
characters
Maximum number of lines 100 lines/net comment
Maximum number of units
Approx. 20,000
that can be registered

- 129 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

NOTE
1 The maximum number of characters or lines,
whichever is reached first, functions as a limit.
2 Relay comments are used only on the Ladder Edit
screen of LADDER EDITING PACKAGE
(Windows). They are not included in a
memory-card-type file generated by the compile
function.
3 In the PMC model which can input the lowercase
letters to the symbol, the symbol with a different
only capital letter and small letter cannot be
registered.
Example) “OverTravel” and “OVERTRAVEL”
cannot be registered.

3.5.2 Procedure
1 Double-click the <Symbol comment> item on the [Program List]
screen. The [SYMBOL/COMMENT] screen appears.

Fig. 3.7.2 (a)

• PMC model which does not support the multiple comments

Fig. 3.7.2 (b)

- 130 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

• In case of the PMC model supported to multiple comments.

(30i/31i/32i-A)

Fig. 3.5.2 (c)

• In case of the PMC model supported to multiple comments.

(30i/31i/32i-A Extened function)

Fig. 3.5.2(d)

NOTE
When you check [Ignore too long strings of the
symbol], the number of symbols that can be
registered and the size of coil comments vary
because the symbols that exceed the limit are
assumed to be absent.

2 Click the <Add New Data> button on the toolbar.

< Add New Data> button

The [New Data] screen appears.

• PMC model which does not support the multiple comments

Fig. 3.5.2 (e)

- 131 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

• PMC model which supports the multiple comments

Fig. 3.5.2 (f)

2-1 Set the necessary data.

Address
Symbol
Relay Comment or First Comment
Coil Comment or Second Comment

2-2 To register the entered data, click the <OK> button.

To quit without registering, click the <Cancel> button.

3 To close the [SYMBOL/COMMENT] screen, click the <Close>

button.

<Close> button

This operation has nothing to do with whether to save the data

entered on the [New Data] screen for [SYMBOL/COMMENT].

See Section 3.11, "Saving Programs," for an explanation about

how to save data entered on the [New Data] screen for
[SYMBOL/COMMENT].

See Section 3.12 "Closing Programs," for an explanation about

how to close the sequence program without saving data entered
on the [New Data] screen for [SYMBOL/COMMENT].

- 132 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.5.3 Toolbar

<1><2> <3><4>
Fig. 3.5.3

<1> <Add New Data> button

The [New Data] screen appears.
<2> <Search> button
The [Search] screen appears.
<3> <Import> button
The [Import] screen appears.
<4> <Export> button
The [Export] screen appears.

3.5.4 Context Menu

Right-click the [SYMBOL/COMMENT] screen. The following
context menu appears.

Fig. 3.5.4 (a) Fig. 3.5.4 (b) 30i/31i/32i-A Fig 3.5.4 (c) 30i/31i/32i-A Extended function

- 133 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.6 EDITING MESSAGES

Using the DISPB (SUB 41) function instruction enables the display of
any message on the CRT/MDI screen of the CNC. This section
describes how to create messages.

NOTE
Messages can be displayed and edited only when
the current programmer mode (offline/online) is
offline. To change the programmer mode to offline,
select [Ladder] - [Online/Offline].

3.6.1 Procedure
1 Double-click the <Message> item on the [Program List] screen.
The [Message Editing] Screen appears.

Fig. 3.6.1 (a)

2 Japanese-language input mode

2-1 Edit messages using the Japanese-language input function

of Windows. Enter kanji, kana, and half-size kana
characters.

Fig. 3.6.1 (b)

- 134 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

NOTE
In Japanese-language input mode, Numeric data
can be input according to the setting in
“%%%flset.cnf” file of the install folder. (See
subsection 3.8.4, “New line character, Numeric
data” for detailes.)

3 Code input mode

3-1 Clicking the <CODE> button enables message editing using

character code data. Edit and check data in code format.

Fig. 3.6.1 (c)

4 [Message View] box

4-1 Clicking the <VIEW> button displays the [Message View]

box. You can check the new line code and special
characters as displayed in the CNC.

Fig. 3.6.1 (d)

5 To close the [Message Editing] screen, click the <Close> button.

<Close> button

- 135 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.6.2 Models and Quantity of Usable Characters

The types of characters usable in message text vary depending on the
CNC/PMC model. See the following table for details.

Table 3.6.2
Characters that can be entered
Half-size Alphanumeric
JIS level-1/-2 kanji set
kana characters
Some kanji characters cannot be displayed.
Ladder Editing Package (Windows) cannot check Usable Usable
whether they can be displayed.

NOTE
1 Lowercase letters (a to z) are converted to
uppercase (A to Z) when entered.
2 Up to 65,535 characters can be used in messages
in total with PMC-SA1, SA3, SA5, SB3, SB4, SB5,
SB6, SC3, and SC4.
Specifically, the number of characters in messages
are counted starting at message No. 1, when the
message edit function ends. Only the first 65,535
characters are accepted. Others are deleted.
3 With the PMC-SB7, up to 512,000 characters can
be used in messages in total, but the number of
characters is limited depending on the total capacity
of the sequence programs.

3.6.3 Memory Addresses Required to Display Messages

The range of the addresses that can be specified and the number of
messages are different for each PMC. Refer to the Ladder Language
Programming Manual.

- 136 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.6.4 New Line Character, Numeric Data

The input method of New line character and Numeric data is decided
according to the input mode and the content of MSG_EDIT_VAL (the
setting in “%%%flset.cnf” file).

• The setting of MSG_EDIT_VAL in “%%%flset.cnf” file.

%%%FLSET.cnf
;==============================================================================
; Ladder Editing Package(Windows) Initial Setting File
; ( `key word =' <= 9characters )
;==============================================================================
;
~~~~~;
*S; ======== System Setup ========
~~~~~;
;
exparam=0;
;
LAD_FILE_COUNT=10
;
MSG_EDIT_VAL=1 Set ‘0’ or ‘1’(default) by the text editor.
;
~~~~~

• Input method of New line character

New line character

Input mode MSG_EDIT_VAL
Input Display
<Enter> key
Japanese-language 1 |
or @0A@
input mode
0 <Enter> key •
1 @0A@ @0A@
Code input mode
0 @0A@ @0A@

• Input method of Numeric data

(a) Numeric data format
[Ibid, ____ ]
Memory address that the numerical data is stored
The address must be of binary format.

Set the “bid” data after character ”I“:

b : Number of bytes (1, 2, or 4)
i : Number of digits in the integer part (0 to 8)
d : Number of digits in the fractional part (0 to 8)

(Example)
The following message includes 3 digits tool number at the spindle
and the offset data ( _ . __ ) for this tool. And these data are
contained in memory address of 2bytes:
SPINDLE TOOL No. = [I230, ____ ]
OFFSET DATA = [I212, ____ ]

- 137 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

NOTE
1 Sum of integer part digits and fractional part digits
must be within 8.
2 Do not use any space between the brackets, [ ].
3 With the view function, as many number signs (#) as
the number of specified digits are displayed in bold.
(Example: ###.##).

(b) Input method of Numeric data

Numeric data
Input mode MSG_EDIT_VAL
Input Display
Japanese-language 1 [Ibid,{{{{] [Ibid,{{{{]
input mode 0 NA •••••••••••
1 [Ibid,{{{{] [Ibid,{{{{]
Code input mode
0 [Ibid,{{{{] [Ibid,{{{{]

(c) Input method of character ‘[’, ‘]’ and ‘@’

In the numeric data input, Character ‘[‘ and ‘]’ are used as a
delimitation character. The input method of character ‘[’, ‘]’
and ‘@’ in the each input mode is as follows.

‘[’ ‘]’ ‘@’

Input mode MSG_EDIT_VAL
Input Display Input Display Input Display
Japanese-language 1 @5B@ @5B@ @5D@ @5D@ @40@ @40@
input mode 0 [ [ ] ] @ @
1 @5B@ @5B@ @5D@ @5D@ @40@ @40@
Code input mode
0 @5B@ @5B@ @5D@ @5D@ @40@ @40@

- 138 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.6.5 Tool Bar

<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> <9> <10> <11> <12>

Fig. 3.6.5

<1> Search button

Searches for a character string.
<2> Search direction button
Specifies the direction (upward or downward) in which a search
is to be made.
<3> Find what edit box
Lets you specify what to find.
<4> Replace button
Replaces the occurrences of a specified character string one by
one.
<5> Replace all button
Replaces all the occurrences of a specified character string.
<6> Replace with edit box
Lets you specify a character string for substituting an occurrence
of a specified character.
<7> Code input mode button
Lets you specify message data in code format. Enter a message,
using numeric code (JIS).
Example: 2100
2100 @02467C4B5C386C493D4C2801@
<8> View button
Lets you confirm that the message character string is in such a
format that it is continued on a new line.
It is possible to specify the number of characters to be displayed
per line (32 to 80 characters).
<9> Jump button
Causes a jump to a specified address (A0.0 to A24.7/A124.7).
<10>Jump address character string edit box
Lets you specify a character string as a jump address.
<11>Jump address value up/down button
Increases or decreases the jump address value.
<12>Invalid kanji character check button
Searches for kanji characters not displayable on the NC
downward starting at the cursor position. (When search operation
reaches the end, search operation resumes from the beginning.)
This button is enabled only with those PMC models that have a
VGA indicator.

- 139 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.6.6 Status Bar

<1>
Fig. 3.6.6

<1> The status bar displays the number of bytes in a message on the
current line (that line with a caret).

3.6.7 Shortcut Keys

Table 3.6.7
Shortcut key Corresponding function
[F3] Search
[Shift]+[F3] Search direction
[F4] Replace
[Shift]+[F4] Replace all
[F5] Code input mode
[F7] View
[F9] Invalid kanji character check
[Ctrl]+[G] Jump
[Ctrl]+[Z] Edit - Undo
[Ctrl]+[X] Edit - Cut
[Ctrl]+[C] Edit - Copy
[Ctrl]+[V] Edit - Paste
[Ctrl]+[Home] Move to the first display line
[Ctrl]+[End] Move to the last display line
[Home] Move to beginning of line
[End] Move to end of line
[PageUp] Move up 10 lines
[PageDown] Move down 10 lines
[↑] Move up one line
[↓] Move down one line

- 140 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.7 EDITING I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT

This section describes how to set and delete an address for each
module in an I/O unit.

NOTE
I/O module assignment can be displayed and
edited only when the current programmer mode
(offline/online) is offline. To change the
programmer mode to offline, select [Ladder] -
[Online/Offline].

3.7.1 Procedure
1 Double-click the <I/O Module> item on the [Program List]
screen.
The [Edit I/O Module] screen appears.

Fig. 3.7.1 (a)

Fig. 3.7.1 (b)

- 141 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

1-1 Double-click the line that you want to edit. The [Module]
screen appears.

Fig. 3.7.1 (c)

1-2 Select a module name from those that can be specified. Set
the following data.
Group

Base

Slot

Comment

NOTE
I/O Unit MODEL-B assignment is carried out as
follows:
[GROUP]: To be set with a group number within a
configuration.
[BASE]: To always be set to 0.
[SLOT]: To be set to a unit number for the I/O
Unit-B. To be set with 0, however, when
information ‘##’ about power-on/-off is
assigned.

To assert the data you entered, click the <OK> button.

To ignore the data, click the <Cancel> button.

The [Edit I/O Module] screen appears.

2 To close the [Edit I/O Module] screen, click the <Close> button.

<Close> button

- 142 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.7.2 Tool Bar

<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6>

Fig. 3.7.2

<1> Next channel

<2> Previous channel
<3> Search
<4> Delete
<5> Delete channel
<6> Delete all

3.7.3 Shortcut Keys

Table 3.7.3
Shortcut key Corresponding function
[Ctrl]+[F] Search

- 143 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.8 EDITING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

This section describes how to edit system parameters.

NOTE
System parameters can be displayed and edited
only when the current programmer mode
(offline/online) is offline. To change the
programmer mode to offline, select [Ladder] -
[Online/Offline].

3.8.1 Procedure
1 Double-click the <System parameter> item on the [Program List]
screen. The [Edit System Parameter] screen appears.

Fig. 3.8.1 (a)

Fig. 3.8.1 (b)

- 144 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

1-1 Set the necessary data.

Counter Data Type

Initial value: BINARY
Set the format of the counter value to be used in the
CTR function instruction as binary or BCD.

Ladder Exec
(Valid only with the PMC-SC3/SC4, PMC-QC,
PMC-NB/NB2, and PMC-SB7)
Initial value: 100
Setting: 1 to 150
Set an increment for the processing time for ladder
levels 1 and 2. Setting this parameter reduces the
ladder scan time, thus quickening ladder processing.
The ladder execution time takes the value described
below out of 8 ms.
If 100% is specified, the processing time for levels 1
and 2 is 5 ms.
If 150% is specified, the processing time for levels 1
and 2 is 7.5 ms.
Note that increasing the ladder execution time
decreases the processing time in "PMC Screen Display
Time", "Language Program Processing Time", and
"Ladder Level 3".

Language Exec Ratio

(Valid only with the PMC-SC3/SC4, PMC-QC, and
PMC-NB/NB2)
Initial value: 50
Setting: 0 to 99
This parameter sets a ratio for dividing the processing
time in "PMC Screen Display Time", "Language
Program Processing Time", and "Ladder Level 3",
because the language program and the PMC screen
display have the same priority.
Setting this parameter makes it possible to run the
language program cyclically, even when the PMC
screen display is active.

Language Origin
(Valid only with the PMC-SC3/SC4, PMC-QC, and
PMC-NB/NB2)
Initial value: 000000
Setting: Address within the language program
storage area
Set the start address of the link control statement data
in the language program.
Specify 000000H if no language program is included.

- 145 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

FS0 Operator Panel

Initial value: No FS0 machine operator's panel (check
off)
Specify whether the FS0 machine operator's panel is
available. If you select this item, specify the actual
DI/DO address connected to the machine operator's
panel, the address of a KEY image transferred from the
operator's panel, and the address of an LED image to
be transferred to the operator's panel.

Key Address
Setting range: X0 to X127 and X1000 to X1019
Set the PMC address corresponding to the start address
of the external DI that is connected.

LED Address
Setting range: Y0 to Y127 and Y1000 to Y1014
Set the PMC address corresponding to the start address
of the external DO that is connected.

Key Bit Image Address

Set the PMC address corresponding to the start address
of KEY image to be referenced by a user program.
Usually, specify an arbitrary internal relay area.

LED Bit Image Address

Set the PMC address corresponding to the start address
of LED image to be referenced by a user program.
Usually, specify an arbitrary internal relay area.

Channel 1 Enable
Specify whether to enable or disable the selectable I/O
link assignment function for channel 1. If checking this
box, specify Basic Group Count.

Channel 2 Enable
Specify whether to enable or disable the selectable I/O
link assignment function for channel 2. If checking this
box, specify Basic Group Count.

Basic Group Count

This parameter is used to divide I/O link assignment
data into a basic group section and a parameter
selection group. Set the number of basic groups. The
valid number is 0 to 16.

- 146 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

1-2 Set the comment set number for displayed language of CNC
(For PMC model which supports the multiple comments)
In [Language for Comment] dialog-box (<Language for
Comment> button on [Edit System Parameter] screen),
please set the comment set number for displayed language
of CNC.

Number of display
language (comment)

When displayed language of CNC

is English, first comment is used

When displayed language of

CNC is Japanese, second
comment is used

When displayed language of CNC

is not English/Japanese, first
comment is used

Comment set number

First Comment = 0
Second Comment = 1
:

‘,’ (COMMA) is used as a delimiter

CNC display language number

0: English 8: Dutch
1: Japanese 9: Danish
2: German 10: Portuguese
3: French 11: Polish
4: Chinese 12: Hungarian
5: Italian 13: Swedish
6: Korean 14: Czech
7: Spanish -1: Others

- 147 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

2 To close the [Edit System Parameter] screen, click the <Close>

button.

<Close> button

This operation has nothing to do with whether to save the data

entered on the [Edit System Parameter] screen.

See Section 3.11 "Saving Programs," for an explanation about

how to save the data entered on the [Edit System Parameter]
screen.

See Section 3.12 "Closing Programs," for an explanation about

how to close a sequence program without saving the data entered
on the [Edit System Parameter] screen.

NOTE
1 For details on the I/O link assignment data
selection function, refer to the FANUC PMC
MODEL
PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/SB
5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6 Ladder
Language Programming Manual (B-61863E).
2 When channel 1 and channel 2 are not checked,
the screen for setting the I/O link assignment data
selection function, which is shown in Subsection
9.3.6, "Setting PMC Setting Parameters," does not
appear.
3 To enable the I/O link assignment selection
function, set the setting parameters (K910 to K913)
correctly according to the I/O devices that are
actually connected.

- 148 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.9 SAVING PROGRAMS WITH NAMES

This section describes how to name and save a sequence program

(LAD file).

3.9.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Save As].
The [Save As] screen appears.

Fig. 3.9.1

1-1 Enter the file name you want to use.

1-2 To save the program, click the <OK> button.
To quit saving, click the <Cancel> button.

3.9.2 About the Deletion of the Unused Net Comment

As a result of operation such as "Deletion of Subprograms," net
comment data that is no longer used in the source program remains in
the LAD file, occupying wasted space. When the LAD file is saved,
you are asked whether the unused net comment is deleted if any. It is
recommended to delete unused character string data.
(When the ladder program was modified, the unused net comment is
deleted automatically.)

Fig. 3.9.2

<Yes> Delete the unused net comment.

<No> Not modify the net comment.

NOTE
Normally, please select <Yes> button.
If you don’t want to modify a net comment data and
a timestamp of a LAD file, press <No> button.

- 149 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.10 IMPORTING PROGRAMS

This section describes how to import (copy in overwrite mode) data

files, ladder diagrams, and subprograms from a LAD program to
another sequence program that is currently open. It also explains how
to import (convert and copy in overwrite mode) files on a memory
card, ROM, or Handy file format to a currently open sequence
program file in memory card format.

3.10.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Import].
The [Import/Export -- Select import file type] screen appears.

Fig. 3.10.1 (a)

1-1 Select the files you want to import.

FANUC LADDER-III File (*.LAD)

A data file is imported from a sequence program (LAD
file) for the same PMC model.

Memory-card Format File

A memory card format file is imported. It is written
over a memory card file (MCARD) for the currently
open sequence program.

ROM Format File

A ROM format file is imported. It is written over a
memory card file (MCARD) for the currently open
sequence program.

- 150 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Handy-file Format File

A Handy file format file is imported. It is written over
a memory card file (MCARD) for the currently open
sequence program.

User File
An arbitrary user file is imported to the user file folder
(MyFladder) for the currently open sequence program.
See Subsection 3.1.3, “Work Folders and Online
Program Files,” for an explanation about the user file
folder.

NOTE
As to the import folder,
you can choose the default of the import folder by
the Specify the same folder as a LAD file for
working directory in the [General] tab of the
option.(select the [Tool] - [Option...])

Checked .............. The same folder as the LAD file.

(Initial value) It is useful when saving at the
same folder as the LAD file.
Not checked......... The folder stored previously.
It is useful when saving to a
specified folder each time.

- 151 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

2 Click the <Next> button.

The [Import/Export -- Specify import file name] screen appears.

Fig. 3.10.1 (b)

2-1 Specify the file you want to import.

- 152 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

♦ If the FANUC LADDER-III file (*.LAD) is selected as an

import-from file in step 2, above
3 Click the <Next> button.
The [Import/Export --Select Data File, Ladder Diagram,
Subprogram, and/or User File] screen appears.

Fig. 3.10.1 (c)

3-1 Select the types of files you want to import.

4 Click the <Finish> button.

The message “Edit folder data file will be replaced/Added, Are
you sure?” appears.

Fig. 3.10.1 (d)

To import, click the <Yes> button.

To return to the [Import/Export -- Select Data File, Ladder
Diagram, Subprogram, and/or User File] screen without
continuing, click the <No> button.

5 To quit importing, click the <Cancel> button on the

[Import/Export File--Select Data File, Ladder Diagram,
Subprogram, and/or User File] screen.

- 153 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

♦ If the memory format file, ROM format file, and/or Handy file
format files are selected as the types of files you want to import
in step 2, above
3 Click the <Finish> button.
The message “Import completed” appears.

Fig. 3.10.1 (e)

Click the <OK> button.

The message “Decompile” appears.

Fig. 3.10.1 (f)

If you do not want to decompile, click the <No> button.

To decompile, click the <Yes> button. The [Decompile] screen
appears.

Fig. 3.10.1 (g)

♦ If a user file is selected as the type of file you want to import in

step 2, above
3 Click the <Finish> button.

- 154 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

♦ If the memory card format file is selected as the type of file you
want to import in step 2 above and the PMC type of the specified
memory card format file is not compatible with the import
destination program, a message appears, which indicates that a
new import destination program will be created.

Fig. 3.10.1 (h)

The [New Program] dialog box appears. Select from among the
displayed PMC types compatible with the import source memory
card format file.

Fig. 3.10.1 (i)

The file is imported and decompiled.

- 155 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

NOTE
When you can select from among multiple
compatible PMC types, decompilation may not
terminate normally, depending on the PMC type
you specify. In this case, specify another
compatible PMC type.

3.10.2 Import of the External Symbol File

This function inputs the symbol/comment of external symbol file
format. External symbol files are composed of identification code and
the comma separated text file. You can read symbol information from
the file made by the external application such as Microsoft Excel, Text
editor, and electric CAD system etc.

Supported PMC models

30i/31i/32i-A Extended function
Supported
30i/31i/32i-A

Operation
1. Select [File]-[Import...]. Then, the [Import] dialog appears.

Fig. 3.10.2 (a) Import dialog

2 Select External Symbol File from the list, push the <Next>
button.

- 156 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3 Enter the file name to import.

Fig. 3.10.2 (b)

4 Check the following item if necessary.

Initialize symbol/comment Checked(Default) : After clearing all symbol comment data, the
data before import symbol comment of the external symbol file
is read.
Not checked : The symbol comment data of the external
symbol file is added.
The warning detail out Checked(Default) : If warning occurs during the import, the
message of warning will be written to the log
file.
Not checked : If warning occurs during the import, the
message and the count of warning will be
written to the log file.
Target warning numbers:
K:W-4131, K:W-4133, K:W-4138, K:W-4139

5 Push the <Finish> button.

Execution result
Example of Log file.
##### Conversion of External Symbol File #####
Conversion completed Error count = 00000 Warning count = 00000
##### SYMBOL & COMMENT #####
Conversion completed Error count = 00000 Warning count = 00000

Fig. 3.10.2 (c)

- 157 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

NOTE
1 The log file will be opened if the import is finished.
2 When the symbol has already existed, the symbol
does not read.
3 When the character in a symbol is replaced to the
white-space character, please check the following
setting.
a) Select the [Tool]-[Option].
b) Click the [mnemonic/source] tag in the Option
screen.
c) Remove the check of Converting to source
programs.
4 Refer to Appendix E “The data format of the
external symbol file" for the data format of the
external symbol file.

- 158 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

3.11 EXPORTING PROGRAMS

This section describes how to export (copy in overwrite mode) data

files, ladder diagrams, and subprograms from the currently open
sequence program to another LAD program. It also explains how to
export (convert and copy in overwrite mode) the currently open
sequence program memory card format file to files on a memory card,
in ROM, and/or Handy file format.

3.11.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Open Program] to open the program from which
you want to perform export.
2 Select [File] - [Export]. The following dialog appears.

Fig. 3.11.1 (a)

2-1 Select the types of files you want to export.

FANUC LADDER-III File (*.LAD)

A data file is exported to a sequence program (LAD
file) for the same PMC.

Memory-card Format File

A memory card file (MCARD) is exported from the
currently open sequence program to a file in memory
card format.

ROM Format File

A memory card file (MCARD) is exported from the
currently open sequence program to a file in ROM
format.

- 159 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Handy-file Format File

A memory card file (MCARD) is exported from the
currently open sequence program to a file in Handy
file format.

User File
A user file is exported from the user file folder
(MyFladder) for the currently open sequence program.
See Subsection 3.1.3 "Work Folders and Online
Program Files," for explanations about the user file
folder.

NOTE
There is an inquiry of compilation when the
Memory-card File/ROM Format File/Handy-file
Format File is exported with only the source
program updated.
Please compile if necessary.

3 Click the <Next> button. The [Import/Export -- Specify export

file name] dialog appears.

Memory-card / ROM Format / Handy-file Format

FANUC LADDER-III(*.LAD) File / User File

Fig. 3.11.1 (b)

- 160 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

NOTE
As to the export folder,
You can choose the default of the export folder by
the Specify the same folder as a LAD file for
working directory in the [General] tab of the
option.(select the [Tool] - [Option...])

Checked .............. The same folder as the LAD file.

(Initial value) It is useful when saving at the
same folder as the LAD file.
Not checked......... The folder stored previously.
It is useful when saving to a
specified folder each time.

3-1 Specify an export-to file. If the type of a file to be exported

is a user file, specify the export-to folder.

3-2 In case of FANUC LADDER-III file (*.LAD) or User File,

please push <Next> button. In the other case, go to step 4.

- 161 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3-3 Check the export file in the following dialog.

Fig. 3.11.1 (c)

NOTE
In the export of User File, only user files can be
selected.

4 Click the <Finish> button.

• Memory-card Format / ROM Format / Handy-file Format

Fig. 3.11.1 (d)

NOTE
If a file with the same name is already present in
the export destination folder, an overwrite
confirmation message appears.

• FANUC LADDER-III(*.LAD)

Fig. 3.11.1 (e)

- 162 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

To export, click the <Yes> button. To return to the

[Import/Export -- Select Data File, Ladder Diagram,
Subprogram, and/or User File] screen without continuing,
click the <No> button.

• User File

Fig. 3.11.1 (f)

To export, click the <Yes> button. To quit exporting, click

the <No> button.

3.11.2 Export of the External Symbol File

This function outputs the symbol/comment of external symbol file
format. External symbol files are composed of identification code and
the comma separated text file. You can edit the symbol/comment data
by the external application such as Microsoft Excel, Text editor.

Supported PMC models

30i/31i/32i-A Extended function
Supported
30i/31i/32i-A

Operation
1 Select [File]-[Export...]. Then, the [Export] dialog appears.

Fig. 3.11.2 (a) Export dialog

- 163 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

2 Select External Symbol File from the list, push the <Next>
button.
3 Enter the file name to export.

Fig. 3.11.2 (b)

4 Check Performing automatic address assignment if needed.

This item appears when the PMC model is the extended function.
Check this item if you use the external symbol file at the
non-extended function.
Check : The address of the symbol is assigned
automatically and outputted in the external
symbol file. Beforehand, you need to
specify the assignment address range on
the system parameter screen.
No check (Default) : The address is not assigned automatically
and outputted with the address character
only.
Address External
Remarks
of symbol symbol file
R0.3 R0.3 The address is assigned
Check *R1.0 R1.3 automatically and outputs the
R R1.4 external symbol file.
R0.3 R0.3 The address assigned
No check *R1.0 R automatically is outputted in
R R the address character only.

5 Click the <Finish> button.

- 164 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Execution result
Example of Log file.
##### SYMBOL & COMMENT #####
Conversion completed Error count = 00000 Warning count = 00000
##### Conversion of External Symbol File #####
Conversion completed Error count = 00000 Warning count = 00000
Fig. 3.11.2 (c) 30i/31i/32i-A

##### Assignment of address #####

Assignment completed Error count = 00000 Warning count = 00000
##### SYMBOL & COMMENT #####
Conversion completed Error count = 00000 Warning count = 00000
##### Conversion of External Symbol File #####
Conversion completed Error count = 00000 Warning count = 00000

Fig. 3.11.2 (d) 30i/31i/32i-A Extended function

NOTE
1 When a white-space character is contained in the
symbol, it can be replaced with the specified
character. Select [Tool] - [Option...]. Click
[Mnemonic/Source] tag. Input the character to
replace in Converting to a mnemonic file. Default is
_(underbar).
2 L address of LABEL type is always automatically
assigned regardless of this setting.
3 Refer to Appendix E “The data format of the
external symbol file" for the data format of the
external symbol file.

- 165 -
3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3.12 CHECKING DUPLICATE COIL

This section describes how to check duplicate coil.

NOTE
1 When the programmer mode is only off-line,
duplicate coil check is done for the source program
of the ladder.
2 Duplicate coil check is not done for the step
sequence subprogram and the ladder subprogram
protected by a special password.
3 The net with the error while editing is excluded
from the check.
4 Even if the source program of the ladder edits and
is updated, the content of [duplicate coil] screen is
not updated.
5 When the source program of the ladder has been
updated, the ladder edit screen is not opened from
[duplicate coil list] screen.
6 Symbol and wild-card ('*' ,'?') cannot be used to set
the check address.

3.12.1 Duplicate Coil Screen

The information list (Address/Symbol/Net No./Instruction) of the
duplicate coil is displayed.

Procedure
1 [Duplicate Coil - Address Setting] dialog is displayed by either
of the following operations.
• Double-click the <Duplicate Coil> item on the [Program
List] screen.
(Alternatively, move cursor to <Duplicate Coil> and press
[Enter] or [F10] key)
• Right-click <Duplicate Coil> item on the [Program List]
screen, and click [Check…] from context menu.
• Right-click on the Ladder edit screen, and click [(bit
address) Duplicate Coil Check] from context menu.

- 166 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Select the check address on [Duplicate Coil - Address Setting]

dialog.

Fig. 3.12.1 (a)

All
All the output addresses are checked.

Address
An arbitrary output address is checked.
Specification by the bit address and specification in the range to
have used byte address are possible.
‘,’(commma) is used to specify two or more conditions.

Example: A0.0,A0.4,R0-R100,Y0-Y15

Address kind
All the range of the selected kind of address are checked.
Please select the kind of address on [Duplicate Coil - Address
Kind Setting] dialog
(Press <Select> button to display [Duplicate Coil - Address Kind
Setting] dialog.)

Fig. 3.12.1 (b)

- 167 -
 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3 To start Duplicate Coil Check, click <OK> button on [Duplicate

Coil – Address Setting] dialog box. The following dialog is
displayed while checking duplicate coil. (Please click <Cancel>
button to abort duplicate coil check.)

Fig. 3.17.1 (c)

4 When the check is completed, [Duplicate Coil] screen is

displayed.

Duplicate Coil List

Address list

Fig. 3.12.1 (d)

Address List
Address of duplicate coil is displayed by the tree form
The number of nets is displayed in parentheses. (In the line for
“All Address” and kind of address, the number of addresses and
nets is displayed.)

Duplicate coil list

The information list (Address/Symbol/Net No./Instruction) of the
duplicate coil is displayed.
The ladder edit screen of the address on the cursor line can be
easily displayed (double-clicking or < F10 > key). Moreover, the
content of the display can be output to the text file by selecting
[Output a text format file…] in [Tool] menu.

- 168 -
B-63484EN/05 3.CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Soft Keys

Fig. 3.12.1 (e)

F4 Setting…
[Duplicate Coil – Address Setting] dialog box (Fig. 3.12.1 (e)) is
displayed.

F5 Properties…
Address property dialog box of cursor line is displayed.

Fig. 3.12.1 (f)

F9 Update
When the source program of the ladder is updated, duplicate coil
check is restarted.

F10 Ladder Open

The ladder edit screen of address on the cursor line displayed.

Context menu

Fig. 3.12.1 (g)

- 169 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4 PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

This chapter describes how to print a sequence program, which
consists of a title, system parameters, symbols, comments, I/O
modules, messages, ladders and step sequences.

- 170 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

4.1 PRINTING TITLES

This section describes how to print title data.

4.1.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.1.1 (a)

1-1 Select Title Data from Print Data.

1-2 Click the <Option> button. The [Option] screen appears.

Fig. 4.1.1 (b)

- 171 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

2 Set the following print options on the Title tab.

Page No.
Specify a start page number for title printing (the Initially
value is 1).

Title
Specify a title to be printed (the Initially value is "Title
Data").

Sub Title
Specify a subtitle to be printed (the Initially value is blank).

3 To preview title printing, click the <Preview> button.

4 To set up the print options, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the setup of the print options, click the <Cancel>
button.
The [Print] screen appears again.

5 To print, click the <OK> button.

To quit without printing, click the <Cancel> button.

- 172 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

4.2 PRINTING LADDER DIAGRAMS

This section describes how to print ladder diagrams.

4.2.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.2.1 (a)

1-1 Select Ladder Diagram from Print Data.

1-2 Click the <Option> button. The [Option] screen appears.

Fig. 4.2.1 (b)

- 173 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

2 Set up the following print options on the Ladder Diagram tab.

Page No.
Specify a start page number for ladder diagram printing (the
Initially value is 1).

Title
Specify a title for ladder diagram printing (the Initially
value is "Ladder Diagram").

Sub Title
Specify a subtitle for ladder diagram printing (the Initially
value is blank).

Print Range
Specify the range of ladder diagrams to be printed (the
Initially value is <All>).
All: All ladder diagrams will be printed.
Net No.: The ladder diagrams in the specified nets will be
printed.
When you specify [Unit] for the print target
program, specify the range of nets in the
subprogram.
Page No.: The ladder diagrams on the specified pages will
be printed.

Print Program
Specify the ladder programs you want to print (the Initially
value is <All>).
All: All programs (including subprograms) will be printed.
Unit: Enter the name of the subprogram you want to print,
or select it from the combo box.

Page Feed (Sub Program) (Initially not selected.)

3 To preview ladder diagram printing, click the <Preview> button.

- 174 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

4 To specify ladder diagram printing in detail, click the <Details>

button.

Fig. 4.2.1 (c)

Step No. (Initially selected.)

Net No. (Initially selected.)

Hide Line No. (Initially not selected.)

Line Spacing
Specify line spacing for nets (the Initially value is
<Narrow>).

Relay/Coil
Specify the data to be printed at a contact (the Initially value
is <Symbol>).
Symbol: Symbol data for contacts will be printed.
Relay Comment: Data for relay comments will be printed.

Cross Reference (Initially not selected.)

5 To set up the print options, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the setup of the print options, click the <Cancel>
button.
The [Print] screen appears again.

6 To print, click the <OK> button.

To quit without printing, click the <Cancel> button.

- 175 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4.3 PRINTING STEP SEQUENCES

This section describes how to print step sequences.

4.3.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.3.1 (a)

1-1 Select Step Sequence Diagram from Print Data.

If the PMC model does not support step sequences, or if
there is no step sequence, this item is not displayed.

1-2 Click the <Option> button. The [Option] screen appears.

Fig. 4.3.1 (b)

- 176 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Set up the following print options on the Step Sequence Diagram

tab.
Page No.
Specify a start page number for step sequence printing (the
Initially value is 1).

Title
Specify a title for step sequence printing (the Initially value
is "Step Sequence Diagram").

Sub Title
Specify a subtitle for step sequence printing (the Initially
value is blank).

Print Program
Specify the step sequence programs you want to print (the
Initially value is <All>).
All: All programs (including subprograms) will be printed.
Unit: Enter the name of the subprogram you want to print,
or select it from the combo box.

Sub Program No. (Initially selected.)

3 To preview step sequence program printing, click the <Preview>

button.

4 To set up the print options, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the setup of the print options, click the <Cancel>
button.
The [Print] screen appears again.

5 To print, click the <OK> button.

To quit without printing, click the <Cancel> button.

- 177 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4.4 PRINTING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS

This section describes how to print symbols and comments.

4.4.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.4.1 (a)

1-1 Select Symbol & Comment from Print Data.

1-2 Click the <Option> button. The [Option] screen appears.

Fig. 4.4.1 (b)

- 178 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Set up the following print options on the Symbol tab.

Page No.
Specify a start page number for symbol printing (the
Initially value is 1).

Title
Specify a title for symbol printing (the Initially value is
"Symbol & Comment").

Sub Title
Specify a subtitle for symbol printing (the Initially value is
blank).

Print Range
Specify the range of symbols to be printed (the Initially
value is <All>).
All: All the symbols will be printed.
Line No.: The symbols on the specified lines will be
printed.
Page No.: The symbols on the specified pages will be
printed.

Comment
Specify the type of comment you want to print (the Initially
value is <Relay Comment>).
Relay Comment: A relay comment will be printed.
Coil Comment: A coil comment will be printed.
Relay Comment/Coil Comment:
Relay and coil comments will be printed.

3 To preview symbol printing, click the <Preview> button.

4 To set up the print options, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the setup of the print options, click the <Cancel>
button.
The [Print] screen appears again.

5 To print, click the <OK> button.

To quit without printing, click the <Cancel> button.

- 179 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4.5 PRINTING MESSAGES

This section describes how to print messages.

4.5.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.5.1 (a)

1-1 Select Message Data from Print Data.

1-2 Click the <Option> button. The [Option] screen appears.

Fig. 4.5.1 (b)

- 180 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Set up the following print options on the Message tab.

Page No.
Specify a start page number for message printing (the
Initially value is 1).

Title
Specify a title for message printing (the Initially value is
"Message").

Sub Title
Specify a subtitle for message printing (the Initially value is
blank).

Print Range
Specify the range of messages to be printed (the Initially
value is <All>).
All: All the messages will be printed.
Address: The messages in the specified address range will
be printed.
Page No.: The messages on the specified pages will be
printed.

Line Feed code(@0A@) is printed. (the Initially value is on).

When this option is not selected (off), message data is
printed with the code (@0A@) replaced with a carriage
return.

3 To preview message printing, click the <Preview> button.

4 To set up the print options, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the setup of the print options, click the <Cancel>
button.
The [Print] screen appears again.

5 To print, click the <OK> button.

To quit without printing, click the <Cancel> button.

- 181 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4.6 PRINTING I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT

This section describes how to print I/O module assignments.

4.6.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.6.1 (a)

1-1 Select I/O Module Data from Print Data.

1-2 Click the <Option> button. The [Option] screen appears.

Fig. 4.6.1 (b)

- 182 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Set up the following print options on the I/O Module tab.

Page No.
Specify a start page number for I/O module printing (the
Initially value is 1).

Title
Specify a title for I/O module printing (the Initially value is
"I/O Module").

Sub Title
Specify a subtitle for I/O module printing (the Initially
value is blank).

1 Channel (Initially selected.)

(This item is to be set if the PMC model is PMC-QC.)

2 Channel (Initially selected.)

(This item is to be set if the PMC model is PMC-QC.)

3 To preview I/O module printing, click the <Preview> button.

4 To set up the print options, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the setup of the print options, click the <Cancel>
button.
The [Print] screen appears again.

5 To print, click the <OK> button.

To quit without printing, click the <Cancel> button.

- 183 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4.7 PRINTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS

This section describes how to print system parameters.

4.7.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.7.1 (a)

1-1 Select System Parameter from Print Data.

1-2 Click the <Option> button. The [Option] screen appears.

Fig. 4.7.1 (b)

- 184 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Set up the following print options on the System Parameter tab.

Page No.
Specify a start page number for system parameter printing
(the Initially value is 1).

Title
Specify a title for system parameter printing (the Initially
value is "System Parameter").

Sub Title
Specify a subtitle for system parameter printing (the
Initially value is blank).

3 To preview system parameter printing, click the <Preview>

button.

4 To set up the print options, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the setup of the print options, click the <Cancel>
button.
The [Print] screen appears again.

5 To print, click the <OK> button.

To quit without printing, click the <Cancel> button.

- 185 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4.8 PRINTING CROSS-REFERENCES

This section describes how to print cross-references.

4.8.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.8.1 (a)

1-1 Select Cross Reference from Print Data.

1-2 Click the <Option> button. The [Option] screen appears.

Fig. 4.8.1 (b)

- 186 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Set up the following print options on the Cross Reference tab.

Page No.
Specify a start page number for cross-reference printing (the
Initially value is 1).

Title
Specify a title for cross-reference printing (the Initially
value is "Cross Reference").

Sub Title
Specify a subtitle for cross-reference printing (the Initially
value is blank).

Print Range
Specify the range of cross-references to be printed (the
Initially value is <All>).
All: All the cross-references will be printed.
Address: The cross-references in the specified address
range will be printed.
Address Kind: Cross-references at addresses of the
specified type will be printed. The kind of
the address is specified by pushing the
selection button.

Fig. 4.8.1 (c)

Guidance
Specify the type of output format guidance (the Initially
value is "STEP NO./NET NO.").

Sub Guidance
Specify the type of output format subguidance (the Initially
value is blank).

Page Feed (Initially selected.)

- 187 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Line Feed Count

Specify the number (0 to 9) of blank lines to be placed
between addresses (the Initially value is 1).

3 To preview cross-reference printing, click the <Preview> button.

4 To specify cross-reference printing in detail, click the <Details>

button.

Fig. 4.8.1 (d)

Step No. (Initially selected.)

Net No. (Initially selected.)

Print No. Type (The Initially value is "Step No. /Net No. ".)

Comment
Specify the type of comment you want to print (the Initially
value is <Relay Comment>).

Double Check (Initially not selected.)

Specify whether to check for duplicate coil writing and
duplicate use of the coil write function instruction.

Coil Guidance
(The Initially value is <Ladder Diagram Graphics>.)

- 188 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Ladder Diagram Graphics

The same graphics as those for ladder diagram printing will
be used.

User Define String

User-defined character strings will be used for printing.
User-defined character strings can be set up for the
following four items (up to 13 characters for each).

Read: Specify a character string for displaying read

references. (The Initially value is "Read.")
Write: Specify a character string for displaying write
references. (The Initially value is "Write.")
Set: Specify a character string for displaying set
references. (The Initially value is "Set.")
Reset: Specify a character string for displaying reset
references. (The Initially value is "Reset.")

5 To set up the print options, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the setup of the print options, click the <Cancel>
button.
The [Print] screen appears again.

6 To print, click the <OK> button.

To quit without printing, click the <Cancel> button.

- 189 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4.9 PRINTING BIT ADDRESS MAPS

This section describes how to print bit address maps.

4.9.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.9.1 (a)

1-1 Select Bit Address Map from Print Data.

1-2 Click the <Option> button. The [Option] screen appears.

Fig. 4.9.1 (b)

- 190 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

2 Set up the following print options on the Bit Address Map tab.
Page No.
Specify a start page number for bit address map printing
(the Initially value is 1).

Title
Specify a title for bit address map printing (the Initially
value is "Bit Address Map").

Sub Title
Specify a subtitle for bit address map printing (the Initially
value is blank).

Print Range
Specify the range of bit address maps to be printed (the
Initially value is <All>).
All: All bit address maps will be printed.
Address: The bit map addresses in the specified
address range will be printed.
Address Kind: Bit map addresses at addresses of the
specified type will be printed (multiple
address types can be selected).

Using Address (Initially selected.)

Page Feed (Initially selected.)

Use Address (The Initially value is "@").

Any symbol (one character) can be specified as the address
symbol to be used.

3 To preview bit address map printing, click the <Preview> button.

4 To set up the print options, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the setup of the print options, click the <Cancel>
button.
The [Print] screen appears again.

5 To print, click the <OK> button.

To quit without printing, click the <Cancel> button.

- 191 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4.10 SETTING UP COMMON OPTIONS

This section describes how to set up options common to all print

items.

4.10.1 Procedure

Fig. 4.10.1 (a)

1 Set up the following common options.

Guidance Message Language
Specify the language for guidance messages used when
titles and system parameters are printed.
(The Initially value is <First Language>.)

First Language
Specify a title for bit address map printing (the Initially
value is <English>).

Second Language
This item can be specified if <First/Second Language> is
selected for Guidance Message Language (the Initially
value is <English>).

Cover (Initially not selected.)

If this item is selected (the check mark is on), a meta file
can be specified for the cover.

2 To set up the print options, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the setup of the print options, click the <Cancel>
button.
The [Print] screen appears again.

- 192 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

4.11 SAVING AND READING OPTION FILE

This section describes how to save the print options you set up to a file
and how to read them from the file when printing.

4.11.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.11.1 (a)

2 To save the options to a file, click the <Save Option File> button.

2-1 The [Save As] screen appears.

Fig. 4.11.1 (b)

2-2 Specify a File name.

2-3 Click the <Save> button.

- 193 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

3 To read options from a file, click the <Restore Option File>

button.
3-1 The [Open] screen appears.

Fig. 4.11.1 (c)

3-2 Specify a File name.

3-3 Click the <Open> button.
NOTE
As to the saving/restoring folder of the option file,
You can choose the default of the saving/restoring
folder of the option file by the Specify the same
folder as a LAD file for working directory in the
[General] tab of the option.(select the [Tool] -
[Option...])
Checked .............. The same folder as the LAD file.
(Initial value) It is useful when saving at the
same folder as the LAD file.
Not checked......... The folder stored previously.
It is useful when saving to a
specified folder each time.

- 194 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

4.12 SETTING UP PRINTER

This section describes how to set up a printer.

4.12.1 Procedure
1 Select [File] - [Print]. The [Print] screen appears.

Fig. 4.12.1 (a)

2 Click the <Printer> button.

2-1 The [Printer] screen appears.

Fig. 4.12.1 (b)

2-2 Specify a printer name in Name.

If more than one printer has been installed in your system,
one can be selected from the drop-down list box.
2-3 To set the displayed printer, click the <OK> button.
To cancel the setup of the printer, click the <Cancel> button.

- 195 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

4.12.2 Setting up Pages

1 On the [Printer] screen, click the Page button.

2 Set the items on each tab.

2-1 [Line Count] tab

Fig. 4.12.2 (a)

Line Count
Specify the maximum number of lines that can be
printed on one page. A value can be entered directly. It
can also be selected by clicking the up/down arrows.
(The Initially value is 72.)

Char Point
Specify the character spacing, in points. A value can
be entered directly. It can also be selected by clicking
the up/down arrows. The font size may be adjusted
automatically according to the specified character
spacing.
(The Initially value is 9.)

Line Point
Specify the line spacing, in points. A value can be
entered directly. It can also be selected by clicking the
up/down arrows. The number of lines and the font size
may be adjusted automatically according to the
specified line spacing.
(The Initially value is 9.)

Font Face
Specify the font you want to use.
(The Initially value is <Courier New>.)

- 196 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Font Size
Specify the font size you want to use. The number of
lines, character spacing, and line spacing may be
adjusted automatically according to the specified font
size.
(The Initially value is 9.)

<Reset> button
This button clears the settings of all the items on the
[Line Count] tab to the respective Initially values.

2-2 [Line Count (Ladder)] tab

Fig. 4.12.2 (b)

Line Count
Specify the maximum number of lines that can be
printed on one page. A value can be entered directly. It
can also be selected by clicking the up/down arrows.
The line spacing and font size may be adjusted
automatically according to the specified number of
lines.
(The Initially value is 78.)

Char Point
Specify the character spacing, in points. A value can
be entered directly. It can also be selected by clicking
the up/down arrows. The font size may be adjusted
automatically according to the specified character
spacing.
(The Initially value is 8.)

Line Point
Specify the line spacing, in points. A value can be
entered directly. It can also be selected by clicking the
up/down arrows. The number of lines and the font size
may be adjusted automatically according to the
specified line spacing.
(The Initially value is 8.)
- 197 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Ladder Data
Specify the ladder data for which you want to specify a
font.

Font Face
Specify the name of the font you want to use for an
item specified in Ladder Data.
(The Initially value is <Courier New>.)

Font Size
Specify the font size you want to use for an item
specified in Ladder Data. The number of lines,
character spacing, and line spacing may be adjusted
automatically according to the specified font size.
(The Initially value is 8.)

<Reset> button
This button clears the settings for all the items on the
[Line Count (Ladder)] tab to the respective Initially
values.

2-3 [Margin] tab

Fig. 4.12.2 (c)

Upper
Specify the top margin for each page. A value can be
entered directly. It can also be selected by clicking the
up/down arrows. The entered value is assumed to be in
mm.
(The Initially value is 20.)

Under
Specify the bottom margin for each page. A value can
be entered directly. It can also be selected by clicking
the up/down arrows. The entered value is assumed to
be in mm.
(The Initially value is 10.)

- 198 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Right
Specify the right margin for each page. A value can be
entered directly. It can also be selected by clicking the
up/down arrows. The entered value is assumed to be in
mm.
(The Initially value is 10.)

Left
Specify the left margin for each page. A value can be
entered directly. It can also be selected by clicking the
up/down arrows. The entered value is assumed to be in
mm.
(The Initially value is 10.)

2-4 [Paper Size] tab

Fig. 4.12.2 (d)

Size
Specify the size of the form you want to use.
(The Initially value is <A4>.)

2-5 [Print Type] tab

Fig. 4.12.2 (e)

- 199 -
4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Frame Print
Specify whether to print a frame. The following items
can be set up only when this item is selected.

File
Specify the meta file you want to use for frame
printing. The <File> button lets you select a file name.

Data
Specify the data for which you want to set up a
character string, coordinate values, and font.

String
Specify a character string set up in Data as print data.
Data can be specified in the following data formats.
%[T]: Title data will be printed.
%[S]: Subtitle data will be printed.
%[P]: A program name will be printed.
%[N]: Page numbers will be printed.

(Initially values)
Character definition 1: %[P]
Character definition 2: %[T]
Character definition 3: %[N]
Character definition 4: %[S]
Character definition 5: Unavailable

X Pos
Specify the print start position (X-coordinate) for a
character string set up in Data. A value can be entered
directly. It can also be selected by clicking the
up/down arrows. The entered value is assumed to be in
mm.
(Initially values)
Character string definition 1: 10
Character string definition 2: 75
Character string definition 3: 180
Character string definition 4: 75
Character string definition 5: 0

Y Pos
Specify the print start position (Y-coordinate) for a
character string set up in Data. A value can be entered
directly. It can also be selected by clicking the
up/down arrows. The entered value is assumed to be in
mm.
(Initially values)
Character string definition 1: 10
Character string definition 2: 10
Character string definition 3: 10
Character string definition 4: 15
Character string definition 5: 0

- 200 -
B-63484EN/05 4.PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

Font Face
Specify the name of the font you want to use to print
the data set up in Data.
(The Initially value is <Courier New>.)

Font Size
Specify the font size you want to use to print the data
set up in Data.
(The Initially value is 12.)

2-6 To use the entered page settings, click the <OK> button.
To cancel the page settings, click the <Cancel> button.

4.12.3 Setting Property

1 <property> button is clicked on a [Printer] dialog.
2 Property set dialog of the selected printer appears. The print
condition is set to item of the selected printer.

- 201 -
5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION B-63484EN/05

5 COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

This chapter describes how to compile and decompile source
programs, as well as automatic compilation and automatic
decompilation. The chapter also describes how to protect a ladder
program using a password.

• Compilation
Compilation involves converting an edited source program to
object code that can be executed by the PMC. Unless source
programs are compiled, online functions cannot be used and the
source programs cannot be transferred to RAM of the PMC.

Source Compilation Object Transfer to

program code

• Decompilation
Decompilation involves converting object code to a source
program. Data items uploaded from the PMC, and data items
read from ROM and a memory card become object code. Since
object code can neither be edited nor printed offline, you must
decompile object code.

Object code Source

Decompilation
program

NOTE
To decompile an object code with a password,
enter the password first.

- 202 -
B-63484EN/05 5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

5.1 COMPILATION

This section describes how to compile source programs.

Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Compile]. The [Compile] dialog appears.

Fig. 5.1 (a)

2 Click the [Option] tab to set the compile options.

• For PMC models that do not support multiple comments
(only coil-comments)

Fig. 5.1 (b)

- 203 -
5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION B-63484EN/05

The details of the options are listed below.

Table 5.1 (a)

Option Explanation
When a ladder that has the same number of
Condense steps is compiled, the object code is
decreased.
A symbol that can be displayed on display
Output Symbol/Coil-comment unit of CNC, and an accompanying coil
comment are output to an object code.
Any symbol that exceeds six characters in
Ignore too long strings of the length is replaced by a space code of six
symbol characters and output to an object code
together with a coil comment.
Output Comment A coil comment is output to an object code.
A net comment pointer is output to an object
Output Netcomment pointers
code.
Functions TMR, TMRB, TMRBF, CTR, DIFU,
Multiple used check of the
and DIFD are checked if they are duplicated.
Function parameter number
If any, a warning is displayed.
A password is added to an object code. Enter
Setting of Password
a password at the start of execution.
Specify the format in which to output a coil
comment to an object file when compiling a
source program.
English:
Japanese coil comments are replaced by
Coil-comment language
spaces and output to an object file.
(Conventional specification)
Japanese:
Japanese coil comments are converted
directly and output to an object file.

• PMC model which does not support the multiple comments

Fig. 5.1 (c)

- 204 -
B-63484EN/05 5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

The details of the options are listed below.

Table 5.1(b)
Option Explanation
A symbol (16 bytes or less) that can be displayed
Output Symbol/Comment on display unit of CNC, and a comment are output
to an object code.
Output First Comment First comment is output to an object code.
Output Second Comment Second comment is output to an object code.
Output Netcomment
A net comment pointer is output to an object code.
pointers
Multiple used check of Functions TMR, TMRB, CTR, DIFU, and DIFD are
the Function parameter checked if they are duplicated. If any, a warning is
number displayed.
A password is added to an object code. Enter a
Setting of Password
password at the start of execution.

3 To start compilation, click the <Exec> button. When [Setting of

Password] in the compile option is checked, the
[Password(Compile)] dialog appears. Enter a password, then
click the <OK> button.
(For details of passwords, see Section 5.4, "Protecting Ladder
Programs by Passwords.")

Fig. 5.1 (d) Fig. 5.1 (e)

- 205 -
5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION B-63484EN/05

4 While data is being compiled, the progress of the processing

appears on the screen. When completed, the number of errors and
warnings appears.

Fig. 5.1 (f)

NOTE
1 Condense mode
Condense mode has the following advantages.
• Reduced compilation time.
• Reduced transfer time from a personal computer to the
PMC.
• The mode requires little ROM space.
On the other hand, the following restrictions must be observed:
• When data is edited by an integrated edit function, and if a
ladder or symbol is added, overlapping with the C language
area might occur. Pay careful attention to this point.
2 Net comment pointer
The net comment contains string information only in a source
program. The compiled object code does not include the net
comment information. Therefore, the setting to output the "net
comment pointer" (position information of a net comment) as a
function NOP to object code was developed. This position
information enables the net comment to be restored at
decompilation after a ladder is modified by online editing.
3 Symbol comment data
A relay comment, which is a type of symbol comment data, is
not included in a compiled object code. For details, see Section
3.5.1, " Symbol and Comment Data."
4 PMC-SB7
On PMC-SB7, the "Condense" and "Ignore too long strings of
the symbol" options are enabled unconditionally.

- 206 -
B-63484EN/05 5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

5 <Map Log> button

Each data size of the source program is displayed by pushing the
<Map Log> button after processing of compilation. "F-ROM
used" shows the size of needed Flash ROM.

Header information

Size information

Fig. 5.1 (g)

Header information
Item Contents
File name LAD file name
PMC Type The model of PMC
Date Date the file was created.
* Date is dependent on "Regional options".

Size information
Item Contents
Message Data size of a message.
Symbol Data size of a symbol and a comment.
Comment
Ladder program Data size of a ladder and step sequence.
Memory Used Data size of the all ladder program .
F-ROM Used Size of Flash ROM necessary to store a ladder
program.
* KB is KByte.

NOTE
When displayed "F-ROM used" size exceeds the
option of PMC ladder capacity, the ladder cannot
be transmitted to PMC or may be unable to write
correctly to F-ROM.

- 207 -
5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION B-63484EN/05

5.2 DECOMPILATION
This section describes how to decompile object code.

Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Decompile]. The [Decompile] dialog appears.

Fig. 5.2 (a)

2 Click the [Option] tab to set the decompile options.

• PMC model which supports the multiple comments

Fig. 5.2 (b)

- 208 -
B-63484EN/05 5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

Details of the options are listed below.

Table 5.2 (a)

Option Explanation
Symbol/Comment is If not checked, no symbol/comment data is decompiled.
decompiled The definition of the source is directly used.
The definition of the source program is newly made from
New
the symbol and comment of object code.
Add(Merging the The symbols of the source program and object code are
Symbol/ Comment has merged only for a symbol and comment. If the same
given priority to the symbol and comment exist, the definition of the source
Source data) program is used.
Add(Merging the The symbols of the source program and object code are
Symbol/ Comment has merged only for a symbol and comment. If the same
given priority to the symbol and comment exist, the definition of the object
Memory card data) code is used.
The symbols of the source program and object code are
merged only for a symbol and comment. If the same
symbol and comment exist, the using definition can be
Add separately selected for symbol, first comment or second
comment.
Please push <Detail> button and select the using
definition on [Detail] dialog box.

Fig. 5.2 (c)

• PMC model which does not support the multiple comments

Fig. 5.2 (d)

- 209 -
5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION B-63484EN/05

Details of the options are listed below.

Table 5.2 (b)

Option Explanation
If not checked, no symbol/comment data is
Symbol/Comment is
decompiled. The definition of the source is directly
decompiled
used.
The symbols of the source program and object
Merging the Symbol/
code are merged only for a symbol and comment.
Comment has given
If the same symbol and comment exist, the
priority to the Source data
definition of the source program is used.
Merging the Symbol/ The symbols of the source program and object
Comment has given code are merged only for a symbol and comment.
priority to the Memory If the same symbol and comment exist, the
card data definition of the object code is used.

3 To start decompilation, click the <Exec> button. When object

code with a password is to be decompiled, the
[Password(Decompile)] dialog appears. Enter a password to
permit display or to permit display and editing, and then click the
<OK> button.
(For details on passwords, see "Protecting Ladder Programs by
Passwords.")

Fig. 5.2 (e)

Fig. 5.2 (f) Fig. 5.2 (g)

- 210 -
B-63484EN/05 5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

4 Once decompilation is complete, the number of errors and

warnings appears.

Fig. 5.2 (h)

NOTE
Password
The password to be entered differs depending on
the type of the password added to an object code.
• Only Password(Read)
→ Enter Password(Read) to permit display
• Only Password(Read/Write) or Password(Write)
→ Enter Password(Read/Write) or
Password(Write) to permit display and editing
• Both
→ Enter Password(Read/Write) or
Password(Write) to permit display and editing

5 <Map Log> button

Each data size of the object code is displayed by pushing the
<Map Log> button after processing of decompilation.

Header information

Size information

Fig. 5.2 (i)

- 211 -
5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION B-63484EN/05

Header information
Item Contents
File name LAD file name
PMC Type The model of PMC
Date Date the file was created.
* Date is dependent on "Regional options".

Size information
Item Contents
Message Data size of a message.
Symbol
Data size of a symbol and a comment.
Comment
Ladder program Data size of a ladder and step sequence.
Memory Used Data size of the all ladder program .
Size of Flash ROM necessary to store a ladder
F-ROM Used
program.
* KB is KByte.

6 <Update Log> button

Only the modules which were modified in the object code are
decompiled.
To confirm the modified module, please press <Update Log>
button.

Fig. 5.2 (j)

[ ] The file was not updated by decompilation.

[*] The file was updated by decompilation.

NOTE
The display format of "Modified" is dependent on
"Regional options". So, the contents of the display
may differ.

- 212 -
B-63484EN/05 5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

5.3 AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

This section describes automatic compilation and decompilation.

The automatic compilation or decompilation processing is performed

when the mode is switched between offline and online so that a source
program in a sequence program (LAD file) is consistent with the
object code (memory card-formatted data).

• Execution condition of automatic compilation

Select [Ladder] - [Online/Offline]. When the mode is switched
from offline to online, a source program is compiled
automatically under one of the following conditions.
⋅ When a source program (such as a title or ladder) is
changed
⋅ When a source program is imported
⋅ When a source program is not compiled after a sequence
program is created
⋅ When the time stamp of memory card-formatted data is
older than that of any data in a source program (when data
is converted)

• Execution condition of automatic decompilation

Select [Ladder] - [Online/Offline]. When the mode is switched
from online to offline, object code is decompiled automatically
under one of the following conditions.
⋅ When memory card-formatted data is loaded from the PMC
⋅ When a memory card-formatted file is imported
⋅ When a Handy File-formatted file is imported
⋅ When a ROM-formatted file is imported
⋅ When online editing is executed
⋅ When the time stamp of any data in a source program is
older than that of memory card-formatted data (when data is
converted)

NOTE
Setting options for automatic compilation or
decompilation
(1) Compile option
• Select [Tool] - [Option].
• Click the [Compile] tab for setting.
(2) Decompile option
• Select [Tool] - [Option].
• Click the [Decompile] tab for setting.

- 213 -
5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION B-63484EN/05

5.4 PROTECTING LADDER PROGRAMS BY PASSWORDS

This section describes the protection of a ladder program.

Adding a password to an object code prevents a ladder program from

being displayed or edited on a CNC.

• How to create object code with a password

1 Select [Tool] - [Compile].
2 Click the [Option] tab, then select [Setting of Password].
3 Click the <Exec> button.
4 When the [Password(Compile)] dialog appears, enter a
password.

Fig. 5.4 (a) Fig. 5.4 (b)

NOTE
The different dialog by PMC model is displayed.
Please refer to the manual of the corresponding
PMC model for details of the password.
1 FANUC PMC MODEL
PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SA5/SB/SB2/SB3/SB4/
SB5/SB6/SB7/SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6
LADDER LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING
MANUAL.(B-61863E)
2 FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A PMC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-63983EN)

5 Click the <OK> button. Then, object code with the entered
password is created.

- 214 -
B-63484EN/05 5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

NOTE
Entering a password
1 A password must consist of no more than eight or
sixteen alphanumeric characters. (The maximum
length of characters is different in dependence on
the PMC model.)
2 Passwords are not case-sensitive. (A lower-case
letter is regarded as an upper-case letter.)
3 A space, kana character, kanji character, and
special character (for example, *, #, and @ )
cannot be used.
4 There are combinations of characters, which
cannot be used in some rare cases.(An error
message appears.) In this case, enter another
string.

5.4.1 Partial Protect Functions

This subsection describes the partial protect function.

Using a special password to permit display and editing enables the

subprogram area to be divided into a protection area and
non-protection area, as well as enabling a ladder program to be
partially protected. An object code with a special password is created
in the same way as an object code with a normal password, except for
using the special password to permit display and editing.

• Special password
A special password begins with #.
(Except for its beginning with #, a special password is no
different from a normal password.)

The setting way has a difference by PMC model.

PMC-SB4(STEP)/SC4(STEP)/SB6(STEP)/SB6(STEP,IO-2)/
SB7/NB2(STEP)
Display item Setting
Setting for display permission No check
Setting for display and edit Check
permission Input a password that begins with #.
Password E.g.: #FANUC

Extended functions for Series 30i/31i/32i-A, 30i/31i/32i-A

Display item Setting
Setting for display permission Check
Password Input a normal password.
Setting for edit permission Check
Password Input a password that begins with #.
E.g.: #FANUC

- 215 -
5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION B-63484EN/05

• Protection area and non-protection area

A subprogram number identifies the protection area and
non-protection area.

LEVEL1 Protection area

Main program LEVEL2 Protection area
LEVEL3 Protection area
P1 to P1499 Protection area
Subprogram
P1500 or later Non-protection area

• Applied model
PMC-SB4(STEP)/SC4(STEP)/SB6(STEP)/SB6(STEP,IO-2)
/SB7/NB2(STEP)
30i-A PMC/30i-A PMC(EXT)/30i-A PMC(2nd)/
30i-A PMC(2nd,EXT)/30i-A PMC(3rd)/30i-A PMC(3rd,EXT)
31i-A PMC/31i-A PMC(EXT)/31i-A PMC(2nd)/
31i-A PMC(2nd,EXT)/31i-A PMC(3rd)/31i-A PMC(3rd,EXT)
32i-A PMC/32i-A PMC(EXT)/32i-A PMC(2nd)/
32i-A PMC(2nd,EXT)/32i-A PMC(3rd)/32i-A PMC(3rd,EXT)

NOTE
Object code with a special password can be
decompiled without entering a password. In this
case, only a subprogram in the non-protection area
(P1500 or later) can be displayed, edited, and
printed. When compiled, [Setting of Password] in
the compile option is ignored and an object code is
created by using a special password added to the
object code. This enables only the non-protection
area to be changed while a ladder program created
by a machine tool builder is protected.

- 216 -
B-63484EN/05 5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION

5.5 AUTOMATIC NUMBERING OF TMRB/TMRBF/DIFU/DIFD

If you use this function, the 1st parameter for the TMRB/ TMRBF/
DIFU/ DIFD instructions will be automatically numbered at the
compiling process and you no longer have to take care of entering the
specific numbers for these parameters.

Supported PMC models

30i/31i/32i-A Extended function
Supported
30i/31i/32i-A

Supported instructions
The 1st parameter of the following functional instructions is the target
of assignment.
SUB24(TMRB)
SUB77(TMRBF)
SUB57(DIFU)
SUB58(DIFD)
To use this function, you should set the 1st parameter for the TMRB/
TMRBF/ DIFU/ DIFD instructions to 0. When the TMRB/ TMRBF/
DIFU/ DIFD instructions, that have a number 0 in the first parameter,
are detected in the compiling process of the FANUC OPEN CNC
Ladder Editimg Package, their numbers are automatically generated
from the last number. In this case, the TMRB/ TMRBF/ DIFU/ DIFD
instructions, that have a number except 0, is detected, its number is not
changed. This automatic number generation is done only at the
compiling process of FANUC OPEN CNC Ladder Editimg Package.
Therefore, you can set its number to 0 in a mnemonic file or on the
offline editing screen but you cannot set its number to 0 on the online
editing screen which does not executes the compiling process.
RD Input
TMRB
0
1000
WRT Output1
RD Input
TMRBF
0
1000
WRT Output2
RD Input
DIFU
0
WRT Output3
RD Input
DIFD
0
WRT Output4
Fig. 5.5 (a) Ladder diagram Fig. 5.5 (b) Mnemonic data

- 217 -
5.COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION B-63484EN/05

Operation
1 Select [Tool]-[Compile...]. Then, the [Compile] dialog appears.
2 Click the <Exec> button.
3 If compile processing is completed, the error and warning are
displayed.

NOTE
1 The result of automatic assignment is output to the
map log. Push the <Map Log> button to display the
net number, the functional instruction and the
automatic assigned parameter number.
2 You can check duplication of the parameter
number of the functional instruction TMR, TMRB,
TMRBF, CTR, CTRB, DIFU, and DIFD. Please
check the Multiple used check of the Function
parameter number of the [option] tab of the
[compile] screen.
3 You cannot check the automatically generated
number on the offline editing screen because
automatic numbering function generates the
parameter number in the ladder object code
directly. But you will be able to check the
automatically generated number on the online
editing screen.

- 218 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

6 MNEMONIC EDITING
This chapter describes how to convert a source program to a
mnemonic file, and vice versa, as well as the mnemonic file format.

- 219 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

6.1 CONVERTING SOURCE PROGRAMS TO MNEMONIC

FILES

This section describes the procedure for converting a source program

to a mnemonic file that can be edited with a text editor.

Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Mnemonic Convet]. Then, the [Mnemonic –
Mnemonic Conversion] dialog appears.

Fig. 6.1

2 Enter a mnemonic file name in [Mnemonic File].

3 Select [Convert Data Kind]. The following items can be selected:

Table 6.1(a)
ALL Converts all source programs.
System Parameter Converts only system parameters.
Title Converts only titles.
Symbol&Comment Converts only symbols and comments.
No check External Symbol
Symbol&Comment Converts only symbols and comments into
Check External Symbol the external symbol file.
Ladder Converts only ladder programs.
I/O Module Converts only I/O modules.
Message Converts only messages.

NOTE
The External Symbol is displayed if the external
symbol file output function is supported.

- 220 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

4 Select [Selection Item]. The following items can be selected:

Table 6.1 (b)

• Converts data to data in the format output by
P-G.
P-G Compatible
• Converts Japanese messages to code-formatted
data.
• Converts comments in which kanji characters
are included in the comment data.
• Converts data in which the symbol and comment
for an address as well as the function name of a
Full Options function are used as comments.
• Converts data that has an instruction part,
operand part, and comment part.
• Converts Japanese messages to
Japanese-formatted data.
• Converts data with the jump addresses (labels)
of functions (JMPB, JMPC, CALL, SP
commands) used in a subprogram highlighted.
However, the step number of mnemonic data
Label/Subprogram after conversion is different from the other
settings. (The function part used in a
subprogram is different.)
• Converts Japanese messages to
Japanese-formatted data.

5 To convert a source program to a mnemonic file, click the <OK>

button. Once the conversion is completed, the conversion results
appear.
(To see the last converted results, click the <Log File> button.)

6.1.1 Converts to the External Symbol File

This function outputs the symbol/comment of external symbol file
format. External symbol files are composed of identification code and
the comma separated text file. You can edit the symbol/comment data
by the external application such as Microsoft Excel, Text editor.
The same data as the one explained in "3.11.2 Export of the external
symbol file" is outputted.

- 221 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

Operation
1 Select [Tool]-[Mnemonic Convert...]. Then, the [Mnemonic]
screen appears.

Fig 6.1.1(a)

2 Input the file name to output in the Mnemonic File.

3 Select the Convert Data. Select the "Symbol&Comment".
4 Check the External Symbol.
5 Check the Performing automatic address assignment if needed..
This item appears when the PMC model is the extended function.
Check : The address of the symbol is assigned
automatically. Beforehand, you need to
specify the assignment address range on
the system parameter screen.
No check (Default) : The address is not assigned automatically
and outputted with the address character
only.
6 Click the <OK> button.

NOTE
1 When a white-space character is contained in the
symbol, it can be replaced with the specified
character. Select [Tool] – [Option...]. Click
[Mnemonic/Source] tag. Input the character to
replace in Converting to a mnemonic file. Default is
_(underbar).
2 L address of LABEL type is always automatically
assigned regardless of this setting.
3 Refer to Appendix E "The data format of the
external symbol file" for the data format of the
external symbol file.

- 222 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

6.2 CONVERTING MNEMONIC FILES TO SOURCE

PROGRAMS

This section describes the procedure for converting a mnemonic file

edited by a text editor to a source program in accordance with a
certain format.

Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Source Program Convert]. Then, the [Mnemonic
– Source Program Conversion] dialog appears.

Fig. 6.2

2 Enter a mnemonic file name in [Mnemonic File Name].

3 When checking is enabled, a warning is output to a log file when
it occurs during conversion of a symbol & comment mnemonic
file to a source program. (Conventional specification)
When checking is disabled, the warnings and the number of
occurrences are output to a log file at the end of conversion of a
symbol & comment mnemonic file to a source program.
Target warning numbers: K:W-4131, K:W-4133, K:W-4139
4 To convert a mnemonic file to a source program, click the <OK>
button.
Once the conversion is complete, the conversion results appear.
(To see the most recently converted results, click the <Log File>
button.)

- 223 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

NOTE
1 For conversion to a source program, the source
program of the currently open sequence program is
changed but is not stored, however.
2 For a coil comment, created in A or B format, that
contains single-byte lowercase alphabetic
characters, the lowercase characters are replaced
with uppercase characters when a mnemonic file is
converted to a source program.
3 If the name of defined symbol data is the same as a
signal name available in ladder programs, an error
may occur during conversion to source data.

- 224 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

6.2.1 Addition of Symbol/Comment and Net comment

This subsection describes how to add Symbol/Comment and Net
comment when converting a mnemonic file divided into multiple files
to a source program.

Follow the procedure below to add Symbol/Comment and Net

comment during conversion to a source program.

Procedure
1 Select [Tool] – [Source Program Convert…]. Then, the
[Mnemonic – Source Program Conversion] dialog appears.

Fig. 6.2.1

2 When [Initialize source programs before conversion] is not

checked, Symbol/Comment and Net comment are added.
3 When [Initialize source programs before conversion] is checked
and [Symbol/Comment] is not checked, Symbol/Comment is
added. ([Symbol/Comment] can not be checked if [Initialize
source programs before conversion] is not checked.)
4 When [Initialize source programs before conversion] is checked
and [Ladder] is not checked, Net comment is added. ([Ladder]
can not be checked if [Initialize source programs before
conversion] is not checked.)
5 To convert a mnemonic file to the source program, click the
<OK> button.

- 225 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

Example of a mnemonic file division

; System parameter ; Title ; Message
%@0 %@1 %@4
2 BINARY 01 MTB NAME A000.0 MESSAGE1
3 NO 02 MACHINE TOOL NAME A000.1 MESSAGE2
4 PMC-SB7 03 CNC/PMC NAME %
7 150 04 9999
11 UNUSE 05 88
12 0 06 A08B-9210-J505 ; I/O module
13 UNUSE 07 2003-07-31 %@5
14 0 08 NAME CH01: X000 0 0 1 ID32A
% 09 NAME
10 REMARKS Y000 0 0 2 OD32A
% %

; Symbol(LEVEL1) ; Ladder(LEVEL1)
%@2-C %@3
X0000.0 I_L1_MODULE_00_0 (*
$1 'INPUT 00.0' PROGRAM $name$ LEVEL1
Y0001.0 O_L1_MODULE_01_0 VERSION $version$ 0.01
$1 '' 'OUTPUT MODULE 01.0' DATE $date$ 2003.08.01
% PROGRAMMED BY $author$
COPYRIGHT (C) 2003, FANUC LTD.
*)
RD I_L1_MODULE_00_0
WRT O_L1_MODULE_01_0
END1
%

; Symbol(LEVEL2) ; Ladder(LEVEL2)
%@2-C %@3
X0001.1 I_L2_MODULE_01_1 (*
$1 'INPUT 01.1' PROGRAM $name$ LEVEL2
Y0002.1 O_L2_MODULE_02_1 VERSION $version$ 0.01
$1 '' 'OUTPUT MODULE 02.1' DATE $date$ 2003.08.01
% PROGRAMMED BY $author$
COPYRIGHT (C) 2003, FANUC LTD.
*)
RD I_L2_MODULE_01_1
WRT O_L2_MODULE_02_1
END2
%

; Symbol(P0001) ; Ladder(P0001)
%@2-C %@3
X010.1.1 I_P1_MODULE_10_1 P1 SP
$1 'INPUT 10.1' (*
Y012.1 O_P1_MODULE_12_1 PROGRAM $name$ P0001
$1 '' 'OUTPUT MODULE 12.1' VERSION $version$ 0.01
% DATE $date$ 2003.08.01
PROGRAMMED BY $author$
COPYRIGHT (C) 2003, FANUC LTD.
*)
RD I_P2_MODULE_10_1
WRT O_P2_MODULE_12_1
SPE
%

- 226 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

6.3 MNEMONIC FILE FORMAT

This section describes the mnemonic file format.

Identification code
For a mnemonic file, data is defined using one of four types of
identification code, beginning with %.
Table 6.3 (a)
Identification
Meaning
code
%@A Start of ALL-format data
%@E End of ALL-format data
%@0 to %@5 Start of each single-format data
%@0: System parameter
%@1: Title
%@2: Symbol and comment (FORMAT-A/B)
%@2-C: Symbol and comment (FORMAT-C)
%@2-C2: Symbol and comment (For multiple comments)
%@2-D: Symbol and comment (Extended function)
%@2-E (optional setting):
Symbol and comment (CSV format)
%@3: Ladder
%@3-D: Ladder (Extended function)
%@4: Message
%@5: I/O module
Only % End of each single-format data

Line feed code

LF (0AH) is used as the line feed code.
CR (0DH) is ignored.

Delimiter
Table 6.3 (b)
This is used in ladder data.
• This is used in the ladder data part to delimit ladder data
and a comment statement. Data after ";" is regarded as
; (Semicolon)
being a comment statement. Consequently, when a
mnemonic file is converted to a source program, data
after ";" is not converted but deleted.
This is used in ladder data and I/O module data.
• This is used in a ladder data part to delimit net numbers
and ladder data. Data before ":" is regarded as being net
: (Colon) numbers.
• This is used in the I/O module data part to delimit
channel numbers and I/O module data. Data before ":" is
regarded as being channel numbers.

- 227 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

Control character
In a mnemonic file, a dollar sign "$" is used as the control character.
When a dollar sign is used in a string, describe "$$."
(1) Symbol and comment data
• Specifying address and symbol
Describe an address and symbol on the same line. At the
beginning of a line, describe an address, use a half-size
space or tab as a delimiter, and then describe a symbol.

R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER
Address Symbol

Half-size space or tab

• Specifying a relay comment and coil comment
Describe a relay comment and coil comment after the
specification of an address described in (1). A string
enclosed in the first single quotation marks " ' " after "$1" is
a relay comment. A string enclosed in the second single
quotation marks is a coil comment.

$1 ’KEEPPOWERON’ ’KEEPPOWERON’
Relay comment Coil comment

Half-size space or tab

Half-size space or tab

Mark that represents comment data (always '$1')

When you do not use a relay comment, describe a pair of

single quotation marks for the relay comment part.

$1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’

• Specifying the multiple comments

Describe the multiple comments after the specification of an
address described in (1). A string enclosed in the first single
quotation marks " ' " after "$1" is 1st comment. A string
enclosed in the second single quotation marks is 2nd
comment.

$1 ’KEEPPOWERON’ ’KEEPPOWERON’
1st comment 2nd comment

Half-size space or tab

Half-size space or tab

Mark that represents comment data (always '$1')

When you do not use 1st comment, describe a pair of single

quotation marks for the 1st comment part.

$1 ’’ ’INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’

- 228 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

NOTE
When you use a single quotation mark " ' " in a
string of a relay comment or coil comment,
describe a dollar sign plus a single quotation mark
as "$" + " ' ".

(2) Ladder data

• Starting and ending a net comment
Describe a net comment with "(*," "*)" in a ladder
mnemonic.

Table 6.3 (c)

Description Meaning
(* Start of a net comment
*) End of a net comment

• Specifying the position of a form feed character (printing a

ladder diagram)
To specify the position of a form feed character to print a
ladder diagram, describe "$P" in a net comment.

Table 6.3 (d)

Description Meaning
Specification of position of form feed
$P or #p
character (printing ladder diagram)

(3) Control character in a mnemonic file

The control character is selectable in the following character.
#, $, %, &, /, ?, @, ^, (None)

To change the control character in a mnemonic file, please

modify a file %%%FLSET on the install folder of this software.

%%%FLSET
;==========================================================
; FANUC LADDER-III Initial Setting File
; ( `key word =' <= 9characters )
;==========================================================
：
*M; ======== Mnemonic options definition ========
：
SFC=0;
;
NETCMT_CTRL_CHAR=$; Addition

Fig. 6.3 (a)

- 229 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

NOTE
1 If you don’t need the control character in a
mnemonic file, please set
“NETCMT_CTRL_CHAR=NULL” in a
file %%%FLSET.
2 When the control character is used in a string,
please describe two consecutive control
characters.
Ex.) When the control character is “#”, please
describe “##”
3 When specifying the position of a form feed
character (printing a ladder diagram), please
describe “a control character” + “P” in a net
comment.
4 If this software is updated with the new released
installer, a file %%%FLSET is initialized and the
line of “NETCMT_CTRL_CHARA=” is deleted. After
reinstalling this software, please set
“NETCMT_CTRL_CHARA=” again if you want to
change the control character in a mnemonic file.

Example
• When the control character is “$”. (current
specification)
%@3 Converting into
(* $P *) the source <New page>
RD ABC program ABC XYZ
WRT XYZ
(* #P *)
: [ #P ]
%
Fig. 6.3 (b)

• When the control character is “#”.

%@3 Converting into [ $P ]
(* $P *) the source
RD ABC ABC XYZ
program
WRT XYZ
(* #P *) <New page>
:
%
Fig. 6.3 (c)

- 230 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

6.4 MNEMONIC FILE SAMPLE

This section provides examples of mnemonic files for the single

format and All format.

6.4.1 Single Format

This section shows a sample file for each single-format data.

6.4.1.1 Parameter

%@0
2 BCD → Counter data type
3 NO → Presence or absence of operator panel
4 PMC-RC4 → PMC type
5 000000 → Head address of language program link control statement data
6 50 → Time ratio to execute language program
7 100 → Ladder execution time
%

Counter data type

BINARY or BCD

Presence or absence of operator panel

No operator panel: NO
Operator panel: YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010

KEY address KEY image address

LED address LED image address

PMC type
Table 6.4.1.1
PMC model Setting data (half-size string)
30i-A PMC 30i-A PMC
30i-A PMC(2nd) 30i-A PMC(2nd)
30i-A PMC(3rd) 30i-A PMC(3rd)
30i-A PMC(DCS) 30i-A PMC(DCS)
30i-A PMC(EXT) 30i-A PMC(EXT)
30i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) 30i-A PMC(2nd,EXT)
30i-A PMC(3rd,EXT) 30i-A PMC(3rd,EXT)
30i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) 30i-A PMC(DCS,EXT)
31i-A PMC 31i-A PMC
31i-A PMC(2nd) 31i-A PMC(2nd)
31i-A PMC(3rd) 31i-A PMC(3rd)
31i-A PMC(DCS) 31i-A PMC(DCS)
31i-A PMC(EXT) 31i-A PMC(EXT)
31i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) 31i-A PMC(2nd,EXT)
31i-A PMC(3rd,EXT) 31i-A PMC(3rd,EXT)
31i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) 31i-A PMC(DCS,EXT)

- 231 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

PMC model Setting data (half-size string)

32i-A PMC 32i-A PMC
32i-A PMC(2nd) 32i-A PMC(2nd)
32i-A PMC(3rd) 32i-A PMC(3rd)
32i-A PMC(DCS) 32i-A PMC(DCS)
32i-A PMC(EXT) 32i-A PMC(EXT)
32i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) 32i-A PMC(2nd,EXT)
32i-A PMC(3rd,EXT) 32i-A PMC(3rd,EXT)
32i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) 32i-A PMC(DCS,EXT)
PMC-SA1 PMC-RA1
PMC-SA3 PMC-RA3
PMC-SA5 PMC-RA5
PMC-SB3 PMC-RB3
PMC-SB4 PMC-RB4
PMC-SB4 (STEP SEQ) PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ)
PMC-SB5 PMC-RB5
PMC-SB6 PMC-RB6
PMC-SB6 (STEP SEQ) PMC-RB6 (STEP SEQ)
PMC-SB6 (IO-2) PMC-RB6 (IO-2)
PMC-SB6 (STEP,I/O-2) PMC-RB6 (STEP,I/O-2)
PMC-SB7 PMC-SB7
PMC-SB7 (STEP SEQ) PMC-SB7 (STEP SEQ)
PMC-SC3 PMC-RC3
PMC-SC4 PMC-RC4
PMC-SC4 (STEP SEQ) PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ)
PMC-NB PMC-NB
PMC-NB2 PMC-NB2
PMC-NB6 PMC-NB6
PMC-PA3 PMC-PA3
PMC-QC PMC-QC

Head address of language program link control statement data

0, or 800000 to 8FFFFF (hex)

Time ratio to execute language program

1 to 99 (%)

Ladder execution time

100 (always 100%)

I/O link assignment selection function (channel 1)

Used: USE
Not used: UNUSE

Number of basic I/O link groups (channel 1)

0 to 16

I/O link assignment selection function (channel 2)

Used: USE
Not used: UNUSE

Number of basic I/O link groups (channel 2)

0 to 16

- 232 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

The parameters for each model are described below.

(1) For PMC-PA3/SA3/SA5/SB4/SB5/SB6

%@0
2 BINARY 2. Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3. Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 PMC-RB5 4. PMC type (PMC-PA3/PMC-RA3/PMC-RA5/PMC
% -RB4/PMC-RB5/PMC-RB6)

(2) For PMC-SB3/NB6

%@0
2 BINARY 2. Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3. Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 PMC-NB6 4. PMC type (PMC-RB3/PMC-NB6)
7 100 7. Ladder execution time (fixed at 100%)
%

(3) For PMC-SC3/SC4

%@0
2 BINARY 2. Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3. Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 PMC-RC3 4. PMC type (PMC-RC3/PMC-RC4)
5 000000 5. Head address of language program link control (0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF(hex))
6 50 statement data
7 100 6. Time ratio to execute language program (1 to 99%)
% 7. Ladder execution time (fixed at 100%)

(4) For PMC-NB/NB2

%@0
2 BINARY 2. Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3. Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 PMC-NB 4. PMC type (PMC-NB/PMC-NB2)
5 000000 5. Head address of language program link control (0 or 200000 to 2FFFFF(hex))
6 50 statement data
7 100 6. Time ratio to execute language program (1 to 99%)
% 7. Ladder execution time (fixed at 100%)

(5) For PMC-SB7

%@0
2 BINARY 2. Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3. Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 PMC-SB7 4. PMC type (PMC-SB7)
7 150 7. Ladder execution time
11 UNUSE 11. I/O link assignment selection function (Used: USE, Not used: UNUSE) (channel 1)
12 0 12. Number of basic I/O link groups (0 to 16) (channel 1)
13 UNUSE 13. I/O link assignment selection function (Used: USE, Not used: UNUSE) (channel 2)
14 0 14. Number of basic I/O link groups (0 to 16) (channel 2)
%

- 233 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

(6) For 30i-A PMC (1st PMC)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 30i-A PMC 4: PMC type (30i-A PMC)
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(7) For 30i-A PMC (2nd PMC)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 30i-A PMC(2nd) 4: PMC type (30i-A PMC(2nd))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(8) For 30i-A PMC (3rd PMC)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 30i-A PMC(3rd) 4: PMC type (30i-A PMC(3rd))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(9) For 30i-A PMC (Dual check safety)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 30i-A PMC(DCS) 4: PMC type (30i-A PMC(DCS))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

NOTE
Please refer to Subsection 3.8.1 “Operation” of
Section 3.8 “EDITING SYSTEM PARAMETERS”
for the detail.

- 234 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

(10) For 31i-A PMC (1st-path PMC)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 31i-A PMC 4: PMC type (31i-A PMC)
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(11) For 31i-A PMC (2nd-path PMC)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 31i-A PMC(2nd) 4: PMC type (31i-A PMC(2nd))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(12) For 31i-A PMC (3rd-path PMC)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 31i-A PMC(3rd) 4: PMC type (31i-A PMC(3rd))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(13) For 31i-A PMC (Dual check safety)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 31i-A PMC(DCS) 4: PMC type (31i-A PMC(DCS))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(14) For 31i-A PMC (1st-path PMC, Extended function)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 31i-A PMC(EXT) 4: PMC type (31i-A PMC(EXT))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

- 235 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

(15) For 31i-A PMC (2nd-path PMC, Extended function)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 31i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) 4: PMC type (31i-A PMC(2nd, EXT))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(16) For 31i-A PMC (3rd-path PMC, Extended function)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 31i-A PMC(3rd) 4: PMC type (31i-A PMC(3rd, EXT))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(17) For 31i-A PMC (Dual check safety, Extended function)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 31i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) 4: PMC type (31i-A PMC(DCS, EXT))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(18) For 32i-A PMC (1st-path PMC)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 32i-A PMC 4: PMC type (32i-A PMC)
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(19) For 32i-A PMC (2nd-path PMC)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 32i-A PMC(2nd) 4: PMC type (32i-A PMC(2nd))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

- 236 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

(20) For 32i-A PMC (3rd-path PMC)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 32i-A PMC(3rd) 4: PMC type (32i-A PMC(3rd))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(21) For 32i-A PMC (Dual check safety)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 32i-A PMC(DCS) 4: PMC type (32i-A PMC(DCS))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(22) For 32i-A PMC (1st-path PMC, Extended function)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 32i-A PMC(EXT) 4: PMC type (32i-A PMC(EXT))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(23) For 32i-A PMC (2nd-path PMC, Extended function)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 32i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) 4: PMC type (32i-A PMC(2nd, EXT))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

(24) For 32i-A PMC (3rd-path PMC, Extended function)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 32i-A PMC(3rd) 4: PMC type (32i-A PMC(3rd, EXT))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

- 237 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

(25) For 32i-A PMC (Dual check safety, Extended function)

%@0
2 BINARY 2: Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3: Presence or absence of operator panel (Presence: YES, Absence: NO)
4 32i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) 4: PMC type (32i-A PMC(DCS, EXT))
31 1 31: Number of display language (comment) (1-16)
32 -1 32: CNC display language number 1 (-1, 0-127)
33 0 33: Comment set number 1 (0-16)
%

NOTE
Please refer to Subsection 3.8.1 “Operation” of
Section 3.8 “EDITING SYSTEM PARAMETERS”
for the detail.

- 238 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

6.4.2 Title

%@1
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME
02 MACHINE TOOL NAME
03 CNC & PMC NAME
04 PMC PROGRAM NO.
05 EDITION NO.
06 PROGRAM DRAWING NO.
07 DATE OF PROGRAMMING
08 PROGRAM DESIGNED BY
09 ROM WRITTEN BY
10 REMARKS
%

6.4.2.1 Symbol and comment

%2-C
Address %@2-C
Symbol
R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER
$1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON’
R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT
Mark that represents $1 ‘$’POWER$$’ ‘KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$’ ON’ Coil comment
comment data R0300.0
$1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON’
P0008 OPEN-FRONT
Relay comment $1 ‘OPEN FRONT COVER
L0100 INITIALIZE
$1 ‘’ ‘INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE
%

NOTE
1 Symbol is up to 16 characters (bytes).
2 Relay comment is up to 16 characters (bytes).
3 Comment is up to 30 characters (bytes).

%2-C2
Address %@2-C2
Symbol
R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER
$1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON’
R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT
Mark that represents $1 ‘$’POWER$$’ ‘KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$’ ON’ 2nd comment
comment data R0300.0
$1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON’
P0008 OPEN-FRONT
1st comment $1 ‘OPEN FRONT COVER
L0100 INITIALIZE
$1 ‘’ ‘INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE
%

NOTE
1 Symbol is up to 16 characters (bytes).
2 First Comment and second comment are up to 30
characters (bytes).

- 239 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

6.4.2.2 Ladder

P-G compatible and Japanese comment

%@3
RD X0.4
OR Y80.6
WRT D300.1
SUB 1
RD.NOT X3.0
SUB 40
2
8191
D300
SUB 2
%

Full option

%@3
N00001: SUB 71 ; SP
P1 ; (SUBPR1 ) “SUB PROG. NO.01”
; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.01]
N00002: RD X0.0 ; (XADRS1 ) “JUMPB LABEL L001”
SUB 68 ; JMPB
L100 ; (LABEL1 )
; [LABEL L00001]
N00003: RD X0.1 ; (XADRS2 ) “JMPC LABEL L001”
SUB 73 ; JMPC
L100 ; (LABEL1 )
; [LABEL L00001]
N00004: SUB 69 ; LBL
L100 ; (LABEL1 )
; [LABEL L00001]
N00005: SUB 72 ; SPE
N00006: SUB 71 ; SP
P2 ; (SP1000 ) “SUB PROGRAM NO.1”
N00007 RD R0.0 ; (RADRS00)
DEC D0 ; (DADRS04)
2
WRT D0.0
N00008: SUB 72 ; SPE
N00009: SUB 64 ; END
%

- 240 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

Label and subprogram

%@3
SUBPR1 SP SUBPR1 ; <P1 > “SUB PROG. NO.01”
; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.01]
RD XADRS1 ; <X0.0 > “JUMPB LABEL L001”
JMPB LABEL1 ; <L100 >
; [LABEL L00001]
RD XADRS2 ; <X0.1 > “JUMPB LABEL L002”
JMPB LABEL1 ; <L100 > [LABEL L00001]
LABEL1 LBL ; <L100 >
; [LABEL L00001]
SPE
SP1000 SP ; <P2 > “SUB PROG. NO.01”
RD RADR00 ; <R0.0 >
DEC DADR04 ; <D0 >
2
WRT D0.0
SPE
END
%

6.4.2.3 Message

%@4
A00.0 2100020 ACT DOOR NOT CLOSE
A00.1 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON
A00.2 2100020 EDTOK KEY SWITCH ON
%

6.4.2.4 I/O module

%@5
X000 1 0 1 ID64A
Y008 1 0 4 OD64B
%

- 241 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

6.4.3 ALL format

%@A
%@0
2 BINARY
3 NO
4 PMC-RB4
%
%@1
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME
:
:
10 REMARKS
%
%@2-C
R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER
$1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON’
R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT
$1 ‘$’POWER$$’ ‘KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$’ ON’
R0300.0
$1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON’
P0008 OPEN-FRONT
$1 ‘OPEN FRONT COVER
L0100 INITIALIZE
$1 ‘’ ‘INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE
%
%@3
RD R1001.0
OR R120.3
AND R1000.2
WRT Y2000.4
(*
Describe a net comment at this position.
Any characters that can be entered from a PC are available.
*)
RD R1001.0
AND R1000.2
WRT Y23.4
(* $p *) ← Specification of the position of a form feed character
(printing a ladder diagram)
RD R101.0
OR R123.4
AND R100.2
WRT Y200.4
%
%@4
A00.0 2100020 ACT DOOR NOT CLOSE
A00.1 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON
%
%@5
X000 1 0 1 ID16C
Y008 1 0 4 OD32A
%
%@E

- 242 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

6.5 CONVERTING STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS TO

MNEMONIC FILES

This section describes the procedure for converting a step sequence

program to a mnemonic file. Use this function only when you change
a conventional model to a new model.

Procedure
1 Modify a mnemonic option definition in the %%%FLSET file in
the Ladder Editing Package (Windows) installation folder, using
a text editor.

;==============================================================================
; Ladder Editing Package(Windows) Initial Setting File
; ( `key word =' <= 9characters )
;==============================================================================
;
~~
*M; ======== Mnemonic options definition ========
;
P_G_COMPATIBLE = /ERC FLMNE.ERR /OUT V /P-G
JPN_COMMENT = /ERC FLMNE.ERR /OUT V /SJ /MJJ /ICH
JPN_FULL_OPTIONS = /ERC FLMNE.ERR /OUT V /LX 8 20 28 /SJ /LS /LC /LF /LN /MJJ /ICH
ENG_FULL_OPTIONS = /ERC FLMNE.ERR /OUT V /LX 8 20 28 /LS /LC /LF /LN /ICH
JPN_LABEL_SUBPRG = /ERC FLMNE.ERR /OUT V /LX 10 21 31 /SJ /LAD /LC /LLS /LAS /LS /LFN /MJJ /ICH
ENG_LABEL_SUBPRG = /ERC FLMNE.ERR /OUT V /LX 10 21 31 /LAD /LC /LLS /LAS /LS /LFN /ICH
;
SFC=1; ← When you want to convert a step sequence program to a mnemonic file or source
program, set 1.
;
2 Select [Tool] - [Mnemonic Convert...]. The [Mnemonic] dialog
box appears. In this dialog box, convert a step sequence program
to a mnemonic file.

NOTE
1 Do not edit a step sequence program converted to
a mnemonic file using a text editor.
2 If you re-install the Ladder Editing Package, the
content of "%%%FLSET" file is replaced with initial
value.

- 243 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

6.6 MNEMONIC OPTIONS

A specified character is separate in “Conversion into a mnemonic file”

and “Conversion into the source program”. And the replacement of the
white-space character is selectable on the mnemonic option
daialog-box ([Tool] – [Option - Mnemonic/Source]).
A specified character is:
The white-space character is treated as a separate character in a
mnemonic file. When converting the source program into a mnemonic
file, it is possible to replace the white-space character in the symbol
with another character. The replaceable character is described as “A
specified character”.
When converting a mnemonic file into the source program, it is
possible to replace the white-space character with a specified
character.

Fig. 6.6
Converting to a mnemonic file
To replace the white-space character with another character when
converting to a mnemonic files, please check [Replace a
white-space character of symbol to the specified character].
(Default: checked on)
When this box is not checked, the white-space characters in a
symbol are output to a mnemonic file without being replaced.
Enter the replacing character in the [Specified Character] edit
box (one half-size character).
Converting to source programs
To replace the specified character with the white-space character
when converting to source programs, please check [Replace the
specified character of symbol to a white-space character].
(Default: checked off)
When this box is not checked, the specified characters in a
symbol are output to a symbol data without being replaced.
Enter the replacing character in the [Specified Character] edit
box (one half-size character).
- 244 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

6.7 FORMAT OF EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE

Mnemonic file format is enhanced to read a normal CSV file.

Identification code
For a mnemonic file, data is defined using one of four types of
identification code, being with %.
Please use identification code "%@2-E" when you describe symbol
information in the CSV file.

Table 6.7
Identification
Meaning
code
%@A Start of ALL-format data
%@E End of ALL-format data
%@0 to %@5 Start of each single-format data
%@0:System parameter
%@1:Title
%@2:Symbol and comment (FORMAT-A/B)
%@2-C:Symbol and comment (FORMAT-C)
%@2-C2:Symbol and comment(Multiple comment)
%@2-D:Symbol and comment (Variable symbol)
%@2-E(Option):Symbol and comment (CSV file)
%@3:Ladder
The column number
%@3-D:Ladder(Variable symbol)
of symbol, comment
%@4: Message
and etc. is specified
%@5:I/O module
for Option enclosed
Only % End of each single-format data in parentheses
behind %@2-E.
6.7.1 Option
The column number of symbol, comment and etc. is specified for
Option enclosed in parentheses behind %@2-E.

Table 6.7.1
Option Description Remarks
/SYM= Specify a column no. of symbol 1st column when omitted
/SCP= Specify a column no. of symbol scope Symbol scope is global when omitted
(LEVEL1->L1, LEVEL2->L2, P0001->P1,,).
/TYP= Specify a column no. of symbol type 3rd column when omitted
(BOOL/BYTE/WORD/DWORD)
/ADR= Specify a column no. of address 4th column when omitted
/CM1= Specify a column no. of comment 1 When omitted, it is considered that comment 1/2/3/4
/CM2= Specify a column no. of comment 2 does not exist.
/CM3= Specify a column no. of comment 3 In Additional Information window of CNC’s I/O
/CM4= Specify a column no. of comment 4 DIAGNOSIS screen, one of 4 comments can be
displayed according to the setting of display language
on CNC. Please see “10.7.1 Set of display language
for comment” in this material.
/SEP= Specify a character of delimiter Delimiter is comma when omitting

- 245 -
6.MNEMONIC EDITING B-63484EN/05

Table 6.7.1
Option Description Remarks
+ Plus is used to connect strings of two or To combine the character strings in the fifth column
more comment columns and the tenth column into comment 1, specify
CM1=5+10.
/JOI= Specify a character to connect strings of When /JOI=_ is specified, _ is added between
two or more comment columns. character strings to be combined. When this option is
omitted, they are directly combined.
/LBL The first effective line is a column label When /LBL exists, the conversion of the first line in
definition line. effective data is skipped.
(white-space) Delimiter of option setting

(Ex.) Separator is comma, quotation mark is “, 1st column is symbol,

2nd column is address, 3rd column is type, 4th column is scope,
5th column is comment1 and 6th column is comment2.

%@2-E(SYM=1 ADR=2 TYP=3 SCP=4 CM1=5 CM2=6)

6.7.2 Sample of an External Symbol File

:
%@2-E(SYM=1 ADR=2 TYP=3 SCP=4 CM1=5 CM2=6)
STOP,Y0.0,BOOL,Stop signal on,Maintenance information (Line 29)
POWER_OFF,X32.0,BOOL,Power off status,Maintenance information (Line 01)
DOOR,X32.1,BOOL,Safety door open,Maintenance information (Line 12)
%
:

- 246 -
B-63484EN/05 6.MNEMONIC EDITING

6.7.3 Operation to Import from CSV-file

It is possible to import symbol/comment data by the same procedure
as a source program conversion.

Procedure
1 Boot Ladder Editing Package. And then select [Ladder] -
[Programer Mode] - [Offline]. Then, display mode is changed to
Offline.
2 Select [Tool] - [Source Program Convert…]. Then, the
[Mnemonic - Source Program Conversion] dialog appears.

Fig. 6.7.3

3 Input the CSV-file name to be imported into [Mnemonic File]

edit-box.

4 If you want to initialize symbol/comment data before importing,

please check [Initialize source programs before conversion] and
[Symbol/Comment].

5 To import symbol/comment data from a CSV-file, click the

<OK> button.

NOTE
When converting from the source file to mnemonic
file, symbol/comment data is always exported in
normal symbol/comment format (%@2-D section
format). It is not supported to export CSV format
symbol/comment file.

- 247 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

7 INPUT/OUTPUT
This chapter describes how to load and store programs.

NOTE
1 When input or output (loading data from the PMC
or storing data to the PMC) is performed during NC
operation, the speed at which data (such as
positions) is displayed on an NC screen may fall.
This does not, however, affect NC operation. It is
recommended that input or output be performed
while the NC is not being operated.
2 While a screen created by the C language executor
is displayed, the communication speed falls. It is
recommended that, after moving to another screen
such as the position display screen, input or output
(loading data from the PMC or storing data to the
PMC) be performed.

- 248 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

7.1 SETTING UP COMMUNICATION

Program editing and input/output operations in online mode can be

performed via an Ethernet port. The following explains how to set up
connection via an Ethernet port.

7.1.1 Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Communication...].

Fig. 7.1.1 (a)

2 Select [Network Address] and click the <Add host> button.

Click the <Advanced> button to display the "Host Setting
Dialog" box.

Fig. 7.1.1 (b)

Host
Specify a host name (for example, "CNC1") or an IP
address (for example, "190.168.0.1").

- 249 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

Port No.
Specify the port number of the Ethernet function of the
CNC to be connected.

Time Out
Specify the time out applied to the transmission/reception of
PMC data, in seconds.

3 Select [Setting] and add a network address to "Use device".

Fig. 7.1.1 (c)

4 Click the <Connect> button to start communication.

NOTE
If the PMC is displaying one of the following
screens, you cannot communicate with the PMC.
Use the online function after the PMC switches to
another screen.
[PMCLAD], [I/O], [EDIT], [SYSPRM], [TRACE],
[ANALYS], [USRDGN], [DBGLAD], [GDT],
[USRMEM]

- 250 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

7.1.2 Setting Options

The [Option] dialog box can also be used to make communication
settings.

1 Select [Option] on the [Tool] menu.

2 Select the [Setting] tab.

Fig.7.1.2

3 Click the <Network setting> button to make network settings.

Use FBUS
When using the expansion driver/library to communicate
through a high-speed serial bus, check this option. When
using only Ethernet together with Ladder Editing Package
(Windows), uncheck this option. (Initially, this checkbox is
checked.)

NOTE
When the expansion driver/library is not installed, if
the [Use FBUS] checkbox is checked, an error may
occur. For details on the expansion driver/library,
see Section 1.1, "OPERATING ENVIRONMENT."

- 251 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

7.2 LOADING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS FROM THE PMC

(DURING DISCONNECTION WITH THE PMC)

7.2.1 Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Load from PMC].
The [Program transfer wizard Selection of transferred method]
screen appears.

Fig. 7.2.1 (a)

1-1 Select a transfer method.

• <I/O by MONIT-ONLINE function>
A communication function by an online monitor is
used.

• <I/O by “I/O” key operation>

Input or output is performed by the HOST operation of
an I/O function.

NOTE
On PMC-SB7 and 30i/31i/32i-A PMC, this screen
does not appear. On PMC-SB7 and 30i/31i/32i-A
PMC, only <I/O by MONIT-ONLINE function> is
available.

- 252 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

♦ <I/O by MONIT-ONLINE function>

2 Select <I/O by MONIT-ONLINE function>, and then click the

<Next> button. The following message appears.

Fig. 7.2.1 (b)

3 To display the [Communication] screen to start access to the

PMC, click the <Yes> button.

Fig. 7.2.1 (c)

4 When there is a loader, the [Communication Current Device]

screen appears.
Select either CNC Main or LOADER, and then click the <Exec>
button.

Fig. 7.2.1 (d)

- 253 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

5 The [Program transfer wizard Selection of loading/store] screen

appears. Click the <Next> button.

Fig. 7.2.1 (e)

6 The [Program transfer wizard Selection of program] screen

appears.

Fig. 7.2.1 (f)

7 For the remainder of the procedure, see Section 7.3, "Loading

Sequence Programs from the PMC (During Connection with the
PMC)."

- 254 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

The PMC model of LAD file can be changed, when on-line

connection to the same type is completed.

Table 7.2.1
Model Compatible PMC
Ladder Type 30i-A 31i-A 32i-A
1st 30i-A PMC 31i-A PMC 32i-A PMC
2nd 30i-A PMC(2nd) 31i-A PMC(2nd) 32i-A PMC(2nd)
3rd 30i-A PMC(3rd) 31i-A PMC(3rd) 32i-A PMC(3rd)
DCS 30i-A PMC(DCS) 31i-A PMC(DCS) 32i-A PMC(DCS)
1st, EXT 30i-A PMC(EXT) 31i-A PMC(EXT) 32i-A PMC(EXT)
2nd, EXT 30i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) 31i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) 32i-A PMC(2nd,EXT)
3rd, EXT 30i-A PMC(3rd,EXT) 31i-A PMC(3rd,EXT) 32i-A PMC(3rd,EXT)
DCS, EXT 30i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) 31i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) 32i-A PMC(DCS,EXT)
: Compatible memory card form file

1 Open the ladder program.

2 Select [Tool]-[Communication...]. Then, the [Communication]
dialog appears.
3 Confirm the setting and click the <Connect> button.
4 Click the <Close> button if the connection is completed.
Compatible PMC displays the following screen.

Fig. 7.2.1 (g)

If the <Yes> button is clicked, the model of LAD file is changed.

In the case of the above-mentioned example, the LAD file is
changed into 32i-A.
If the <No> button is clicked, the model of LAD file is not
changed.
If the PMC model is not changed, you cannot operate the
on-line ladder edit after connection. Switch programmer
mode to on-line and off-line to operate on-line ladder edit.
Then, change the model of LAD file.

NOTE
The sequence program for Series 30i-A can be
executed in Series 31i/32i-A without conversion.
But, do not execute the PMC sequence program in
other CNC without debugging.

- 255 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

♦ <I/O by “I/O” key operation>

2 Select <I/O by “I/O” key operation>, and then click the <Next>
button. The [Program transfer wizard Selection of loading/store]
screen appears.

Fig. 7.2.1 (h)

3 Click the <Next> button. The [Program transfer wizard Selection

of program] screen appears.

Fig. 7.2.1 (i)

4 Select LADDER or ALL, and then click the <Next> button.

- 256 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

5 The [Program transfer wizard Setting of communication]

screen appears.
Set a communication protocol, and then click the <Next> button.

Fig. 7.2.1 (j)

6 The [Program transfer wizard Confirmation of processing]

screen appears.

Fig. 7.2.1 (k)

- 257 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

7 Click the <Finish> button. Then, the [Execution of I/O transfer]

screen appears.

Fig. 7.2.1 (l)

NOTE
Set CHANNEL, DEVICE, FUNCTION, and DATA
KIND on the PMC I/O PROGRAM screen of the
PMC in advance. Set HOST for DEVICE. For details
of the settings, refer to the FANUC PMC Ladder
Language Programming Manual (B-61863E).
Press soft key <EXEC> of the NC to place the NC in
standby.

8 Once I/O transfer is complete, the following message appears.

Fig. 7.2.1 (m)

- 258 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

7.3 LOADING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS FROM THE PMC

(DURING CONNECTION WITH THE PMC)

7.3.1 Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Load from PMC].
The [Program transfer wizard Selection of transferred method]
screen appears.

Fig. 7.3.1 (a)

NOTE
When connection is not established, the
[Communication] screen appears. Then, establish
connection.

1-1 Set data.

Content of transfer
As transfer information, a selection can be made from
Ladder, Language program, and PMC Parameter.
When transferring PMC parameters, enter a transfer
destination file name in [Selection of]. The initial
setting specifies that PMC parameters are transferred
to PMC_PRM.PRM in a user file folder.
For a user file folder, see Subsection 3.1.3, "Work
Folders and Online Program Files."
A PMC parameter file once transferred to a user file
folder can be restored by using the export function.
For the export function, see Section 3.15,
"EXPORTING PROGRAMS."

- 259 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

NOTE
Only PMC-SC3/SC4 allow loading and storing of
language programs. Those types of PMCs to which
a C language board is attached do not allow
loading and storing of language programs.

1-2 Click the <Next> button. The [Program transfer wizard

Confirmation of processing] screen appears.

Fig. 7.3.1 (b)

1-3 Check the setting items. Click the <Finish> button. Then,
the [Transfer monitor] screen appears, and then the program
is transferred.

Fig. 7.3.1 (c)

- 260 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

7.4 STORING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS IN THE PMC (DURING

CONNECTION WITH THE PMC)

7.4.1 Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Store to PMC].
The [Program transfer wizard Selection of transferred method]
screen appears.

Fig. 7.4.1 (a)

1-1 Selection of transferred method.

• <I/O by MONIT-ONLINE function>
A communication function by an online monitor is
used.

• <I/O by “I/O” key operation>

An input or output is performed by the HOST
operation of an I/O function.

- 261 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

♦ <I/O by MONIT-ONLINE function>

2 Select <I/O by MONIT-ONLINE function>, and then click the

<Next> button. The following message appears.

Fig. 7.4.1 (b)

3 Click the <Yes> button. The [Communication] screen appears,

after which access to the PMC is started.

Fig. 7.4.1 (c)

4 When there is a loader, the [Communication Current Device]

screen appears.
Select CNC Main or LOADER, and then click the <Exec>
button.

Fig. 7.4.1 (d)

- 262 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

5 The [Program transfer wizard Selection of loading/store] screen

appears. Click the <Next> button.

Fig. 7.4.1 (e)

6 The [Program transfer wizard Selection of program] screen

appears.

Fig. 7.4.1 (f)

7 For the remainder of the procedure, see Section 7.5, "Storing

Sequence Programs in the PMC (During Connection with the
PMC)."

- 263 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

♦ <I/O by “I/O” key operation>

2 Select <I/O by “I/O” key operation>, and then click the <Next>
button. The [Program transfer wizard Selection of
loading/store] screen appears.

Fig. 7.4.1 (g)

3 Click the <Next> button. The [Program transfer wizard

Selection of program] screen appears.

Fig. 7.4.1 (h)

- 264 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

4 Select LADDER or ALL, then click the <Next> button.

5 The [Program transfer wizard Setting of communication]

screen appears.
Set a communication protocol, and then click the <Next> button.

Fig. 7.4.1 (i)

6 The [Program transfer wizard Confirmation of processing]

screen appears.

Fig. 7.4.1 (j)

- 265 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

7 Click the <Finish> button. The [Execution of I/O transfer] screen

appears.

Fig. 7.4.1 (k)

NOTE
Set CHANNEL, DEVICE, FUNCTION, and DATA
KIND on the PMC I/O PROGRAM screen of the
PMC in advance. Set HOST for DEVICE. For
details of these settings, refer to the FANUC PMC
Ladder Language Programming Manual
(B-61863E).
Press soft key <EXEC> of the NC to place the NC
in the standby status.

8 Once I/O transfer is complete, the following message appears.

Fig. 7.4.1 (l)

- 266 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

7.5 STORING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS IN THE PMC (DURING

CONNECTION WITH THE PMC)

7.5.1 Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Store to PMC]
The [Program transfer wizard Selection of program] screen
appears.

Fig. 7.5.1 (a)

NOTE
When connection is not established, the
[Communication] screen appears. Then establish
connection.

1-1 Set data.

Content of transfer
As transfer information, a selection can be made from
Ladders, Language program, and PMC Parameter.
When transferring PMC parameters, enter a transfer
source file name in [Selection of]. The initial setting
specifies that PMC_PRM.PRM in a user file folder is
transferred.
For a user file folder, see Subsection 3.1.3, "Work
Folders and Online Program Files."
An existing PMC parameter file can be stored in a user
file folder by using the import function.
For the import function, see Section 3.10,
"IMPORTING PROGRAMS."

- 267 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

1-2 Click the <Next> button. The [Program transfer wizard

Confirmation of processing] screen appears.

Fig. 7.5.1 (b)

1-3 Check the setting items. Click the <Finish> button. Then,
the [Transfer monitor] screen appears, and then the program
is transferred.

Fig. 7.5.1 (c)

NOTE
1 During ladder editing in online mode, no program
can be stored in the PMC. Store programs in the
PMC while a ladder is being monitored.
2 After storing a program in the PMC, if the CNC is
powered down without backing up the program, the
editing results are lost. When you want to store a
program in the CNC, execute [Backup].

- 268 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

7.6 WRITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS INTO F-ROM

This section describes how to back up a program edited in online

mode or a program stored in the PMC to F-ROM of the CNC.

7.6.1 Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Backup].
The [Backup of program] screen appears.

Fig. 7.6.1

2 Choose the check boxes of the programs you want to back up.
When the C language board is not mounted, you cannot choose
"User C program."
3 To back up a program, click the <OK> button.
When backup is completed successfully, the [Backup of the
program ended] message appears.
To cancel the backup of a program, click the <Cancel> button.

- 269 -
7.INPUT/OUTPUT B-63484EN/05

7.7 COMPARING WITH PMC

You can compare programs with the I/O function, HOST operation.

7.7.1 Menu Bar

Select [Tool] - [Load from PMC...] or [Store to PMC...], and the
transfer direction selection dialog box of the "Program transfer
wizard" will appear.

Fig. 7.7.1

NOTE
You can compare programs including language
programs on each model of PMC-SC3, SC4, NB,
and NB2.

- 270 -
B-63484EN/05 7.INPUT/OUTPUT

7.7.2 Program Transfer Wizard

This wizard displays a group of dialog boxes for performing a series
of setup operations necessary for program comparison operations. At
the prompts on the dialog pages, set the necessary items.
7.7.2.1 Selecting a transfer method
To perform program comparison operations, select "I/O by "I/O" key
operation" as a transfer method.

Fig. 7.7.2.1

7.7.2.2 Selecting a transfer direction

The transfer direction selection dialog box appears. To use the
compare function, select "PMC and comparison" and click the <Next>
button.

Fig. 7.7.2.2

On the subsequent pages of the wizard, follow the instructions

indicated.

- 271 -
8.EXECUTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

8 EXECUTING AND STOPPING

SEQUENCE PROGRAMS
This chapter describes how to execute and stop sequence programs.

WARNING
Special care is needed when you execute or stop a
program.
If a program is used inappropriately, the machine
may operate in an unexpected manner.
It is recommended that you not use this machine
while a person is near the machine.

• How to check the execution or stop status

Check the execution or stop status on the status bar.

Execution/stop status
Undisplay : When disconnected

: Execution status

: Stop status
Fig. 8 (a)

• Preparation prior to accessing the PMC

Procedure
1 Connect a personal computer to the NC (PMC) with a cable.
(For the specification of the required cable, see Appendix
A.)
2 Check the communications status (connection or
disconnection) with the PMC.

Connection/disconnection status

: Disconnection status : Connection status

Fig. 8 (b)

3 In the disconnection status, select [Tool]-[Communication].

The [Communication] screen appears.

4 Click the <Connect> button to establish a connection.

- 272 -
B-63484EN/05 8.EXECUTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

8.1 EXECUTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

This section describes the procedure for executing a sequence

program.

Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Program Run/Stop].

For no language program:

Fig. 8.1 (a)

For a language program:

Fig. 8.1 (b)

Yes
A sequence program is to be executed.

No
The dialog box is closed without executing a sequence
program.

INITIAL START
Selected: A language program is to be executed from the
beginning.
Unselected: A language program is to be executed from the
last-terminated position.

- 273 -
8.EXECUTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

8.2 STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

This section describes the procedure for stopping sequence programs.

Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Program Run/Stop].

Fig. 8.2

Yes
A sequence program is to be stopped.

No
The dialog box is to be closed without stopping the
sequence program.

NOTE
When the PMC-MDI screen is displayed by a
language program on the NC, no program can be
stopped. To stop the program, select another
screen on the NC.

- 274 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9 DIAGNOSIS
This chapter describes the online diagnosis functions including ladder
monitoring, display and modification of the PMC status and PMC
parameters, signal tracing, and signal analysis.

- 275 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.1 LADDER MONITORING

CAUTION
1 The online monitor function for step sequence
programs is not supported.
2 If the system being used is not supported by the
connected PMC, the online functions sometimes
cannot be used. Use a system with a supported
edition.

9.1.1 Procedure
1 When the system is in offline mode, select [Ladder] -
[Online/Offline] to set online mode.
When the <On-Line/Off-Line Change> button is in the up state,
the system is in offline mode. When the button is in the down
state, the system is in online mode.

<On-Line/Off-Line Change button>

2 Select [Ladder] - [Monitor/Editor] to switch between the

[Monitor] screen and [Edit] screen.
On the [Monitor] screen, the <Ladder Monitor> button is in the
down state.
On the [Edit] screen, the <Online Editor> button is in the down
state.

9.1.2 [Monitor] Screen

Fig. 9.1.2

The screen is scrolled by using the direction keys, page keys, and
scroll bars.
The signal ON and OFF states are expressed by the line thickness.
ON :
OFF :
- 276 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.1.3 [Edit] Screen

Fig. 9.1.3 (a)

The <Update> button on the toolbar writes the edited ladder program
to the PMC.
The <Restore> button restores the ladder program to its original state
that existed before editing.

Fig. 9.1.3 (b)

CAUTION
1 Executing the update function alters the ladder
program on the PMC.
Before executing the update function, carefully
check whether it is safe to alter the ladder program.
2 Except for the Power Mate-D (PMC-PA3), powering
off the CNC without first backing up the program
clears the program changes. Before powering off the
CNC, click the <Update> button on the toolbar and
then back up the program.
3 To reflect the results of editing a ladder program in
online mode in the source program in the sequence
program (LAD file), switch to offline mode to
automatically execute decompilation or execute
decompilation manually.

For other edit operations, see Section 3.3, "EDITING LADDER

DIAGRAMS."

- 277 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.1.3.1 Multiple used check of the functional instruction parameter

number
When the <Update> button on the online editing screen is pushed,
multiple use of the following functional instruction parameter number
is checked.

Supported instructions
Multiple use of the following functional instruction parameter number
is checked.
SUB3(TMR)
SUB24(TMRB)
SUB77(TMRBF)
SUB5(CTR)
SUB56(CTRB)
SUB57(DIFU)
SUB58(DIFD)

Operation
1 Push the <Update> button on online editing screen.
2 The following screen will be displayed if multiple use of the
parameter number of functional instruction was found.

Fig. 9.1.3.1 (a)

• Push the <Yes> button if you want to update the ladder of

multiple use of parameter number.
• Push the <No> button if you want to modify the ladder of
multiple use of parameter number.

NOTE
1 Multiple use of the parameter number of TMRB and
TMRBF instruction is checked.
2 Multiple use of the parameter number of DIFU and
DIFD instruction is checked.

- 278 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.1.4 Signal Trigger Stop Function

9.1.4.1 Procedure
1 If the offline mode is set, choose [Online/Offline] from the
[Ladder] menu to set the online mode.
The offline mode is set when the <Online/Offline Switch> button
is up. The online mode is set when the button is down.

<<Online/Offline Switch> button>

2 Choose [Ladder Mode - Signal Trigger] from the [Ladder] menu.

The <Signal Trigger> button is held down, and the [Signal
Trigger] screen appears. At the bottom of the screen, Trigger
Mode, Check Point, Address, Count, and Time are displayed.
(See Subsection 9.1.4.4, "[Trigger Parameter] screen.")

Fig. 9.1.4.1

- 279 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.1.4.2 Executing the signal trigger stop function

1 Choose [Signal Trigger - Start] from the [Ladder] menu.
The [Signal Trigger Stop Function] execution screen appears.
During execution, the status bar of the main frame displays an
icon indicating that the signal trigger stop function is being
executed.

Fig. 9.1.4.2

<Icon for indicating that the signal trigger stop function is being
executed>

- 280 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.1.4.3 Terminating the signal trigger stop function

1 When the signal trigger stop condition is satisfied, the [Signal
Trigger] screen appears, and sample data is collected.

Fig. 9.1.4.3 (a)

2 The [Signal Trigger Stop Function] termination screen appears.

Trigger stop time on the NC side is displayed.

Fig. 9.1.4.3 (b)

- 281 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.1.4.4 [Trigger Parameter] screen

Fig. 9.1.4.4

Address
Set a trigger address. (Symbol input is possible.)

Check Point
Select a trigger check point.
Make a selection from Level1 (start of LEVEL1), END1 (after
END1 instruction execution), END2 (after END2 instruction
execution), and END3 (after END3 instruction execution,
selectable with a model that can use LEVEL3).

Count
Set a trigger count (1 to 65535).

Trigger Mode
ON: Stops triggering on the rising edge of a specified address
signal.
OFF: Stops triggering on the falling edge of a specified address
signal.

<Init> button
This button initializes the parameters as follows:
Address: Blank
Check Point: LEVEL1
Count: 1
Trigger Mode: Disabled

- 282 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.1.4.5 Context menu

Fig. 9.1.4.5

9.1.4.6 Shortcut key list

Table 9.1.4.6
Shortcut key Corresponding function
[F3] Search
[F4] Parameter setting
[F5] Execution

- 283 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.1.5 Mnemonic Monitor

A language selection of monitor screen

This section describes the procedure for selecting the language of
monitor screen.

To display the PMC program made by mnemonic files with a

mnemonic language monitor screen, please select the monitor
language by the following procedure.

Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Option…]. Then, the [Option - General] dialog
appears.

Fig. 9.1.5

2 To select the language of monitor screen, click [Ladder Diagram]

or [Mnemonic].

3 When pressed <OK> button or <Apply> button, the language of

monitor screen is settled.

NOTE
The following screens are always displayed with
ladder language
• Collective display
• Search results list display

- 284 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

Mnemonic monitor screen

This section describes the procedure for displaying a mnemonic
monitor screen.

Procedure
1 Select [View] - [Program List]. The [Program List] screen
appears. (Usually, this screen appears automatically when a LAD
file is created or opened.)
2 Check the current programmer mode (offline or online). If the
programmer mode is offline, select [Ladder] - [Programmer
Mode] - [Online] or click <Online/Offline change> button to
change the programmer mode to online.
3 Check the current ladder mode (monitor or editor). If the ladder
mode is editor, select [Ladder] - [Ladder Mode] - [Monitor] or
click <Ladder Monitor> button to change the ladder mode to
monitor.
4 On the [Program List] screen, double-click the ladder program
you want to monitor. Alternatively, select the ladder program and
press the [Enter] or [F10] key.

Signal
status

Line
number

Mnemonic
language
program

Cursor
information

Fig. 9.1.5 (a) Mnemonic monitor screen

- 285 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

Mnemonic data in a mnemonic monitor screen

When the mnemonic data used at a mnemonic file conversion is
corresponding to the PMC side, it is displayed in a mnemonic monitor
screen.
When there is no mnemonic data for monitoring or the mnemonic data
is not corresponding to the PMC side, the following dialog-box is
displayed.
Please select a mnemonic format (P-G Compatible, Label/Subprogram,
Full option).
And then, a mnemonic monitor screen is displayed with the selected
format.

Fig. 9.1.5 (b)

Toolbar

<1> <2> <3>

Fig. 9.1.5 (c)

<1> Display a [Search setting] dialog-box (Ctrl+F)

Fig. 9.1.5 (d)

<2> Switch search area (Global/Local) (Ctrl+F3)

<3> Display a line number (off/on)

Shortcut keys
Table 9.1.5
Shortcut key Corresponding function
[F3] Search(downward)
[Shift]+[F3] Search(upward)
[Ctrl]+[F3] Switch search area (Global/Local)
[Ctrl]+[F] Display a [Search setting] dialog-box

- 286 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.2 SIGNAL STATUS

The PMC signal status can be displayed and changed in real-time.

WARNING
Special care must be taken when the signal status
or PMC parameters are changed. If the change
function is not used appropriately, the machine
operation may be unpredictable.
When there are people near the machine, this
function should not be used.

CAUTION
1 The statuses of some signals cannot be changed.
The status of such a signal is not changed when a
sequence program, the CNC, the MMC, or an
external I/O unit such as the I/O-Link is repeatedly
writing data into the address of the signal. (The
CNC repeatedly writes data to address F, the MMC
repeatedly writes data to address M, and the
external I/O unit repeatedly writes data to address
X.)
2 When a bit signal of the D8192-D9999 addresses
is changed, other bit signals of the same byte
address are overwritten at the same time.
Therefore, it can happen that the signal state might
not change as specified if the signals of the same
D address is changed by the PMC program and the
CNC at the same time.

9.2.1 Procedure
1 Select [Diagnose] - [Signal Status]. The [Signal Status] screen
appears.

Fig. 9.2.1

- 287 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.2.2 Toolbar

<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> <9> <10> <11> <12>

Fig. 9.2.2

<1> Switches between the status screen and forced I/O screen.

<2> Search button

<3> Combo box for inputting the character string for which a search
is to be made

<4> Symbol indication (off ↔ on)

<5> Display format: Byte

<6> Display format: Word

<7> Display format: Double word

<8> Display type: Binary

<9> Display type: Decimal

<10>Display type: Hexadecimal

<11>Display type: BCD

<12>Sign indication (off ↔ on)

(Valid only when decimal notation is set as the display type.)

9.2.3 Status Bar

<1> <2> <3>

Fig. 9.2.3

<1> Selection mode

[Status] or [Force] is indicated.

<2> Display format

[Byte], [Word], or [Dword] is indicated.

<3> Display type

[Bit], [Decimal], [Hex], or [Bcd] is indicated.

- 288 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.2.4 Context Menu

Fig. 9.2.4

9.2.5 Shortcut Keys

Table 9.2.5
Shortcut key Corresponding function
[F2] Turns on a signal. (Forced I/O)
[F3] Turns off a signal. (Forced I/O)
[F4] Symbol indication (off ↔ on)
[F5] Switches between the status screen and forced I/O screen.
[Ctrl]+[F] Search

- 289 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.3 PMC PARAMETERS

PMC parameters (timers, counters, keep relays, and data table) are
displayed.

WARNING
Special care must be taken when the signal status
or PMC parameters are changed. If the change
function is not used appropriately, the machine
operation may be unpredictable.
When there are people near the machine, this
function should not be used.

CAUTION
When PMC parameters should not be changed, the
parameters may be protected.
Refer to the relevant programming manual for the
PMC being used.

9.3.1 Procedure
1 Select [Diagnose] - [PMC Parameter].

2 Display the pull-down menu, and then select [Timer], [Counter],

[Keep Relay], [Data Table], or [Set Up].

9.3.2 Timer
The contents of the timer address locations (T) used with the TMR
instruction can be displayed and modified.

When the timer accuracy is fixation by the timer number

Fig. 9.3.2 (a)

- 290 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

When you can set the timer accuracy of each timer number

Fig. 9.3.2 (b)

9.3.2.1 Toolbar

<1> <2> <3> <4>

Fig. 9.3.2.1

<1> Symbol indication (off↔on)

<2> Search

<3> Combo box for inputting the character string for which a search
is to be made

<4> Units of the displayed timer value (msec, sec, min)

This item appears only when the timer accuracy is set for each
timer number.

9.3.2.2 Status bar

<1> <2>
Fig. 9.3.2.2

<1> Minimum setting time for the timer selected with the cursor

<2> Maximum setting time for the timer selected with the cursor

9.3.2.3 Context menu

Fig. 9.3.2.3

- 291 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.3.2.4 Shortcut keys

Table 9.3.2.4
Shortcut key Corresponding function
[F4] Symbol indication (off↔on)
[Ctrl]+[F] Search

9.3.3 Counter
The contents of the counter address locations (C) used with the CTR
instruction can be displayed and modified.

Fig. 9.3.3

NOTE
1 The contents can be displayed and modified in
binary or BCD according to the setting of the
counter data type system parameter.
2 Data which cannot be displayed in BCD is
indicated with a question mark (?).

9.3.3.1 Toolbar

<1> <2> <3>

Fig. 9.3.3.1

<1> Symbol indication (off ↔ on)

<2> Search

<3> Combo box for inputting the character string to be searched for

- 292 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.3.3.2 Context menu

Fig. 9.3.3.2

9.3.3.3 Shortcut keys

Table 9.3.3.3
Shortcut key Corresponding function
[F4] Symbol indication (off ↔ on)
[Ctrl]+[F] Search

9.3.4 Keep Relay

The contents of the keep relays (K) can be displayed and modified.

Fig. 9.3.4

9.3.4.1 Toolbar

<1> <2> <3>

Fig. 9.3.4.1

<1> Symbol indication (off ↔ on)

<2> Search

<3> Combo box for inputting the character string for which a search
is to be made

- 293 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.3.4.2 Context menu

Fig. 9.3.4.2

9.3.4.3 Shortcut keys

Table 9.3.4.3
Shortcut key Corresponding function
[F4] Symbol indication (off ↔ on)
[Ctrl]+[F] Search

9.3.4.4 Data for PMC control software

Because some keep relays are used by the PMC control software,
sequence programs cannot use the data in these keep relays.
This subsection describes only the signals relating to online function
operations. For detailed information and other signals, refer to the
"PMC Ladder Language Programming Manual" (B-61863E).
The bits marked * are used by the PMC control software and are not
related to the online function operations.

K17 or K900
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DTBLDSP * * MEMINP * * PRGRAM LADMASK

Bit Value Meaning

#7 1 Does not display the PMC parameter data table control screen.
#4 0 Does not allow you to change the signal status.
#1 0 Does not allow you to use the online edit function and I/O function.
#0 0 Does not display the ladder monitor screen.

K19 or K902
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
* * * * * * * FROM-WRT

Bit Value Meaning

#0 1 Displays a dialog box for writing to F-ROM at the end of online editing.

- 294 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.3.5 Data Table

In Data Table, there are two screens of the data table control data and
the data table.

(1) Data table control data screen

The data table control data to manage the data table is displayed.
When “DATA TABLE” in tree view is selected, either of
following two screens is displayed.

• PMC model which supports minus sign display and bit

display

Fig. 9.3.5 (a)

• PMC model which does not support minus sign display and
bit display

Fig. 9.3.5 (b)

- 295 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

(2) Data table screen

The contents of the data table (D) can be displayed and modified.
By selecting the group number which you want to display, the
content of the data table is displayed.

• Bit display

Fig. 9.3.5 (c)

• Excluding the bit display (byte/word/double word)

Fig. 9.3.5 (d)

9.3.5.1 Toolbar

<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> <9> <10> <11> <12>

Fig. 9.3.5.1

<1> Symbol indication (off ↔ on)

<2> Search

<3> Combo box for inputting the character string for which a search
is to be made

<4> Display format: Byte

<5> Display format: Word

- 296 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

<6> Display format: Double word

<8> Display type: Bit

<8> Display type: Decimal

<9> Display type: Hexadecimal

<10>Display type: BCD

<11>Sign indication (off ↔ on)

<12>Write protection

9.3.5.2 Status bar

<1> <2> <3> <4> <5>

Fig. 9.3.5.2

<1> Group name

<2> Range of data area
<3> Number of data items
<4> Display format
[Byte], [Word], or [Dword] is indicated.
<5> Display type
[Bit], [Decimal], [Hex], or [BCD] is indicated.

9.3.5.3 Shortcut keys

Table 9.3.5.3
Shortcut keys Corresponding function
[F4] Symbol indication (off↔on)
[Ctrl]+[F] Search

9.3.5.4 Input data range

Table 9.3.5.4
Byte Word Double word
Decimal -128 to 127 -32,768 to 32,767 -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
Hexadecimal 0 to FF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFFFFFF
BCD 0 to 99 0 to 9,999 0 to 99,999,999

9.3.5.5 Context menu

Fig. 9.3.5.5

- 297 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.3.6 Setting PMC Setting Parameters

PMC setting parameters can be made valid or invalid.

9.3.6.1 Programmer protect function

CAUTION
The subsequent subsections contain information
important to the developer of the application
systems to be controlled by the PMC. If the design
of an application system is inappropriate, security
problems are more likely to occur. Use great
caution when operating the functions described in
the subsequent subsections and designing
application systems using these functions.

The PMC provides a variety of editing, diagnosis, and debugging

functions to support sequence program development and debugging.
These functions, which may disable the safety mechanism provided by
sequence programs, are assumed to be used only by those operators
who are familiar with the operation of sequence programs and that of
the PMC. These functions must be protected with appropriate settings
or sequence programs from being inadvertently operated by regular
operators after the machine has been shipped to the field. If any of
these functions are to be used for the maintenance and adjustment of
the machine in the field, the machine developer is required to make
sure that the machine is placed in a safe state before the means for
enabling these functions are incorporated and that operators observe
the techniques for ensuring safety.
The parameters described in the subsequent subsections are designed
so that the system designer can set the conditions necessary for
preventing erroneous operations such as those that "stop the Ladder
program inadvertently" and that "change the settings of sequence
programs and various functions" and for operating PMC programmer
functions safety and so that such conditions are controllable with
sequence programs.
The programmer protect function can be set with the appropriate
setting parameter or keep relay data for PMC management software
(PMC-SB7: K900 to 919, PMC-SA1: K17 to 19).

- 298 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.3.6.2 Procedure
1 Check the setting parameters you want to make valid.

Fig. 9.3.6.2

2 To save the changes, click the <OK> buttons.

To cancel the changes, click the <Cancel> button.

9.3.6.3 Setting items

• HIDE PMC PROGRAM (PMC-SB7: K900.0, PMC-SA1: K17.0)

Not checked : Displays sequence programs.
Checked : Hides sequence programs.

• PROGRAMMER ENABLE (PMC-SB7: K900.1, PMC-SA1:

K17.1)
Not checked : Disables built-in programmer functions.
Checked : Enables built-in programmer functions.

• LADDER MANUAL START (PMC-SB7: K900.2, PMC-SA1:

K17.2)
Not checked : After the power is turned on, sequence programs
will be automatically executed.
Checked : Sequence programs will be executed with the
sequence program execution soft key.

• RAM WRITE ENABLE (PMC-SB7: K900.4, PMC-SA1: K17.4)

Not checked : Disables the forcing and overwrite functions.
Checked : Enables the forcing and overwrite functions.

- 299 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

• SIGNAL TRACE START (PMC-SB6: K900.5)

Not checked : The signal trace function starts tracing with the
trace execution button.
Checked : The signal trace function automatically starts
tracing after the power is turned on.

• SIGNAL ANALYSIS START (PMC-SB6: K900.6)

Not checked : The signal waveform display function starts
sampling with the execution button.
Checked : The signal waveform display function
automatically starts sampling after the power is
turned on.

• HIDE DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN (PMC-SB7: K900.7,

PMC-SA1: K17.7)
Not checked : Displays the PMC parameter data table control
screen.
Checked : Hides the PMC parameter data table control
screen.

• SIGNAL TRIGGER START (PMC-SB7: K901.2, PMC-SA1:

K18.8)
Not checked : The trigger stop function does not automatically
starts when the power is turned on.
Checked : The trigger stop function automatically starts
when the power is turned on.

• EDIT ENABLE (PMC-SB7: K901.6, PMC-SA1: K18.6)

Not checked : Disables sequence program editing.
Checked : Enables sequence program editing.

• WRITE TO F-ROM[EDIT] (PMC-SB7: K902.0, PMC-SA1:

K19.0)
Not checked : After a Ladder program is edited, the changes
will be automatically written to F-ROM.
Checked : After a Ladder program is edited, the changes
will not be automatically written to F-ROM.

• ALLOW PMC STOP (PMC-SB7: K902.2, PMC-SA1: K19.2)

Not checked : Disables the sequence program execution/
stopping operations.
Checked : Enables the sequence program execution/
stopping operations.

• HIDE PMC PARAM (PMC-SB7: K902.6, PMC-SA1: K19.6)

Not checked : Enables the display and external output of PMC
parameters.
Checked : Disables the display and external output of PMC
parameters.

- 300 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

• PROTECT PMC PARAM (PMC-SB7: K902.7, PMC-SA1:

K19.7)
Not checked : Enables the modification and reading of PMC
parameters.
Checked : Disables the modification and reading of PMC
parameters.

• IO GROUP SELECTION (PMC-SB7: K906.1)

Not checked : Hides the I/O link group selection screen.
Checked : Displays the I/O link group selection screen.

CAUTION
The [Display] button can be used if the following
conditions are satisfied:
• The selectable I/O link assignment screen on
the system parameter screen is enabled.
• IO GROUP SELECTION (K906.1=1) is checked
and PROGRAMMABLE ENABLE (K900.1=1) is
also checked.

9.3.6.4 Warning message

When you click the [Display] button to call the setting parameter
screen of the selectable I/O link assignment function, the following
warning screen appears first to warn you against the modification of
parameters.

Fig. 9.3.6.4

OK
Displays the selectable I/O link assignment function.

Cancel
Returns you to the SETTING screen for PMC setting parameters.

- 301 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

WARNING
If you modify these parameters inadvertently, the
I/O device configuration may not match the I/O
assignment data, possibly causing the machine to
perform an unexpected operation after the power is
turned on. These parameters are assumed to be
modified only by those operators who are familiar
with the operation of sequence programs and that
of the PMC. This setting screen must be protected
with the programmer protect function so that the
settings on the screen are not inadvertently
changed by regular operators after the machine
has been shipped to the field.

9.3.6.5 Setting screen of the selectable I/O link assignment function

On this setting screen, set the unique group of I/O devices to be
connected to each machine.

Fig. 9.3.6.5

Channel 1
Select the group to which the I/O link assignment data for
channel 1 is to be made valid.
Checked : The assignment data is valid.
Not checked : The assignment data is invalid.

- 302 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

Channel 2
Select the group to which the I/O link assignment data for
channel 2 is to be made valid.
Checked : The assignment data is valid.
Not checked : The assignment data is invalid.

NOTE
1 The basic groups that have been specified for each
"Basic Group Count" on the system parameter
screen will have their numbers displayed gray with
an asterisk mark (*) shown above them. These
groups are noneligible for this settings.
2 Channels for which the "selectable I/O link
assignment function" is disabled on the system
parameter screen are displayed gray. These
channels are noneligible for this setting.
3 When you click the [OK] button, the warning
message shown in Subjection 9.3.6.3 reappears.
To reflect the settings to the keep relays, click the
[OK] button below the warning message.

- 303 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.4 PMC ALARM STATUS

PMC alarm messages are displayed.

9.4.1 Procedure
1 Select [Diagnose] - [PMC Alarm Status]. The [PMC Alarm
Status] screen appears.

Fig. 9.4 (a)

• Multi-path PMC

The background color of

current path is light blue.

PMC Alarm messages are

not displayed because this
path is editing ladder
diagram on PMC side.

Fig. 9.4 (b)

NOTE
1 For details on PMC alarm messages, refer to the
ladder language programming manual.
2 You can switch the language in which PMC alarm
messages are displayed.
1) Select [Tool] - [Options].
2) Select a language from "PMC alarm language"
in Display tab.

- 304 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.4.2 Switching the Language in Which PMC Alarm Messages Are

Displayed
You can switch the language in which PMC alarm messages are
displayed.

1 Select [Tool] - [Options].

2 Select a language from "PMC alarm language".

Fig. 9.4.2

- 305 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.5 PMC STATUS

The PMC program status is displayed.

9.5.1 Procedure
1 Select [Diagnose] - [PMC Status]. The [PMC Status] screen
appears.

Model of the connected PMC

Series and edition of the PMC

Series and edition of the ladder

edit card or option card

Current scan time

Maximum scan time

Minimum scan time

Fig. 9.5 (a)

Š Multi-path PMC

The background color of

current path is light blue.

PMC status is not

displayed because this
path is editing ladder
diagram on PMC side.

Fig. 9.5 (b)

- 306 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.5.2 Display Items

• PMC type
Model of the connected PMC

• Series and edition: Control software

Series and edition of the PMC

• Series and edition: Ladder edit software (option board)

Series and edition of the ladder edit card or option card

• Scan time: Current

Current scan time

• Scan time: Maximum

Maximum scan time

• Scan time: Minimum

Minimum scan time

- 307 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.6 SIGNAL TRACING

Changes in arbitrary signals are displayed on the screen.

Signals are traced one or two bytes at a time. For one-byte tracing,
two addresses can be traced at the same time. Up to 512 items can be
displayed for one-byte tracing. For two-byte tracing, up to 256 items
can be displayed.

9.6.1 Procedure
1 Select [Diagnose] - [Trace].
The [Select Function] screen of the trace function appears.

Fig. 9.6.1 (a)

2 Select the [Signal Trace] radio button and click the <OK> button.
The [Signal Trace] screen appears.

Fig. 9.6.1 (b)

3 Click the <Parameter> button.

The [Signal Trace Parameter] screen appears.

<Parameter button>

- 308 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

4 Set data on the [Signal Trace Parameter] screen.

See Subsection 9.6.6, "[Signal Trace Parameter] Screen."

5 Click the <Start> button. The <Start> button enters the down
state, and signal tracing starts.

<Start button>

6 To terminate tracing, click the <Start> button again. The <Start>

button then enters the up state, and signal tracing terminates.

• Signal status indication

The signal is off.
The signal is on.

• Mask bit name indication

The numbers of the bits to be detected are indicated with
bold characters.
The numbers of the bits not to be detected are indicated
with grayed characters.
Example: When the signals on bits 4 to 7 are detected, and
bits 0 to 3 are masked
R9028
76543210

9.6.2 Toolbar

<1> <2> <3> <4> <5>

Fig. 9.6.2

<1> Parameter

<2> Start and stop of tracing

<3> Symbol indication

<4> Number search

<5> Combo box for inputting the character string for number search

9.6.3 Status Bar

<1> <2>
Fig. 9.6.3

<1> Status
[Tracing Exec] or [Trace Stop] is displayed.

<2> Elapsed time

- 309 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.6.4 Context Menu

Fig. 9.6.4

9.6.5 Shortcut Keys

Table 9.6.5
Shortcut key Corresponding function
[F3] Number search
[F4] Displays the [Parameter] screen.
[F5] Starts and stops tracing.
[Ctrl]+[F] Number search
[Ctrl]+[Home] Displays data from the beginning.
[Ctrl]+[End] Displays data from the end.

9.6.6 [Signal Trace Parameter] Screen

Fig. 9.6.6

Mode
Signal data length (in bytes)

Address Type
PMC address or physical address

Address
Address for signal tracing of a specified address type

- 310 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

Mask Bit
Specify the bits of the signals that need not be traced.
(The buttons of the signals to be traced are in the down state.)

The parameter settings become valid when the execution of signal

tracing is selected.

NOTE
1 While the signal analysis function is being used,
the signal trace function cannot be used.
2 During online monitoring, the PMC signal trace
screen cannot be displayed.

CAUTION
When the address type is physical address,
starting tracing with an illegal memory address
specified may result in a system error. To specify a
valid physical address, the user needs to be
familiar with PMC programming in C language.
Refer to the " C language Programming Manual"
(B-61863E-1), and specify a valid memory address.

9.6.7 Automatic Trace Function at Power-On

If trace parameters are set, and [Signal Trace Start] is selected on the
[Set Up] screen for PMC parameters, tracing will start automatically
when the power to the CNC is turned on.

- 311 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.7 SIGNAL ANALYSIS

The ladder signal status is sampled and displayed along with the time
axis. Trigger conditions can also be set.

9.7.1 Procedure
1 Select [Diagnose] - [Trace].
The [Select Function] screen of the trace function appears.

Fig. 9.7.1 (a)

2 Select the [Signal Analysis] radio button and click the <OK>
button.
The [Signal Analysis] screen appears.

Fig. 9.7.1 (b)

3 Click the <Parameter> button.

The [Signal Analysis Parameter] screen appears.

<Parameter button>

4 Set data on the [Signal Analysis Parameters] screen.

See Subsection 9.7.6, [Signal Analysis Parameter] screen.

- 312 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

5 Click the <Sampling> button. The <Sampling> button then

enters the down state, and sampling starts.

<Sampling button>
6 To terminate sampling, click the <Sampling> button again. The
button enters the up state, and sampling terminates.
• Maximum number of signals sampled simultaneously: 16
• Sampling interval: 8 or 4 msec
• Maximum sampling period:
10 sec (when the sampling interval is set to 8 msec)
5 sec (when the sampling interval is set to 4 msec)

9.7.2 Toolbar

<1><2><3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8> <9>

Fig. 9.7.2
<1> Parameter

<2> Start and stop of sampling

NOTE
1 While the signal analysis function is being
executed, the signal trace function cannot be used.
If the <Sampling> button is clicked during signal
tracing, a message box appears, indicating "Signal
Trace function is running."
2 When the automatic signal read function is
executed at power-on, the displayed button is in
the down state, which indicates that sampling is in
progress.

<3> Open File

Reads a signal analysis data file, and then displays waveforms.
The extension of signal analysis data files is SAN.

<4> Save As
Saves signal analysis data in a file with a file name specified
(extension: SAN).

<5> Grid line on/off

Specifies whether to display grid lines.
When no grid line is displayed, the button is in the up state; when
grid lines are displayed, the button is in the down state.
The color and line style of grid lines are set from the context
menu which is displayed by right-clicking a displayed grid line.

- 313 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

<6> Symbol on/off

Sets the display format of the trigger and sampling addresses.
When the symbol format is selected, the button is in the down
state; when the address format is selected, the button is in the up
state.

<7> Search
Moves through the signal analysis area with a specified search
time.

<8> Text box for inputting the character string for which a search is
to be made
Specifies the search time.

<9> Search character string increase/decrease button

Increases or decreases the search time in grid setting time units.

9.7.3 Status Bar

<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7>

Fig. 9.7.3

<1> to <6> are displayed when sampling terminates.

During sampling, [Executing] is indicated.

<1> Sampling time

<2> Condition

<3> Trigger mode

<4> Trigger address

<5> Sampling start time

<6> Sampling end time

<7> The current mouse position is indicated as the time (msec) on the
signal analysis display.

9.7.4 Context Menu

Fig. 9.7.4

- 314 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.7.5 Shortcut Keys

Table 9.7.5
Shortcut key Corresponding function
[F3] Sampling time search
[F4] Displays the [Parameters] screen.
[F5] Starts and stops sampling.
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[O] Opens an existing signal analysis file.
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[A] Saves data with a name.
[Ctrl]+[G] Displays/does not display grid lines.
[Ctrl]+[R] Sets the grid line format.
[Ctrl]+[W] Sets the signal waveform format.
[Ctrl]+[Home] Scrolls to the beginning of the signal analysis display.
[Ctrl]+[End] Scrolls to the end of the signal analysis display.
PageUp Scrolls the signal analysis display up by 1/2 page.
PageDown Scrolls the signal analysis display down by 1/2 page.
[↑] Scrolls the signal analysis display up by one line.
[↓] Scrolls the signal analysis display down by one line.
[→] Scrolls to the right by one sampling interval (8 or 4 msec).
[←] Scrolls to the left by one sampling interval (8 or 4 msec).
[Home] Scrolls to the beginning of the line.
[End] Scrolls to the end of the line.

9.7.6 [Signal Analysis Parameter] Screen

Fig. 9.7.6

- 315 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

Sampling Time
Set the maximum sampling time.
When the sampling interval is 8 msec, set 1 to 10 sec (in 0.1-sec
increments).
When the sampling interval is 4 msec, set 1 to 5 sec (in 0.1-sec
increments).

Trigger Address
Set the trigger bit address at which sampling starts, with a PMC
address or symbol.

Condition
Condition for starting sampling
Start: Sampling start button on the toolbar
Trigger-ON: Sampling start button + rising edge at the trigger
address
Trigger-OFF: Sampling start button + falling edge at the trigger
address

NOTE
When Trigger-ON or Trigger-OFF is selected with
no trigger address set, a message box appears,
indicating "No Trigger Address."

Trigger Mode
There is a buffer for holding data sampled for up to 10 seconds
when the signal status is read at 8-msec intervals. (When the
signal status is read at 4-ms intervals, the buffer can hold data
sampled over five seconds.)
In trigger mode, the read start and end points are specified.
After: The signal status after the trigger address meets the
trigger condition is read until the sampling time elapses.
About: The signal status around the time at which the trigger
address satisfies the trigger condition is read within the
sampling time.
Before: The signal status from when the <Sampling> button on
the tool bar is pressed until the trigger address satisfies
the trigger condition is read for up to the sampling time.
Only: The signal status when the trigger address satisfies the
trigger condition is read.

NOTE
When About or Before is selected with the
condition set to Start, a message box appears,
indicating "[About]/[Before] is illegal on [Start]
selected."

Signal Address
Set up to 16 sampling addresses with PMC addresses or symbols.

- 316 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

To reset the settings to the default values, click the <RESET> button.
Table 9.7.6
Default
Sampling Time 10 sec
Trigger Address Not set
Condition Start
Trigger Mode After
Signal Address Not set

Once the settings are complete (the <OK> button is pressed), the
trigger address and diagnosis address setting information is stored in
the Windows registry on the disk. When the dialog box is next opened,
the registry is read, and the previously made settings are restored in
the list of the combo box.

9.7.7 [Signal Analysis Format] Screen

When [Signal Analysis Format] is selected from the context menu, the
[Signal Analysis Format] screen appears.

Fig. 9.7.7

Line Color

Fill Color
Choose from the following 16 colors:
Black, blue, light blue, light green, pink, red, yellow, white, dark
blue, peacock blue, green, purple, dark red, dark yellow, 50%
gray, 25% gray

Line Size
1 dot, 2 dots, or 3 dots

To reset the settings to the defaults, click the <RESET> button.

Table 9.7.7
Default
Line Color Blue
Fill Color White
Line Size 3 dots

- 317 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.7.8 [Gridline Format] Screen

When [Gridline Format] is selected from the context menu, the
[Gridline Format] screen appears.

Fig. 9.7.8

Line Color
Choose from the following 16 colors:
Black, blue, light blue, light green, pink, red, yellow, white, dark
blue, peacock blue, green, purple, dark red, dark yellow, 50%
gray, 25% gray

Line Style
Solid line, dotted line, or broken line

Scale
When the sampling interval is 8 msec:
8 msec, 16 msec, or 32 msec
When the sampling interval is 4 msec:
4 msec, 8 msec, or 16 msec
When the trigger mode is ONLY:
1 time, 2 times or 4 times

To reset the settings to the defaults, click the <RESET> button.

Table 9.7.8
Default
Line Color 50% gray
Line Style Solid line
Scale 8 msec (4 msec, 1 times)

9.7.9 Automatic Signal Sampling Function at Power-On

If sampling parameters are set, then [Signal Analysis Start] is checked
on the [Set Up] screen for PMC parameters, sampling will start
automatically when the power to the CNC is turned on.

- 318 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.8 CLEARING PMC AREAS

Addresses G, Y, N, A, R, and S can be cleared.

9.8.1 Procedure
1 Select [Tool] - [Clear PMC Memory].
The [Clear PMC memory] screen appears.

Fig. 9.8.1

2 To clear the PMC area, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the clear operation, click the <Cancel> button.

WARNING
When PMC areas are cleared, special care must
be taken.
Clearing a PMC area may cause unpredictable
machine operation. When there are people near
the machine, this function should not be used.

- 319 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.9 ACTIVATING THE I/O LINK

9.9.1 Procedure
1 Select the [Tool] - [I/O Link Restart].
The [I/O Link Restart] screen appears.

Fig. 9.9.1

2 To activate the I/O Link, click the <OK> button.

To cancel the activation of the I/O Link, click the <Cancel>
button.

WARNING
When the I/O Link is activated, special care must
be taken.
Setting I/O module data may cause unpredictable
machine operation. When there are people near
the machine, this function should not be used.

- 320 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.10 SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION

For the PMC-SB7 and 30i/31i/32i-A PMC, the screen specifications

of the signal trace function and signal analysis function of the
PMC-SA5/SB5/SB6 are integrated to improve operability and
functionality.

9.10.1 Procedure
1 Select [Diagnose] - [Trace].
The [Signal Trace] screen appears.

Fig. 9.10.1

2 Click the <Parameter> button.

The [Trace Parameter Setting] screen appears.

<Parameter> button

3 On the [Trace Parameter Setting] screen, set data.

See Subsection 9.10.4, "Setting Trace Parameters," for details.

4 Click the <Start> button. The button enters the down state, and
signal tracing starts.

<Start> button

5 To terminate tracing, click the <Start> button again. The button

enters the up state, and signal tracing terminates.

9.10.2 Toolbar

<1><2><3><4><5><6><7><8><9> <10> <11><12><13><14>

Fig. 9.10.2

<1> Trace parameter setting button

Displays the [Trace Parameter Setting] dialog box.

- 321 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

<2> Trace start button

Starts or stops tracing.
When this button is in the up state, tracing is stopped.
When the button is in the down state, tracing is executed.
* When the trace function is being executed, the <Trace start>
button is in the down state.
<3> Symbol on/off button
Sets the display format of the trigger and sampling addresses.
When the symbol format is selected, the button is in the down
state; when the address format is selected, the button is in the up
state.
<4> Marking button
Marks the cursor position at that time and displays the mark
cursor. When the mark cursor and current position cursor overlap
one another, the current position cursor is displayed. At the
bottom of the screen, [Mark position], the mark cursor position,
and [Range], the range from the mark cursor position to the
current position cursor, are displayed.
<5><6> Zoom button
Magnifies or reduces graphs.
<7> Grid line button
Specifies whether to display grid lines.
<8><9> Up-and-down replacement button
Clicking the [UP] button replaces the trace result at the address
cursor with the line immediately above.
Similarly, clicking the [DOWN] button replaces the trace result
with the line immediately below.
The display after replacement is held until the next execution of
tracing.
<10>Search button
Searches the trace display area for the specified time or frame
number.
<11>First trace result button
Moves the cursor at the beginning of the trace result.
<12>Previous trace result button
Scrolls the trace result display up by one page.
<13>Next trace result button
Scrolls the trace result display down by one page.
<14>Last trace result button
Moves the cursor at the end of the trace result.

9.10.3 Status Bar

<1> <2> <3> <4> <5>

Fig. 9.10.3

<1> Sampling mode

The current selected sampling mode is indicated.
<2> Resolution
The current resolution setting is indicated.

- 322 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

<3> Frame
The current setting of the number of sampling frames is
indicated.
<4> Trigger address
The current setting of the sampling stop trigger address is
indicated.
<5> Sampling trigger address
The current setting of the sampling trigger address is indicated.

9.10.4 Setting Trace Parameters

Clicking the <Parameter> button displays the [Trace Parameter
Setting] dialog box.

Fig. 9.10.4

Sampling
Set the sampling mode by clicking the corresponding radio
button.
Time Cycle : Samples data in cycles.
Signal Transition : Samples signal transition.

Stop Condition
Set a tracing stop condition by selecting it from the list in the
combo box.
None : Does not stop automatically.
BUFFER FULL : Automatically stops when the sampling buffer
becomes full.
TRIGGER : Automatically stops at a trigger.

Trigger Address
This item can be set when the tracing stop condition is
[TRIGGER]. Set the trigger address at which tracing stops.

- 323 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

Trigger Mode
This item can be set when the tracing stop condition is
[TRIGGER]. Set the trigger mode for stopping tracing.
RISING EDGE : Automatically stops at the rising edge of the
trigger signal.
FALLING EDGE : Automatically stops at the falling edge of the
trigger signal.
BOTH EDGE : Automatically stops when the trigger signal
status changes.

Sampling Condition
This item can be set when the sampling mode is [Signal
Transition]. Set the sampling condition.
TRIGGER : Samples data when the sampling trigger
condition is satisfied.
BOTH EDGE : Samples data when the sampling address signal
changes.

Sampling Trigger Address

This item can be set when the sampling mode is [Signal
Transition] and the sampling condition is [TRIGGER]. Set the
address at which sampling is to be triggered.

Sampling Trigger Mode

This item can be set when the sampling mode is [Signal
Transition] and the sampling condition is [TRIGGER]. Set the
trigger condition mode.
RISING EDGE : Samples data at the rising edge of the trigger
signal.
FALLING EDGE : Samples data at the falling edge of the
trigger signal.
BOTH EDGE : Samples data when the trigger signal status
changes.
ON : Samples data when the trigger signal is on.
OFF : Samples data when the trigger signal is off.

Initialization button
Initializes the trace parameters in the PMC.

New Parameter button

Obtains the current PMC trace parameters.

Details button
Displays the [Trace Mode Details Parameter] dialog box.

OK
Stores the settings and closes the dialog box.

Cancel
Closes the dialog box without storing the settings.

- 324 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

9.10.5 Setting Details of Trace Mode

Clicking the <Details> button displays the [Trace Mode Details
Parameter] dialog box.

Fig. 9.10.5 (a)

Resolution
Sets the sampling resolution. The default value is 8 msec.
Setting range : 8msec to 1000msec
The input value is rounded down to the nearest multiple of 8.

Frame
This item is displayed when [Signal Transition] is selected for
the sampling mode. Set the number of samplings.
The valid data range of this item varies depending on the setting
of [Resolution] and the number of signals to be sampled. The
valid data range is displayed in the dialog box.

Fig. 9.10.5 (b)

Time
This item is displayed when [Time Cycle] is selected for the
sampling mode. Set the sampling time. The valid data range of
this item varies depending on the setting of [Resolution] and the
number of signals to be sampled. The valid data range is
displayed in the dialog box.

- 325 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

Stop Trigger Position

This item is displayed when the tracing stop condition is
[TRIGGER]. Specify where the time at which the stop trigger
condition is satisfied is placed during the entire sampling time (or
count) with the ratio of the time to the sampling time (or count).
Set the ratio according to the purpose. For example, to check the
signal changes before the trigger condition is satisfied, set a large
value; to check the signal changes after the trigger condition is
satisfied, set a small value.

Example
Graph display range when the sampling time is 10 sec and the
sampling position is 10%:
Trigger position
<-1 sec-> <---- 9 sec ---->
| | |
-1 0 9 (SEC)

OK
Stores the settings and closes the dialog box.

Cancel
Closes the dialog box without storing the settings.

9.10.6 Setting Trace Parameters (Sampling Addresses)

In the [Trace Parameter Setting] dialog box, clicking the [Sampling
Adr] tab displays the Sampling address setting screen.

Fig. 9.10.6

- 326 -
B-63484EN/05 9.DIAGNOSIS

Edit Box of Address Setting

Enter the address or symbol of a signal to be sampled in the edit
box and click the <Append Address> button. The address or
symbol is added to the list box. Set a signal address with a bit
address. If a byte address is entered, the address indicated by bits
0 to 7 of the entered address is input. Up to 32 signal addresses
can be set.

Sampling Address List

When the trace sampling mode is [Signal Transition] and the
sampling condition is [ANY CHANGE], you can specify
whether to use each set address as a sampling trigger signal.
Check the check box corresponding to a desired signal to use the
signal as a sampling trigger signal.

Append Address button

Adds the new sampling address entered in the edit box.

Change Address button

Replaces the set address or symbol at the cursor with the contents
of the edit box.

Delete Address button

Deletes the set address or symbol at the cursor from the list box.

All Delete button

Deletes all sampling addresses set in the list box.

↑ button
Replaces the set address at the cursor with the address on the line
immediately above.

↓ button
Replaces the set address at the cursor with the address on the line
immediately below.

OK
Stores the settings and closes the dialog box.

Cancel
Closes the dialog box without storing the settings.

- 327 -
9.DIAGNOSIS B-63484EN/05

9.10.7 Context Menu

Fig. 9.10.7

9.10.8 Shortcut Keys

Table 9.10.8
Shortcut key Function
[F1] Help
[F3] Searches for the time or frame.
[F4] Displays the [Parameter] screen.
[F5] Starts or stops tracing.
[F7] Displays symbols.
[F8] Marking
[Shift]+[F4] Zoom-in
[Shift]+[F5] Zoom-out
[Shift]+[F6] Moves the signal address up.
[Shift]+[F7] Moves the signal address down.
[Ctrl]+[Home] Moves to the beginning of the trace result.
[Ctrl]+[End] Moves to the end of the trace result.
PageUp Scrolls the signal address display up.
PageDown Scrolls the signal address display down.
Ctrl + PageUp Displays the trace result on the previous page.
Ctrl + PageDown Displays the trace result on the next page.
Ctrl + G Displays or does not display grid lines.
[↑] Moves the address cursor one line up.
[↓] Moves the address cursor one line down.
[→] Moves the current position cursor right.
[←] Moves the current position cursor left.
[Home] Moves the address cursor to the start address.
[End] Moves the address cursor to the end address.

9.10.9 Automatic Sampling Function at Power-On

By setting a PMC parameter, tracing can automatically be started at
power-on. This setting can be made on the [Set Up] screen for PMC
parameters.

Trace function start = 0 (0: Manual 1: Automatic)

- 328 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10 EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT
FUNCTION
The extended symbol/comment function allows you to use the
following features.
• Increase in the symbol/comment character count
• Ladder edit by using symbol.
• Symbol effective in each sub-program
• Symbol type setting
• Automatic assignment function for R,D,E address.

Fig. 10

How to hide the [Program List] screen.

Check [View(V)] - [Program List(P)].

How to confirm the type of ladder program which is being edited.

Check [View(V)] - [Status Bar(P)].
PMC type is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
Display of right lower
Type
corner
Extended function is available to 1st path PMC
30i-A PMC (EXT)
for 30i-A
Extended function is available to 2nd path
30i-A PMC(2ND) (EXT)
PMC for 30i-A
Extended function is available to 3rd path PMC
30i-A PMC(3RD) (EXT)
for 30i-A
Extended function is available to dual check
30i-A PMC(DCS) (EXT)
safety PMC for 30i-A
(EXT) means extended function

- 329 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.1 ABOUT SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA

Names and comments can be assigned to the I/O signals, internal

relays and subprogram used in ladder programs.

Symbol
Fig. 10.1 (a)
Extended type Former
Kind
(30i/31i/32i-A Extended function) (30i/31i/32i-A)
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, Space,
Usable characters !”#&’()*+,-<= >?@[/]^_`{|}~ !”#$%&’()*+,.-<=>?
(Note) @[/]^_`{|}~;:
Unusable characters for the first
%$
character
Space, Full-size Japanese character,
Unusable characters
:(Colon) ;(Semicolon) .(Period)
Maximum number of characters 40 16
Maximum number of units that can
40,000 40,000
be registered

NOTE
Although it is allowed to use special characters in
symbol, using only alphabets, digits and
_(underscore) to comply with the variable name
defined in IEC61131-3 is strongly recommended.

Comment
Fig. 10.1 (b)
Extended type Former
Kind
(30i/31i/32i-A Extended function) (30i/31i/32i-A)
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9,
Space Space
Usable characters !"#$%&'()*+,-<=>?@[\]^_` !"# $%&'()*+,-<=>?@[\]^_`
{|}~ {|}~
:(Colon) ;(Semicolon) .(Period) :(Colon) ;(Semicolon) .(Period)
Unusable characters Tab Tab
Maximum number of 255 (Full-size Japanese character is 30 (Full-size Japanese character is
characters counted as two.) counted as two.)
Maximum number of units
40,000 40,000
that can be registered
4 (Comment 1, Comment 2, Comment 3,
Set number 2 (Comment 1, Comment 2)
Comment 4)

- 330 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.1.1 Relation between the Global Symbol and the Local Symbol
The relation between the global symbol and the local symbol is
described below.

Fig. 10.1.1 (a)

Comparison
Prog.
Effective range Non-Extended Extended
Attribute
function function
Available Available
1. Global Symbol can be used in all subprograms
All symbols are global
Symbol can be used only in one associated Available
2. Local subprogram among LEVEL1, LEVEL2, LEVEL3, Not available
and P1 to Pn

As the scope of symbol is limited if the local attribute is specified,

same symbol names can be defined and used in different modules
without conflicts. The allowed combinations of symbol and associated
address are checked as follows.

(a) The symbol is the same and the address is different.

Fig. 10.1.1 (b)

Case Conditions Example Result
Global symbol is the same and the address is ABC R0 ; Global symbol
a.1 (X)
different ABC R2 ; Global symbol
Global symbol is the same as local symbol and ABC R0 ; Global symbol
a.2 (X)
the address is different ABC R2 ; Local symbol(P1)
Local symbol is the same as other local symbol ABC R0 ; Local symbol(P1)
a.3 (O)
and the address is different ABC R2 ; Local symbol(P2)
Symbol is the same within local symbol and the ABC R0 ; Local symbol(P1)
a.4 (X)
address is different ABC R2 ; Local symbol(P1)
(O): The definition is allowed. (X): The definition is not allowed.

(b) The symbol is different and the address is the same.

Fig. 10.1.1 (c)

Case Conditions Example Result
Global symbol is different and the address is ABC R2 ; Global symbol
b.1 (O)
the same ABCD R2 ; Global symbol (Note)
Global symbol is different to local symbol and ABC R2 ; Global symbol
b.2 (O)
the address is the same ABCD R2 ; Local symbol(P1) (Note)
Local symbol is different to other local symbol ABC R2 ; Local symbol(P1)
b.3 (O)
and the address is the same ABCD R2 ; Local symbol(P2)
Symbol is different within local symbol and the ABC R2 ; Local symbol(P1)
b.4 (O)
address is the same ABCD R2 ; Local symbol(P1) (Note)

NOTE
When you decompile the ladder object, it does not
get back to the original symbol.

- 331 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

(c) The symbol is the same and the address is the same.

Fig. 10.1.1 (d)

Case Conditions Example Result
Global symbol is the same and the address is ABC R2 ; Global symbol
c.1 (X)
the same ABC R2 ; Global symbol
Global symbol is the same as local symbol and ABC R2 ; Global symbol
c.2 (X)
the address is the same ABC R2 ; Local symbol(P1)
Local symbol is the same as other local symbol ABC R2 ; Local symbol(P1)
c.3 (O)
and the address is the same ABC R2 ; Local symbol(P2)
Symbol is the same within local symbol and the ABC R2 ; Local symbol(P1)
c.4 (X)
address is the same ABC R2 ; Local symbol(P1)

(d) The symbol is different and the address is different.

Fig. 10.1.1 (e)

Case Conditions Example Result
Global symbol is different and the address is ABC R0 ; Global symbol
d.1 (O)
different ABCD R2 ; Global symbol
Global symbol is different to local symbol and ABC R0 ; Global symbol
d.2 (O)
the address is different ABCD R2 ; Local symbol(P1)
Local symbol is different to other local symbol ABC R0 ; Local symbol(P1)
d.3 (O)
and the address is different ABCD R2 ; Local symbol(P2)
Symbol is different within local symbol and the ABC R0 ; Local symbol(P1)
d.4 (O)
address is different ABCD R2 ; Local symbol(P1)

(e) The symbol for L address.

L address can be used at the functional instruction JMPB, JMPC,
and LBL. The scope of symbols for L address is checked
differently with other symbols as below.

Fig. 10.1.1 (f)

Functional instruction Note
JMPB Global symbol and local symbol can be used.
JMPC Global symbol can be used. Local symbol cannot be used.
LBL Global symbol and local symbol can be used.

The relation between the global symbol and the local symbol is
the same as the above-mentioned description (from a) to d)).

Fig. 10.1.1 (g)

Case Conditions Example Result
e.1 Global symbol is the same ABC L1 ; Global symbol
(X)
ABC L2 ; Global symbol
e.2 Global symbol is the same as local symbol ABC L1 ; Global symbol
(X)
ABC L2 ; Local symbol(P1)
e.3 Local symbol is the same as other local symbol ABC L1 ; Local symbol(P1)
(O)
ABC L2 ; Local symbol(P2)
e.3-1 Local symbol is the same as other local symbol ABC L1 ; Local symbol(P1)
(O)
and the address is the same ABC L1 ; Local symbol(P2)
e.4 Symbol is the same within local symbol ABC L1 ; Local symbol(P1)
(X)
ABC L2 ; Local symbol(P1)

- 332 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

Case Conditions Example Result

e.5 Global symbol is different and address is the ABC L1 ; Global symbol
(O)
same. ABCD L1 ; Global symbol
e.6 Global symbol is different to local symbol and ABC L1 ; Global symbol
(O)
address is the same. ABCD L1 ; Local symbol(P1)
e.7 Local symbol is different to other local symbol ABC L1 ; Local symbol(P1)
(O)
and address is the same. ABCD L1 ; Local symbol(P2)
e.8 Symbol is different within local symbol and ABC L1 ; Local symbol(P1)
(O)
address is the same. ABCD L1 ; Local symbol(P1)

(f) The symbol for P address.

P address can only be used as global and cannot be used as local
address. The scope of symbols for P address is checked
differently with other symbols as below.

Fig. 10.1.1 (h)

Case Conditions Example Result
f.1 Global symbol is the same ABC P1 ; Global symbol
(X)
ABC P2 ; Global symbol
f.2 Global symbol is different and address is the ABC P1 ; Global symbol
(O)
same. ABCD P1 ; Global symbol
f.3 Global symbol is different and address is ABC P1 ; Global symbol
(O)
different. ABCD P2 ; Global symbol

NOTE
1 When you decompile the ladder object code
containing the references to the symbols with the
same address, such references may not get back to
the symbol in the original source program. The
symbol name may be changed to one of the symbols
selected by decompiler.
2 When multiple symbols are defined for the same
address, only one symbol selected by the system is
displayed in the address display of the signal status
screen etc. on PMC. Other symbols are not displayed.

10.1.2 About the Symbol Type

Type can be set to the symbol.
BOOL: Set to the symbol which is used as basic instructions.
BYTE, WORD, DWORD: Set to the symbol which is used as
parameters for function instructions.

10.1.3 About the Distinction of Symbol and Address

In case that a symbol R10 is defined, "R10" is interpreted as R10 of
symbol. If you want to enter address R10 explicitly, "%R10" is to be
input. "% + address" should be used when you want to input it
specifically in the address. Without the definition of the symbol R10,
you do not need to input with %. In case of the mnemonic file of
extended function, it is always necessary to add % to the address
- 333 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.2 EDITING SYMBOL AND COMMENT

• It is possible to display and edit Symbol and comment.

• It is possible to display the list of the registered symbol.
• It is possible to add, delete, change and search symbol.
• It is possible to create NULL symbol (only comment is defined
to address without symbol)

Procedure
1 Double-click the <Symbol comment> item on the [Program List]
screen.
The [SYMBOL/COMMENT] screen appears.
Tool bar It rearranges by click.

Display
selection Symbol comment display window
window

Status bar

Fig. 10.2

10.2.1 Toolbar

(1) (2)
Fig. 10.2.1

(1) <Add New Data> button

The [New Data] screen appears.
(2) <Search> button
The [Search] screen appears.

- 334 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.2.2 Context Menu

Right-click the [Display selection window] screen. The following
context menu appears.

Fig. 10.2.2 (a)

Add Data... Display [Add Data] screen

Symbol Display the symbol which is set in P address of sub program
Delete Delete all symbols of [Symbol/comment display window]
Find... Find [Symbol/comment display window]

Right-click the [Symbol comment display window]. The following

context menu appears.

Fig. 10.2.2 (b)

Cut Move selected data to the clipboard

Copy Copy selected data to the clipboard
Paste Copy from the clipboard additionally
Add Data... Display [Add Data] screen
Delete Delete all symbols of [Symbol/comment display window]
Find... Find [Symbol/comment display window]
Address Decide the address that is automatically assigned.
decision Decide the assigned address to delete the * mark which
places in the top of the address.

- 335 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.2.3 Add New Symbol and Comment

Procedure
1 Click <Add New Data> button on toolbar.

Fig. 10.2.3

2 Set the data

- PROG. Global symbol and local symbol are specified
Global symbol : Nothing is input
Local symbol : LEVEL1, LEVEL2, %P1 etc is input
- SYMBOL Input symbol
- ADDRESS Input address
- TYPE Input. symbol type
Basic instruction : Select BOOL
Functional instruction: Select BYTE,WORD,DWORD
Subprogram(P address) : Select PROG
Label(L address) : Select LABEL
- 1st Comment Input comment
- 2nd Comment
- 3rd Comment
- 4th Comment
It is necessary to input Symbol and type to register the symbol.

3 Click <Add> button to register the input data.

Click <Close> or <Cancel> button to cancel registration.

- 336 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

CAUTION
1 Same symbol data can not be registered. As error
message is displayed when adding new data,
register another symbol, please.
2 More than one symbol can be set for one address.
In this case, the original symbol data may not be
restored by decompilation. It is confirmed to check
[Multiple use check of the symbol address] of
compile option.
3 Symbol set to P address always becomes a global
symbol.

10.2.4 Modifying Symbol and Comment Data

Procedure
1 Double-click the symbol that you want to modify. (Or position
the cursor to the symbol and press [Enter] key.) Following
dialog will appear.

Fig. 10.2.4

2 Modifying the symbol or comment.

<Add> Add the symbol and comment. Click to add a registered
symbol as another new symbol.
<Modify> Modify the symbol and comment. Click to change the
symbol and comment.
<Cancel> Click to stop registration of the symbol.

- 337 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.2.5 Cut, Copy and Paste of Symbol or Comment Data

Plural symbol and comment data can be selected and cut, copy and
paste operation is available to them.

Procedure
1 Select the symbol to modify or copy.
To select plural symbol and comment data, click the
symbol/Comment data with pressing [Ctrl] key.
2 Click the [Cut] or [Copy] of context menu which is displayed by
right-clicking the symbol and comment data selected above.
These cut or copied data are able to paste to test editor.
3 To add new symbols from cut or copied data, click the [Paste] of
context menu which is displayed by right-clicking the symbol
and comment data.
4 When the pasted symbol is already registered (Duplicate symbol
has been detected), [Overlap with registered symbol] dialog will
appears. Please modify symbol data and click <OK> button.

10.2.6 Deleting Symbol and Comment Data

Deleting symbol and comment data.

Procedure
1 Select the symbol to delete.
2 Click the [Delete] of context menu that is displayed by
right-clicking the symbol selected above.
3 Confirm message will appear. Click the <OK> button to delete.

- 338 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.2.7 Search
Search the symbol and comment data by No., symbol, address and
comment. It is ignored whether the strings are specified in upper case
or lower case.

symbol Search same symbol

address Search same address
comment Search the comment which include the specified strings.

Fig. 10.2.7

Procedure
1 Input character string to search into [Search data].
2 Select the item to search by [SearchField]
3 Click <OK> button to start search.

NOTE
1 Even if the symbol data is modified or deleted in
symbol/comment editing screen, the modification of
symbol does not influence to the ladder program.
Therefore, the symbol in ladder program must be
modified too.
2 Modifying the address of symbol in
symbol/comment editing screen does influence to
the ladder program. Address of the symbol in
ladder program is changed. When the data is made
by inputting address in ladder editing screen and
then the symbol is defined in symbol/comment
editing screen, address of the symbol is not
changed by above operation. This note is not
applicable to the data which was once
de-compiled.
3 Please avoid using the symbol that has same
notation of PMC address.
4 The search by address in ladder program is
unavailable when the symbol is modified or deleted
in symbol/comment editing screen.

- 339 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.3 EDITING LADDER DIAGRAMS

NOTE
1 For editing the extended ladder program, ladder
editor does not support the interface of two pains;
“Display Window” and “Edit Window”.
2 Extended ladder program does not support Step
Sequence.

10.3.1 How to View whole Program

Procedure
1 Double-click [Ladder] node in [Program List] screen to open
[Ladder] window.
2 Whole ladder program appears in window. It is shown as View
mode; you can not edit it in this window.

10.3.2 How to Display and Modify Ladder Program

Double-click a sub-program in [Program List] screen to open its
ladder diagram.

Fig. 10.3.2

- 340 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

Table 10.3.2
Address display format Information to be displayed
Address Upper: Address is displayed.
In cases below, its symbol appears instead:
• Symbol is defined, but its address is not assigned yet.
• Corresponding symbol is not defined (undefined symbol)
Symbol Upper: Symbol is displayed.
In cases below, its address appears instead:
• No symbol is defined for the address.
• Case of NULL symbol.
Comment Upper: Comment is displayed.
In cases below, its address appears instead:
• No symbol is defined for the address.
• The symbol of the address has no comment.
In cases below, its symbol appears instead:
• Symbol is defined, but its address is not assigned yet.
• Corresponding symbol is not defined (undefined symbol)
Address & Symbol Upper: Address is displayed.
Lower: Symbol is displayed.
Address & Comment Upper: Address is displayed.
Lower: Comment is displayed.
Symbol & Comment Upper: Symbol is displayed.
Lower: Comment is displayed.
Upper: 8 characters at maximum
Lower: 16 characters at maximum
You can customize the color of Symbol, Address, and Comment at
[Ladder] tab of [Option] window.

10.3.3 How to Create Ladder Program

Enter an address or a symbol that is already defined.
If an undefined symbol is entered, [New Registration] screen of
symbol appears; the symbol will be defined and entered at once.

[Property] screen shows the detail of an address or a symbol in ladder

diagrams.
You can modify the comment and so on.

Procedure
1 Move cursor onto the symbol or address whose information you
want to change.
2 Click [Property] in the context menu, which pops up at
right-click.
3 [Property] screen appears.

- 341 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

Fig. 10.3.3

NOTE
1 When the symbol is used in multiple parts of
ladder, please do not change the symbol name by
pushing <Modify> button. In this case, please add
the symbol by pushing <Add> button. Otherwise,
you may see unexpected side effect of the change,
such as undefined symbol.
2 If you want to change the symbol of the ladder
program, please use Search/Replace function.

10.3.4 Tool Tip

When you move cursor onto a basic instruction or a parameter of a
functional instruction, related symbol, address, and comment are
displayed.

Fig. 10.3.4

Procedure
1 Click [Option] in [Tool] menu.
2 Click [Ladder] tab in [Option] window.
3 Check Tool tip.

In cases below, tool tip will not appear:

• Symbol is not defined (undefined symbol)
• Symbol is defined, but its address is not assigned yet.

- 342 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.3.5 Comment of Contact and Coil

You can select the comments to be displayed with associated contacts
and coils.

Comment for contact Comment for coil

Fig. 10.3.5

Procedure
1 Click [Option] in [Tool] menu.
2 Click [Ladder] tab in [Option] window.
3 Choose comment in the list-boxes Show comment of Contact
and Show comment of Coil.

10.3.6 How to Change Symbol or Address

You can choose one of following ways to change address or symbol in
ladder diagram:
1. Search the address, and change them one Search function
by one.
2. Collect the appearance of the address, and Search function
change them one by one. Collective Display function
3. Use Replace function to change them at Replace function
once.

10.3.6.1 Search Function

You can find a symbol, address, or functional instruction in the ladder
diagram.

Procedure
1 Open the ladder program in which you want to find something.
2 Click [Find…] in [Edit] menu, or press <Ctrl>+<F>.
3 [Search] screen appears.

- 343 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

Fig. 10.3.6.1

4 Enter the address or symbol that you want to find.

5 Click Next search button to search it.

Table 10.3.6.1
Search kind Select one of Address/Symbol and Functional
Instruction.
Program Choose the programs to be searched
Search string Enter the string to search for.
Wildcard search(Y) This option is available to search for an address.
With this option, you can use wildcard characters
‘*’ and ‘?’ in the search string.
Search string of “R10.*” will hit any of R10.0 -
R10.7
You can not use wildcard search at searching for a
symbol.
Multiple search strings You can specify multiple addresses separated by
comma “,” or semicolon “;”, such as “Y0.0;X0.0”.
Search result list The result of the search summarizes the results in
display [Search result list] screen.
[Search result list] screen shows the program
number, net number, ladder diagram, and coil
comment of each appearance of what you
searched.
Global search Search the whole ladder program.

NOTE
1 The wildcard letter can match with any single or
multiple letters.
2 Question mark “?” matches with any single letter.
More than one “?” can be placed for any letters to
match with.
3 Asterisk mark “*” matches with 0 or more any
letters.

- 344 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

Search by function key

Procedure
1 Move cursor onto the address or symbol that you want to search
for.
2 Press <F3> key to search for it at contacts, coils, and parameters
of functional instructions.
Press <F2> key to search for it at coils only.

Search by context menu

Procedure
1 Move cursor onto the address or symbol that you want to search
for.
2 Right-click to pop up the context menu, and choose [Find…] in
it.

10.3.6.2 Collective display function

The result of search function can be listed in Collective Display. The
condition of search can be saved. One or more conditions can be
managed by following operations:
• Setting condition for Collective Display
• Perform Collective Display function

(1) Setting condition for Collective Display

Procedure
1 Double-click [Collective Display] in [Program List] screen to
open Collective Display screen.

Fig. 10.3.6.2 (a)

- 345 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

2 Click [Add Condition] button to reach Search screen.

Fig. 10.3.6.2 (b)

Set the condition of search, and then click [OK] button.

3 [Setting of search condition-name] screen appears.

Fig. 10.3.6.2 (c)

This string will be the name of the search condition and will be
listed in [Collective Display] screen.
4 The list in [Collective Display] is updated to contain the new
condition.
5 Repeat 2 to 4 if necessary.
6 Check the conditions that you want to enable, and name the
search condition at [Condition Name].

Fig. 10.3.6.2 (d)

Click [OK] button.

The nets that meet the search condition are collected and displayed at
a time.
You can use this function in on-line mode also.

- 346 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

(2) Perform Collective Display function

Procedure
1 Right-click the search condition to be modified in [Program List]
screen.

Search condition

Fig. 10.3.6.2 (e)

2 Select [Property] to see [Collective Display] screen. Confirm the

condition, and close the [Collective Display] window.
3 Double-click the search condition node to display the result of
the search.

10.3.6.3 Replace function

Procedure
1 Select [Replace…] in [Edit] menu. [Replace] screen appears.

Fig. 10.3.6.3

- 347 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

Table 10.3.6.3
Program Specify the program in which the address will be
replaced.
Search string Enter the string to search for; address or symbol.
You can use wildcard characters ‘*’ and ‘?’ in the
search string only at searching an address.
Replace string Enter the string to be replaced with.
You can use wildcard characters ‘*’ and ‘?’ in the
replace string only at searching an address.
Wildcard search(Y) This option is available to replace an address. With
this option, you can use wildcard characters ‘*’ and
‘?’ in the search string.
Search string of “R10.*” will hit any of R10.0 - R10.7
You can not use wildcard search at replacing
symbols.

2 Perform Replace function.

[Next search] Searches for the next appearance of the search
string.
[Replace] Replaces the search string with the replace string.
[Replace all] Replaces all appearances of the search string with
the replace string.
[Cancel] Cancels the replace operation and close this
dialog-box.
[Clear] Initializes all parameters.

NOTE
1 [Replace…] in [Edit] menu can be activated when
ladder editing function is available.
2 If an undefined symbol is inputted as the
replacement string, "Replace" can not be
performed. You have to register the symbol before
performing the replacement.
3 The wildcard letters can not be used at replacing
symbol.
4 The wildcard letter can match with any single or
multiple letters.
5 Question mark “?” matches with any single letter.
More than one “?” can be placed for any letters to
match with.
6 Asterisk mark “*” matches with 0 or more any letters.
7 Wildcard letters can not be used in a signal name.

- 348 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

- Wildcard
(1) Asterisk “*”
The wildcard asterisk can be used as below:
Replace with
Y200 Y* Y200.1 Y*.1 Y200.* Symbol
X100 OK NG NG NG NG OK
X* OK NG NG NG NG NG
Search X100.0 NG NG OK NG NG OK
for X*.0 NG NG OK OK† OK NG
X100.* NG NG OK OK OK NG
Symbol OK NG OK NG NG OK
OK : Effective
NG : Ineffective
OK† : Effective if their address types are the same, such as
replace “X*.0” with “X*.1”.

Following usages of wildcard letters are forbidden:

X1* X1*1 X*1 X*1*
X1*.0 X1*1.0 X*1.0 X*1*.0
X1*.* X1*1.* X*1.* X*1*.*
X*.* *.*

(2) Question mark “?”

The wildcard question mark can be used as below:
Effective Forbidden
X0??0 → Y0??0 X0??0 → Y0?00
X0??0 → Y0?0?
X0??0 → Y0???
X0??0 → Y0??0.0
X0??0.0 → Y0??0.0 X0??0.0 → Y0??0.?
X0??0.0 → Y0??0

- 349 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.3.7 How to Add Sub-program

Add the sub-program.

Procedure
1 Right-click the mouse in [Program List] screen, and then click
[Add sub-program F9].

Fig. 10.3.7 (a)

2 The [Add sub-program] screen appears.

Fig. 10.3.7 (b)

3 Set the data

- sub-program. Input program number.
- Kind of Ladder Input Ladder
- SYMBOL Input symbol
- 1st Comment Input comment
- 2nd Comment
- 3rd Comment
- 4th Comment

4 Click the <Add> button and add the sub-program.

- 350 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.3.8 Notes at Editing Ladder Program

(1) Do not create a symbol that can be read as an address.
If you make a symbol such as “X003”, the search/replace
function may not be unable to work properly with “X003”.
(2) If two or more symbols are assigned to the same address, the
symbol to be displayed for the address is determined in priority
as follows:
Program Symbol Type Address Priority
P1 Other
ABC BYTE R10 4 2
ZAB DWORD R10 3 1
P1 A_1_P1 WORD R10 1 -
P1 A_2_P1 WORD R10 2 -
In case of different symbols with same address:
(a) Symbol with same program with current program of screen.
Local symbol is preferred to global one.
(b) Symbol of larger data type.
Symbol of DWORD, symbol of WORD and then symbol of
BYTE.
(c) Alphabetical order of symbol name.
Order in ASCII code ignoring their cases.
(3) If two or more symbols are assigned to the same address, the
symbols in ladder program may change at de-compilation. Do
not assign two or more symbols to an address.
Program Symbol Type Address
ABC BYTE R10
ZAB DWORD R10
In case of symbol definitions above, the symbol “ABC” used in
the original ladder program will change into “ZAB” at the
de-compilation.
You can check the duplicated address assignment of symbols at
compilation of the ladder program.
Procedure
1 Click [Option…] in [Tool] menu.
2 Click [Compile] tab in [Option] window.
3 Click to check Multiple use check of the symbol address.

Fig. 10.3.8

- 351 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.3.9 Input of Jump Label by Symbolic Name

This function enables the following programming.
• You can input directly a symbol as the label of JMPB/ JMPC/
LBL instructions without assignment of specific label number.
• If you input the undefined symbol as the label on the offline
editing screen, the new symbol data definition screen is opened
automatically and the program name, L address and LABEL type
are input automatically.
• When you compile the ladder program, appropriate L address is
assigned automatically if setting of specific L address is not done
for the symbol.

Ladder Edit
1 Input the label of the JMPB/JMPC/LBL instructions.

Fig. 10.3.9 (a)

2 If you input the label as the undefined symbol, the following new
data definition screen appears. If you input the defined symbol,
the new data definition screen does not appear.

Fig. 10.3.9 (b)

- 352 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

The following items are input automatically.

Table 10.3.9 (a)
Item Contents
PROG. The contents of PROG are decided as follows by the
functional instruction and the subprogram name.
- JMPB: Since each program name is input, it is defined as
the local symbol.
- JMPC: Since nothing is input, it is defined as the global
symbol.
- LBL: In LEVEL2, it is defined as the global symbol.
Except LEVEL2, it is registered as the local symbol.
SYMBOL It is the label name input in the JMPB/ JMPC/ LBL
instructions
ADDRESS Only "L" is input automatically.
If you want to assign any specific label number, you may
change it.
TYPE "LABEL" is input automatically.

Source conversion
In the processing that converts the mnemonic into the source file, if
the following conditions are fulfilled, the symbol will be defined
automatically.
• The undefined symbol is inputted as the label of the JMPB/
JMPC/ LBL instruction.
• The identification code of the mnemonic is "%@3-D".

% @ 3-D
・・・
RD Input
JM PB abc
abc LBL
zyx LBL
・・・
% P1 SP If the symbol "abc" is not defined, it is
RD Input
JM PC zyx defined automatically into the symbol
・・・ comment data.
%
Fig. 10.3.9 (c) Mnemonic

Compile
L address of the symbol is assigned.

Procedure
1 Select [Tool]-[Compile...]. Then, the [Compile] dialog appears.
2 Click the <Exec> button.
3 The L address is assigned.

- 353 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

NOTE
1 You can define the new label on the offline editing
screen.
2 You cannot define the new label on the online
editing screen. But, you can use the already
defined symbol.
3 You can input the symbol of only LABEL type as
the label of the JMPB/JMPC/LBL instructions.
4 If assigned L address is displayed on the symbol
comment edit display, the "*" mark adheres to the
head of the address.
5 When the automatic assignment area becomes
empty, the error occurs, and compile processing is
stopped.
6 L address is assigned without regard to the setting
of "Automatic Assignment Address" on the system
parameter screen.

Mnemonic Conversion
Source data are converted into the mnemonic format file.

• Identification code of the symbol: "%@2-D"

The output format of L address is as follows by "Selection Item"
on the Mnemonic Conversion screen.

Table 10.3.9 (b) Output format of the symbol

Selection Item The symbol format
Source data Mnemonic
Extended function ABC *L2 Mnemonic ABC L:LABEL
ABC L Conversion ABC L:LABEL
ABC L3 ABC L3:LABEL
P-G Compatible ABC *L2 ABC L2:LABEL
Full Options ABC L Mnemonic "K: E-6101: The address of symbol
Label/Subprogram Conversion is undefined.(ABC)" occurs.
ABC L3 ABC L3:LABEL

- 354 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

Print
Not to print the label type symbol, the setting of "LABEL types are
not printed." was added to the "Symbol Comment" tab of the printing
option screen.

Fig. 10.3.9 (d)

If you check "LABEL types are not printed.", the LABEL type
symbols will not print. (The default setting is no check)

Symbol
L address assigned automatically is printed with the "*" mark at the
head of the address.

Fig. 10.3.9 (e)

- 355 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.4 AUTOMATIC ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT FUNCTION

When a fixed address need not be assigned for relay contact used
temporarily in program etc., the address can be assigned automatically
at compiling by inputting only data type and address type when
symbol is defined.
Automatic assignment is applied to the following symbols.
• Symbol of BOOL, BYTE, WORD and DWORD type
• Address of R, D, E

10.4.1 Set Screen

Specify the address area used for an automatic assignment.
The range of address is specification of each type.

Procedure
1 Double-click the <System parameter> item in the [Program List]
screen. The [Edit System Parameter] screen appears.
2 Check the Automatic Assignment of Address and click the
[Details].

Fig. 10.4 (a)

- 356 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

3 Enter the range in an assigned address.

Fig. 10.4 (a)

Table 10.4
Type Rang of Assignment
R address BOOL R100.0 - R109.7
BYTE R110 - R139
WORD R140 - R199
DWORD R200 - R251

WARNING
Set the address ranges not to overlap. Otherwise,
an error occurs when compiling.

10.4.2 Set of Symbol

The symbol of automatic address assignment is set on the symbol edit
display.

Procedure
1 Double-click the <Symbol comment> item in the [Program List]
screen. The [Symbol Comment Editing] screen appears.
2 Double-click a symbol to open the property screen.
3 Enter “R” to ADDRESS.

Fig. 10.4.2 (a)

Enter “D” for D address.

Enter “E” for E address.

- 357 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

4 When compiling, the address is assigned.

Fig. 10.4.2 (b)

The * mark adheres to a head of address.

10.4.3 Address Decision

The address with * mark which assigned automatically is assigned at
each compilation. If an address is not changed, the address is decided.

Procedure
1 Double-click the <Symbol comment> item in the [Program List]
screen. The [Symbol Comment Editing] screen appears.
2 Click the Address decision of context menu that is displayed by
right-clicking the assigned address.

Fig. 10.4.3

The * mark of the address disappears.

NOTE
1 When setting the range of address by an automatic
assignment on the System Parameter screen,
please set the range of unused address in a ladder.
2 The address is assigned according to the symbol
type. Therefore, please don't use this function for
the symbol of a functional instruction with the data
length which is not consistent with the type of
symbol.

- 358 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.5 CONVERTING TO SOURCE PROGRAMS

1 When the mnemonic file of non-extended functions is converted

into the source of extended functions, the unusable character in
the symbol is replaced as follows.
• Replacement of the symbol character. (Identification
code: %@2-C, %@2-C2)

Tabel 10.5 (a)

Unusable Replacement
Remarks
character characters
When the 1st character of the symbol is "%", it is replaced with the
% (Percent) _PR_
replacement characters.
When the 1st character of the symbol is "$", it is replaced with the
$ (Dollar) _DR_
replacement characters.
: (Colon) _CR_ ":" in the symbol is replaced with the replacement characters.
; (Semicolon) _SC_ ";" in the symbol is replaced with the replacement characters.
. (Period) _PE_ "." in the symbol is replaced with the replacement characters.

• Replacement of the symbol character of the ladder data

Tabel 10.5 (b)

Unusable Replacement
Remarks
character characters
"%" cannot be used for the 1st character of the symbol.
Reason)
% (Percent) • The same as the identification code.
• The same as the address of extended function.
Replace the unusable characters in the mnemonic file.
When the 1st character of a symbol is "$", it is replaced to the replacement
$ (Dollar) _DR_
characters.
":" cannot be used for the symbol.
Reason)
: (Colon)
The character before ":" is deleted.
Replace the unusable characters in the mnemonic file.
";" cannot be used for the symbol.
Reason)
; (Semicolon)
The character after ";" is deleted.
Replace the unusable characters in the mnemonic file.
. (Period) _PE_ "." in the symbol is replaced to the replacement characters.

2 In conversion of the mnemonic, if you select the

"Label/Subprogram", the ladder data is outputted in the symbol.
If you select the "P-G Compatible" and the "Full Options", the
ladder data is outputted in the address. When you convert the
ladder of the non-extended function into the extended function,
select the "Full Options" and convert into the mnemonic.

3 In case of mnemonic file of extended format, whose ID is

“%2-D”, converting such characters in a symbol causes an error.

- 359 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.6 CONVERTING TO MNEMONIC

Converting a source data into a mnemonic file.

Fig. 10.6

Select the format of a mnemonic file by the Selection Item.

Select the Extended function when using an extended function.
The output by conventional model is possible for the ladder where an
error does not occur at compiling.

- 360 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.7 SYSTEM PARAMETER

10.7.1 Set of Display Language for Comment

You can describe up to four sets of comments for each symbol data.
These sets of comments can have their attributes of language, so that
they can be switched dynamically to be displayed on the ladder screen
and so on, according to the language setting of CNC. They can also
have an attribute of a specific screen, so that they will be used in the
screen for a specific purpose.
You can define the attributes of comment sets at Language for
Comment in System Parameter.

Procedure
1 Double-click the <System parameter> item in the [Program List]
screen. The [Edit System Parameter] screen appears.
2 Click the Language for Comment button.
Number of display
language (comment)

When displayed language of CNC

is English, first comment is used.

When displayed language of

CNC is Japanese, second
comment is used.

When displayed language of CNC

is not English/Japanese, first
comment is used.

Comment set number

First Comment = 0
Second Comment = 1
:

CNC display language number ‘,’ (COMMA) is used as a delimiter.

Fig. 10.7

0: English 8: Dutch
1: Japanese 9: Danish
2: German 10: Portuguese
3: French 11: Polish
4: Chinese 12: Hungarian
5: Italian 13: Swedish
6: Korean 14: Czech
7: Spanish -1: Other
100 REMARK in I/O Diagnosis screen

- 361 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.8 COMPILATION

Fig. 10.8

A specification whether to output the 3rd comment and 4th comment

is added.
You can describe up to four sets of comments for each symbol data.
These sets of comments can have their attributes of language, so that
they can be switched dynamically to be displayed on the ladder screen
and so on, according to the language setting of CNC. They can also
have an attribute of a specific screen, so that they will be used in the
screen for a specific purpose.
You can define the attributes of comment sets at Language for
Comment in System Parameter.

0: English 8: Dutch
1: Japanese 9: Danish
2: German 10: Portuguese
3: French 11: Polish
4: Chinese 12: Hungarian
5: Italian 13: Swedish
6: Korean 14: Czech
7: Spanish -1: Other
100 REMARK in I/O Diagnosis screen

Multiple use check of the symbol address

Checked : It is checked that two or more symbols are defined in
one address.
Not checked : It is not checked that two or more symbols are defined
in one address.

- 362 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.9 DECOMPILATION

A specification of the 3rd and 4th comment about method to merge at

de-compiling is added to the Detail.

Fig. 10.9

- 363 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.10 PRINTING

10.10.1 Printing the System Parameters

The contents of the automatic assignment of address are always
printed.

Fig. 10.10.1

- 364 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.10.2 Printing the Symbol Comment

Prints the symbol comment
There are two kind of printing formats.

Table 10.10.2
Print format Description
All All the symbols and the comment data are printed.
Printed as a single line. The symbol is printed up to 24
1 line
characters and the comment is up to 40 characters.

Procedure
1 Select the [Print] of the [File] menu.
2 Select the [Option] button of the [Print] dialog box.
3 Select the [Symbol_Comment] tab of the [Option] dialog box.
4 Choose the All or the 1 Line of the [Selection of print format]

Fig. 10.10.2

- 365 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.10.3 Printing the Ladder Diagram

Prints the Ladder Diagram. The symbol is printed up to 16 characters
and the comment is up to 30 characters.
The Relay/Coil, the Coil Comment, and the Subprogram Comment
can be specified.

Subprogram Comment

Coil Comment

Relay/Coil
Fig. 10.10.3 (a)

Procedure
1 Select the [Print] of the [File] menu.
2 Select the <Option> button of the [Print] dialog box.
3 Select the [Ladder Diagram] tab of the [Option] dialog box.
4 Click the <Details> button.
5 Use the Relay/Coil, the Coil comment or the Subprogram
comment.

Fig. 10.10.3 (b)

- 366 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.10.4 Printing Cross Reference

Prints the Cross Reference of the Address. The symbol is printed up to
16 characters and the comment is up to 30 characters. When both the
global symbol and the local symbol are defined as the same signal,
only the global symbol is displayed.
The printed comment can be specified.

Procedure
1 Select the [Print] of the [File] menu.
2 Select the <Option> button of the [Print] dialog box.
3 Select the [Cross Reference] tab of the [Option] dialog box.
4 Click the <Details> button.
5 Use the Comment.

Fig. 10.10.4

10.10.5 Printing the Bit Address

The symbol is printed up to 16 characters.
The global symbol is printed.
The local symbol is not printed. (Note: The use situation of the
address is printed.)

- 367 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.11 SIGNAL STATUS

Procedure
1 Select [Diagnose] – [Signal Status]. The [Signal Status] screen
appears.

Fig. 10.11

10.11.1 Toolbar

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)(10(11)(12)(13)

Fig. 10.11.1

(1) Switches between the status screen and forced I/O screen.
(2) Search button
(3) Combo box for inputting the character string for which a search
is to be made.
To search a local symbol “ABC” in P1, Input ”P1.ABC”.
(4) Symbol indication (off ⇔ on)
(5) Display format: Byte
(6) Display format: Word
(7) Display format: Double word
(8) Display type: Binary
(9) Display type: Decimal
(10) Display type: Hexadecimal
(11) Display type: BCD
(12) Sign indication (off ⇔ on)
(Valid only when decimal notation is set as the display type.)
(13) ToolTips indication (off ⇔ on)
When the cursor is on an address, detailed information of the
address is shown if ToolTips indication is turned on.

- 368 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.12 T ADDRESS (TIMER)

10.12.1 Toolbar

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Fig. 10.12.1

(1) Symbol indication (off ⇔ on)

(2) Search
(3) Combo box for inputting the character string for which a search
is to be made.
To search a local symbol “ABC” in P1, Input ”P1.ABC”.
Units of the displayed timer value (ms, sec, min)
(4) ToolTips indication (off ⇔ on)
When the cursor is on an address, detailed information of the
address is shown if ToolTips indication is turned on.

10.13 C ADDRESS (COUNTER)

10.13.1 Toolbar

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Fig. 10.13.1

(1) Symbol indication (off ⇔ on)

(2) Search
(3) Combo box for inputting the character string for which a search
is to be made.
To search a local symbol “ABC” in P1, Input ”P1.ABC”.
(4) ToolTips indication (off ⇔ on)
When the cursor is on an address, detailed information of the
address is shown if ToolTips indication is turned on.

- 369 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.14 K ADDRESS (KEEP RELAY)

10.14.1 Toolbar

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Fig. 10.14.1

(1) Symbol indication (off ⇔ on)

(2) Search
(3) Combo box for inputting the character string for which a search
is to be made.
To search a local symbol “ABC” in P1, Input ”P1.ABC”.
(4) ToolTips indication (off ⇔ on)
When the cursor is on an address, detailed information of the
address is shown if ToolTips indication is turned on.

10.15 D ADDRESS (DATA TABLE)

10.15.1 Toolbar

(1) (2) (3) (4)(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)(10)(11)(12)(13)

Fig. 10.15.1

(1) Symbol indication (off ⇔ on)

(2) Search
(3) Combo box for inputting the character string for which a search
is to be made.
To search a local symbol “ABC” in P1, Input ”P1.ABC”.
(4) Display format: Byte
(5) Display format: Word
(6) Display format: Double word
(7) Display type: Binary
(8) Display type: Decimal
(9) Display type: Hexadecimal
(10) Display type: BCD
(11) Sign indication (off ⇔ on)
(Valid only when decimal notation is set as the display type.)
(12) Write protection
(13) ToolTips indication (off ⇔ on)
When the cursor is on an address, detailed information of the
address is shown if ToolTips indication is turned on.

- 370 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.16 SIGNAL TRACING

10.16.1 Toolbar

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)(13)(14)(15) (16)
Fig. 10.16.1

(1) Trace parameter setting button.

Displays the [Trace Parameter Setting] dialog box.
(2) Trace start button
Starts or stops tracing.
When this button is in the up state, tracing is stopped.
When the button is in the down state, tracing is executed.
* When the trace function is being executed, the <Trace start>
button is in the down state.
(3) Symbol on/off button
Sets the display format of the trigger and sampling addresses.
When the symbol format is selected, the button is in the down
state; when the address format is selected, the button is in the up
state.
(4) Marking button
Marks the cursor position at that time and displays the mark
cursor. When the mark cursor and current position cursor overlap
one another, the current position cursor is displayed. At the
bottom of the screen, [Mark position], the mark cursor position,
and [Range], the range from the mark cursor position to the
current position cursor, are displayed.
(5) (6) Zoom button
Magnifies or reduces graphs.
(7) Grid line button
Specifies whether to display grid lines.
(8) (9) Up-and-down replacement button
Clicking the [UP] button replaces the trace result at the address
cursor with the line immediately above.
Similarly, clicking the [DOWN] button replaces the trace result
with the line immediately below.
(10) (11) Search button
Searches the trace display area for the specified time or frame
number.
(12) First trace result button
Moves the cursor at the beginning of the trace result.
(13) Previous trace result button
Scrolls the trace result display up by one page.
(14) Next trace result button
Scrolls the trace result display down by one page.
(15) Last trace result button
Moves the cursor at the end of the trace result.
(16) ToolTips indication (off ⇔ on)
When the cursor is on an address, detailed information of the
address is shown if ToolTips indication is turned on.
- 371 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.17 TOOLTIPS INDICATION

Symbol and comment of addresses are displayed.

Local symbol is shown as "P address.Symbol" which added a period
between P address and Symbol.

Fig. 10.17

Program, Symbol, address, type and comment are displayed.

Maximum number of character is 40.
For about the comment data, space character is added to the top of
strings, and ‘\n’ indicates the new line code.
To specify the font size of ToolTips indication, Use [ToolTips font].
[ToolTips font] will appear by clicking <Details...> button in [Tool]
- [Option] - [Ladder] tab.

- 372 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

10.18 MNEMONIC FILE FORMAT

The mnemonic file format of Extended functions is added.

Table 10.18
Identification
Conversion name Data kind The contents of change
code
Symbol %@2 FORMAT-A/B
P-G Compatible
and %@2-C FORMAT-C (Relay comment, Comment)
Full Options
comment %@2-C2 FS30i (Comment 1, Comment 2)
Label / Sub program
Ladder %@3
Extended functions System %@0 • Model information was added.
parameter • Automatic assignment of address was added.
Symbol %@2-D • Structure of a symbol subject.
and • The local symbol and the global symbol were added.
comment • Type information was added.
• The comment set was extended to four.
Ladder %@3-D • It corresponded to the address and the symbol.
• It corresponded to the local symbol and the global symbol.

10.18.1 System Parameter

The following information is added.

• Model information was added.

Table 10.18.1 (a)

Setting data Description
4 30i-A PMC(EXT) 1st-path PMC Extended functions
4 30i-A PMC(2nd,EXT) 2nd-path PMC Extended functions
4 30i-A PMC(3rd,EXT) 3rd-path PMC Extended functions
4 30i-A PMC(DCS,EXT) Dual Check Safety PMC Extended functions

• Automatic assignment of an address was added.

Table 10.18.1 (b)

Setting data Description
100 YES 100 : Yes or no of automatic assignment ( Valid : YES, Invalid : NO )
101 R100-R199 101 : BOOL of R address (Character string R100-R199)
102 R700-R799 102 : BYTE of R address
103 0-0 103 : WORD of R address
104 0-0 104 : DWORD of R address
111 D100-D149 111 : BOOL of D address (Character string D100-D149)
112 D200-D299 112 : BYTE of D address
113 0-0 113 : WORD of D address
114 0-0 114 : DWORD of D address
121 E0-E199 121 : BOOL of E address (Character string E0-E199)
122 0-0 122 : BYTE of E address
123 0-0 123 : WORD of E address
124 0-0 124 : DWORD of E address
In "100 NO", 101-124 are not outputted.

- 373 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

(Example) In case of the Extended functions of 30i-A PMC (the

1st-path PMC).
%@0
2 BINARY 2 : Counter data type (BINARY or BCD)
3 NO 3 : Yes or no of Operator panel ( Valid : YES, Invalid : NO )
4 30i-A PMC 4 : PMC Type ( 30i-A PMC )
31 1 31 : The setting number of display language(Comment) ( 1-16 )
32 -1 32 : CNC display language number 1 ( -1, 0-127 )
33 0 33 : Comment set number 1 ( 0-16 )
100 YES 100 : Yes or no of automatic assignment ( Valid : YES, Invalid : NO )
101 R100-R199 101 : BOOL of R address (Character string R100-R199)
102 R700-R799 102 : BYTE of R address
103 0-0 103 : WORD of R address
104 0-0 104 : DWORD of R address
111 D100-D149 111 : BOOL of D address (Character string D100-D149)
112 D200-D299 112 : BYTE of D address
113 0-0 113 : WORD of D address
114 0-0 114 : DWORD of D address
121 E0-E199 121 : BOOL of E address (Character string E0-E199)
122 0-0 122 : BYTE of E address
123 0-0 123 : WORD of E address
124 0-0 124 : DWORD of E address
%

10.18.2 Symbol Comment

%@2-D
Symbol Address:Type
$1 'Comment 1'
$2 'Comment 2'

$LEVEL1
Symbol Address:Type
$2 'Comment 2'
%

Fig. 10.18.2 (a)

• Describe an address and a symbol in the same line. A symbol has

to be described at the head of a line, puts a space or a tab as a
delimiter character, and describes an address.
• Describe the type of a symbol after ":" of an address. If the type
of a symbol is omitted, it will change to BOOL or BYTE
according to the kind of address.
• Input the space and address to set up only a comment.
• "$LEVEL1" and "$P1" or subsequent ones are local symbols.
• "$1" is the 1st comment and "$2" is the 2nd comment. The
character string surrounded with the single quotation mark is a
comment.

- 374 -
B-63484EN/05 10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION

CAUTION
1 Please input a symbol and a comment from the 1st
character. Any blank should not precede.
2 When using a single quotation mark " ' " into the
character string of a relay comment and a coil
comment, dollar + single quotation mark " $ "+ " ' "
describes.
3 When you use yen symbol " \ " (backslash) by a
comment into a comment text, please describe it as
two " \\. "

%@2-D
INITIALIZE L0100:LABEL
$1 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'
OPEN-FRONT P0008:PROG
$2 'OPEN FRONT COVER'
UNIT-2-ACT R0200.1:BOOL
$1 'KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$' ON'
$2 '$'POWER$$'
UNIT-3-POWER R0200.0:BOOL
$1 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'
$2 'KEEP POWER ON'
R0300.0:BOOL
$1 'KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON'
$2 'KEEP POWER ON'

$LEVEL1
*ESP G0008.4:BOOL
$1 'Emergency STOP'
Work1 R0100.0:BOOL
$1 'Work signal\nTest'
%

Fig. 10.18.2 (b)

- 375 -
10.EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION B-63484EN/05

10.18.3 Ladder

Extended functions
%@3-D
END1
LABEL1 LBL ;<L100 >
;[LABEL L00001]
END2
SUBPR1 SP ;<P1 > "SUB PROG. NO.01"
;[SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.01]
RD XADRS1 ;<X0.0 > "JUMPB LABEL L001"
JMPB LABEL1 ;<L100 >
;[LABEL L00001]
RD XADRS2 ;<X0.1 > "JMPC LABEL L001"
JMPC LABEL1 ;<L100 >
;[LABEL L00001]
LABEL1 LBL ;<L100 >
;[LABEL L00001]
SPE
SP1000 SP ;<P2 > "SUB PROGRAM NO.1"
RD RADRS00 ;<R0.0 >
DEC DADRS04 ;<D0 >
2
WRT %D0.0
SPE
END
%

Fig. 10.18.3

CAUTION
1 Please input the parameter of LBL and SP
instruction from the 1st character.
2 Please be sure to put in the space or a tab before a
basic instruction and a functional instruction.
3 The character before a “:” (colon) is disregarded.
The character after a “;” semicolon is also
disregarded.
4 Please attach "%" (percent) to an address.

- 376 -
B-63484EN/05 11.CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

11 CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

This chapter describes how to convert DOS-version FANUC
LADDER-II and Ladder Editing Package (Windows) sequence
programs.

- 377 -
11.CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

11.1 CONVERTING FROM DOS-VERSION FANUC LADDER-II

This section describes how to convert DOS-version sequence

programs to the Windows version.

11.1.1 Procedure
1 Select [Tool] – [Data Conversion.]

2 On the pull-down menu, select [Data File → LAD File].

The [Conversion into LAD Format File] screen appears.

Fig. 11.1.1 (a)

2-1 Input the required data.

Program Name
Enter the name (folder name) of the DOS-version
sequence program you want to convert.

LAD Format File

Enter the name of the Windows-version sequence
program you want to create by the conversion. Use the
extension .LAD. You can omit the extension, however.

3 To convert, click the <OK> button.

To abandon the conversion, click the <Cancel> button.

- 378 -
B-63484EN/05 11.CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

If an LAD file opened by another user is specified, the following error

messages are displayed, and data conversion is terminated:

Fig. 11.1.1 (b)

Fig. 11.1.1 (c)

If an LAD file that has the read-only attribute is specified, the

following error messages are displayed, and data conversion is
terminated:

Fig. 11.1.1 (d)

Fig. 11.1.1 (e)

- 379 -
11.CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

11.2 CONVERTING TO DOS-VERSION FANUC LADDER-II

This section describes how to convert Windows-version sequence

programs to the DOS version.

11.2.1 Procedure
1 Select [Tool] – [Data Conversion.]

2 On the pull-down menu, select [Data File ← LAD File].

The [Conversion into Program Data File] screen appears.

Fig. 11.2.1

2-1 Input the required data.

LAD Format File
Enter the name of the Windows-version sequence
program you want to convert. Use the extension .LAD.
You can omit the extension, however.

Program Name
Enter the name (folder name) of the DOS-version
sequence program you want to create by the
conversion.

Program Format
Select format A, B, or C.

3 To convert, click the <OK> button.

To abandon the conversion, click the <Cancel> button.

NOTE
1 For conversion to FANUC LADDER-II sequence
programs, select FormatC for Program Format.
2 Any sequence program on the PMC-SB7 cannot be
converted to a sequence program of FANUC
LADDER-II.

- 380 -
B-63484EN/05 11.CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

11.3 CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS BETWEEN PMC

MODELS

Converting a mnemonic file enables it to be used as a sequence

program for another PMC model.

11.3.1 Conversion by Changing System Parameters

For the following PMC models, changing the system parameters in a
mnemonic file enables a sequence program for another PMC to be
edited. However, the format of the system parameters, the function
instructions that can be used, and the range of addresses vary from one
PMC model to another.

Table 11.3.1
CNC model PMC from which conversion is possible
FS16/18/20-B
PMC - SA1 / SA3 / SA5 /
FS16/18/21-C
SB3 / SB4 / SB5 / SB6 / SB7 /
FS16/18/21i-A
SC3 / SC4
FS16/18/21i-B
Power Mate-D/F/H
PMC - PA1 / PA3 / SB5 / SB6
Power Mate i-D/H
FS15-B
PMC - NB / NB2 / NB6
FS15i

NOTE
It is impossible to convert step sequence data.

- 381 -
11.CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

Example of conversion (PMC-SB3 → PMC-SC3)

1 To convert a source program to mnemonic file format, set the

PMC model to PMC-SB3.
2 Using a text editor, change the setting of system parameters so
that they match the PMC-SC3.
3 For FANUC LADDER-II, set the PMC model to PMC-SC3 to
convert the mnemonic file manipulated in step 2 to a source
program.
Mnemonic file Mnemonic file to be
to be converted created by conversion
(PMC-SB3) (PMC-SC3)

%@A %@A
%@0 %@0
2 BCD 2 BCD
3 NO 3 NO
4 PMC-RB3 Changing 4 PMC-RC3
7 100 system 5 000000
% parameters 6 50
%@1 7 100
01 ABC-KIKAI %
02 S-DRILL %@1
: 01 ABC-KIKAI
: 02 S-DRILL
% :
%@5 :
X000 1 0 1 ID16C %
Y008 1 0 4 OD32A %@5
% X000 1 0 1 ID16C
%@E Y008 1 0 4 OD32A
%
%@E

NOTE
For an explanation of the setting items of the
system parameter section of each model, see
Subsection 6.4.1.1, "Parameter" in Section 6.4,
"MNEMONIC FILE SAMPLE".

- 382 -
B-63484EN/05 11.CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS

11.3.2 Using System Program Data for Another Program

The following method makes the data (title, symbols, comments,
ladders, messages, and I/O module data) of a sequence program usable
as data for another sequence program.

However, the range of addresses varies from one model to another.

Refer to the applicable programming manual for each individual
model for a detailed explanation about how to change the range of
their addresses.

[Example: Making symbol and comment data for the PMC-SB usable
for with PMC-SC3]

%@A %@A
%@0 %@0
2 BCD 2 BCD
3 NO 3 NO
4 PMC-RB 4 PMC-RC3
7 100 5 000000
9 YES 6 50
% 7 100
%@1 %
: %@1
: :
% :
Insert %
%@2
X000.0 ZPX.M %@2
X000.1 ZPY.M X000.0 ZPX.M
% X000.1 ZPY.M
: %
: :
% :
%@E %
%@E

- 383 -
11.CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS B-63484EN/05

11.3.3 Converting Step Sequence Programs between Different

Models
Usually, a mnemonic file is used for ladder program conversion
between different models. For step sequence programs, however, a
memory card format file is used for conversion.

Program conversion is possible between the following combinations

of models.
"PMC-SB4 (STEP SEQ) → PMC-SC4 (STEP SEQ)"
"PMC-SB4 (STEP SEQ) → PMC-SB6 (STEP SEQ)"

Example of conversion (PMC-SB4 (STEP SEQ) → PMC-SB6 (STEP

SEQ))

1 Compile a step sequence program for the PMC-SB4 (STEP SEQ)

to create memory card format data.

2 Export memory card format data.

3 Create a new program.

(Set the model to "PMC-SB6 (STEP SEQ)."

4 Import the memory card format data that was exported in step 2,
above.

5 Select [Tool] - [Decompile] to decompile the program.

This completes the conversion. When the step sequence program is

loaded into FANUC LADDER-II, it can be used for the PMC-SB6
(STEP SEQ).

- 384 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

12 ERROR MESSAGES
This chapter describes the error messages that may be displayed by
Ladder Editing Package (Windows).

- 385 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

12.1 ERROR MESSAGE FORMAT

Ladder Editing Package (Windows) outputs error messages in the

following format:
Function symbol:
Classification-Four-digit-code Error message character strings

12.1.1 Function Symbols

The function for which an error occurred is represented using one
alphabetic character.

Function
Function name Function screen
symbol
Create new program
Open program
Update program
A File Save
Import
Export
Data conversion
B Title editing Edit title
C I/O module editing Edit I/O module
D System parameter editing Edit system parameter
Edit ladder
E Ladder/step sequence editing
Ladder monitor
F Symbol/comment editing Edit symbol/comment
G Message editing Edit message
Print
H Print
Print preview
I Compile Compile
J Decompile Decompile
Mnemonic conversion
K Mnemonic editing
Source program conversion
Load from PMC
L Input/output Store in PMC
Backup
Signal status
PMC parameter timer
PMC parameter counter
PMC parameter keep relay
PMC parameter data table
PMC parameter setting
PMC alarm status
N Online PMC status
Signal trace
Signal analysis
Run program
Stop program
Communication
I/O Link start
Clear PMC area

- 386 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

12.1.2 Message Classification

A message type is represented using one alphabetic character.

Classification Type Description No.

State in which the system is
operational, but cannot continue 2xxx
F Fatal error
processing due to a reason such as 5xxx
there being an invalid user program
State in which processing continues
3xxx
E Error but with no results produced, or in
6xxx
which processing is stopped
State in which processing continues
4xxx
W Warning with results produced, but in which the
7xxx
results are unpredictable

- 387 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

12.2 ERROR MESSAGES

12.2.1 File

Error code Message Cause/action

A:F-2000 Insufficient memory
A:F-2001 Insufficient disk space
This data can not be handled at this
A:F-2004
version of FAPT LADDER
The source program includes an invalid file or does not include a
A:F-2005 Source program has wrong file necessary file.
Check the file configuration of the source program.
A:F-2006 Not found **** file
A:F-2007 Not found **** Source program
A:F-2008 Cannot open **** file
A:F-2009 Cannot close **** file
A:F-2010 **** Source program broken
No source program is entered. Enter the name of the desired
A:E-3120 Enter program name
source program.
A:E-3121 The source program does not exist
A source program for an unsupported model was entered. Check
A:E-3122 PMC model file is not found the models supported by this system.
Some system files (****.TBL) are not found. Reinstall.
An entered source program cannot be created. A source
A:E-3124 Cannot create new program **** program cannot be created if a folder with the same name
already exists. Enter another program name.
A specified path is not found. Check the entered source program
A:E-3125 Illegal path of source program name
name.
In source program copy operation, a program of FORMAT-A/B
was specified. FORMAT-A/B cannot be used with Ladder Editing
A:E-3126 Source program type is different
Package (Windows). Convert the program by using the data
conversion function of the [Tool] menu.
A:E-3127 Mismatched password
A:E-3128 **** file read error The **** file cannot be read.
A:E-3130 **** file read error. Hit any key The **** file cannot be read.
A:E-3131 **** file open error The **** file cannot be opened.
A:E-3132 **** file close error The **** file cannot be closed.
A file cannot be output due to there being insufficient disk
A:E-3133 insufficient disk error capacity. Terminate the system, and then the free up space on
the disk.
Invalid option initialized.(**** file was
A:E-3134 The option file was initialized because its data was destroyed.
updated.
Program conversion error.(ROM ->
A:E-3135
Memory card) Hit any key
Program conversion error.(Memory card
A:E-3136
-> ROM) Hit any key
A:E-3137 Cannot create file **** The **** file could not be created.
A:E-3138 Illegal source program name
A:E-3139 Illegal **** source program name
A:E-3140 Not found file
A:E-3141 Not found **** PMC-OS file
A:E-3143 Cannot open file The **** file cannot be opened.

- 388 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

A:E-3144 Cannot close file The **** file cannot be closed.
A:E-3145 File I/O error A file access error occurred.
A:E-3146 **** file I/O error
A:E-3147 Unknown PMC series
A:E-3148 **** file write error. Hit any key. The **** file cannot be written to.
A:E-6000 Illegal folder name Specify an existing folder as the export destination for a user file.
When an LAD file is imported, the PMC model of the import
A:E-6001 PMC type is different
source must match that of the open program.
A:E-6002 Export Ladder File is protected Deselect the ladder file from export targets.
A:E-6003 Import Ladder File is protected Deselect the ladder file from import targets.
A:E-6004 Export Sub program File is protected Deselect the sub-program file from export targets.
A:E-6005 Import Sub program File is protected Deselect the sub-program file from import targets.
Check whether the file you attempt to delete is used with another
A:E-6006 Fail to delete file
system.
Net comment can be selected when all Select all the data files, ladder diagrams, and sub-programs to
A:W-7000
data is selected import a net comment.
Since the timer cannot be used, the status bar display cannot be
A:W-7001 No timer available updated. Ladder Editing Package (Windows) can be executed
normally.

12.2.2 Title Editing

Error code Message Cause/action

B:E-3020 File read error. Hit any key The title file (TITLE) of a source program cannot be read.
The title file (TITLE) or control file (CONTROL) of a source
B:E-3021 File write error. Hit any Key
program cannot be written to.
B:E-3022 File I/O error. Hit any key A file access error occurred.

12.2.3 I/O Module Editing

Error code Message Cause/action

The I/O module file (IOMODULE) of a source program cannot be
C:E-3021 File read error. Hit any key
read.
The I/O module file (IOMODULE) or control file (CONTROL)
C:E-3022 File write error. Hit any key
cannot be written to.
C:E-3023 Input data invalid Check the input method.
C:E-3024 Appointed Group not exist Check the input range.
C:E-3025 Appointed Base not exist Check the input range.
C:E-3026 Appointed Slot not exist Check the input range.
C:E-3027 Appointed ID Code not exist The entered module does not exist. Check the usable modules.
C:E-3028 Input key not used
This address does not allow the entered module to be used.
C:E-3030 Address appoint illegal Check if an output module is entered in address X, or if an input
module is entered in address Y.
A module is already set in the entered group, base, and slot. The
The same group base and slot are
C:E-3032 same group, base, and slot cannot be set more than once.
already specified
Specify a different group, base, or slot.
C:E-3033 Invalid Channel No. appoint Check the usable channels.
Invalid data except '0' is specified at the I/O Unit-B (power-on/off information) can be set in slot 0 only.
C:E-3034
slot of * as I/O UNIT B Reenter by specifying slot 0.
C:E-6011 Not Module

- 389 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

Error code Message Cause/action

C:E-6021 Module Data Delete Error
C:E-6031 Get Module Data Error
C:E-6032 Set Module Data Error
C:E-6041 Get Module Comment Data Error
C:E-6042 Set Module Comment Data Error
C:E-6043 Module Comment Data Delete Error
C:E-6050 Channel Data Delete Error
A module is already set in the entered group, base, and slot. The
The same group base and slot are
C:W-4020 same group, base, and slot are set more than once. Check
already specified
whether this poses a problem.
Invalid data except '0' is specified at the
C:W-4021 The I/O Unit-B module can be set in base 0 only.
base of I/O UNIT B
Both I/O UNIT-A and UNIT-B are
C:W-4022 I/O Unit-A and I/O Unit-B cannot be specified in the same group.
specified in the same group
Both I/O UNIT-B and CONNECTION
C:W-7023
UNIT are specified in the same group

12.2.4 System Parameter Editing

Error code Message Cause/action

The system parameter file (SYSPARAM) of a source program
D:E-3020 File read error. Hit any key
cannot be read.
The system parameter file (SYSPARAM) or control file
D:E-3021 File write error. Hit any key
(CONTROL) of a source program cannot be written to.
D:E-3022 Invalid value
D:E-3023 Input data invalid
When the use of the FS0 operator's panel is set, set the following
addresses:
D:E-3024 Operator panel address error
Key input address, LED output address, key bit image address,
LED bit image address

12.2.5 Ladder/Step Sequence Editing

Error code Message Cause/action

E:F-2100 Cannot read **** file
E:F-2101 Cannot write **** file
E:F-2102 Cannot seek **** file
E:E-3200 Illegal source code
E:E-3201 Buffer size over
E:E-3202 Number of nest branch too big
E:E-3203 Number of branch too big
E:E-3204 Size of table buffer too big
E:E-3205 Unconnected step sequence diagram
E:E-3206 Selected branch error
E:E-3207 Parallel branch error
E:E-3208 Syntax error
E:E-3209 Step line syntax error
E:E-3210 Transition line syntax error
E:E-3211 Cannot insert
E:E-3212 Cannot make diagram
E:E-3213 Horizontal line illegal

- 390 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

E:E-3214 Jump forward check error
E:E-3215 Check incomplete error
E:E-3216 Chart sequence error
E:E-3217 Chart start code error
E:E-3218 Chart end code error
E:E-3219 Jump close error
E:E-3220 Horizontal line duplicate error
E:E-3221 Branch unconnected error
E:E-3222 Branch sequence error
E:E-3223 Cannot copy diagrams
E:E-3224 Cannot move diagrams
E:E-3225 Illegal specified position
E:E-3226 Strings not Found
E:E-3227 Step Number Duplicate Error
E:E-3228 Label Number Duplicate Error
E:E-3229 Cannot delete temporary file
E:E-3230 Same sub-program name exists
E:E-3231 Input invalid
E:E-3232 Expected address
E:E-3233 Too deep nesting of sub-program
E:E-3234 Illegal file name
E:E-3235 Sub-program already entried
E:E-3236 Cannot delete program
E:E-3237 Cannot change data
E:E-6035 Program data error.
The size of a sequence program exceeded the size specified by
E:E-6036 Program size error (OPTION).
an option. Reduce the size of the sequence program.
E:E-6037 PMC type unmatch. Convert the model with the offline function.
E:E-6041 The communication to PMC is not ready. Start communication.
An alarm was issued on the PMC, so processing cannot be
E:E-6042 An alarm occurs on PMC
continued. Reset the alarm on the PMC.
E:E-6044 Cannot create temporary file.
Ladder size over (PMC) The size of a ladder being edited exceeded the writable size on
E:E-6045
Error status = **** the PMC. Reduce the size of the ladder being edited.
A program being edited does not match the program on the
The program is not corresponding(PMC).
E:E-6046 PMC. By loading, storing, or restoring a program, ensure a
status=****
match with the program on the PMC.
An alarm occurs on PMC An alarm was issued on the PMC, so processing cannot be
E:E-6047
Error status = **** continued. Check if the ladder data being edited is correct.
A program does not match the program on the PMC. By loading,
Ladder data error (PMC).
E:E-6048 storing, or restoring a program, ensure a match with the program
Error status = ****
on the PMC.
The sequence program is excessively large. Reduce the amount
E:E-6051 OBJECT BUFFER OVER
of ladder data.
E:E-6053 1ST LEVEL EXECUTE TIME OVER
The method of using function instruction COM (SUB9) is
E:E-6054 COM FUNCTION MISSING incorrect. Check that COM is paired with COME (SUB29)
correctly.
The method of using function instruction JMP (SUB10) is
E:E-6055 JUMP FUNCTION MISSING
incorrect. Check that JMP is paired with IMPE (SUB30) correctly.

- 391 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

Error code Message Cause/action

Function instructions END1, END2, END3, and END are
E:E-6056 END FUNCTION MISSING incorrect. Check that the order of END1, END2, END3, and END
is correct.
E:E-6057 PROGRAM NOTHING
A ladder is destroyed, so that it cannot be updated. Reenter the
E:E-6058 LADDER BROKEN
ladder.
E:E-6059 COIL NOTHING
Function instructions CALL and CALLU are incorrect.
E:E-6060 CALL CALLU FUNCTION MISSING Create function instructions CALL and CALLU on the second
level of a ladder or in a sub-program.
Function instruction CALL or CALLU is found between function
E:E-6061 COM FUNCTION MISSING (CALL SP) instructions COM (SUB9) and COME.
CALL and CALLU cannot be created between COM and COME.
The method of using function instruction JMP (SUB10) in a
E:E-6062 JMP FUNCTION MISSING (SP) sub-program is incorrect. Check that JMP is correctly paired with
JMPE (SUB30).
The method of using function instruction SP is incorrect. Check
E:E-6063 SUB PROGRAM MISSING
that SP is paired with SPEED correctly.
The same sub-program number already exists.
E:E-6064 SP NO. DUPLICATE
Change the sub-program number.
E:E-6065 SUB PROGRAM NOTHING Create a sub-program.
E:E-6066 END FUNCTION NOTHING Add the END instruction.
E:E-6067 SP FUNCTION MISSING
E:E-6068 LBL COUNT OVER Reduce the number of labels.
The same label number already exists.
E:E-6069 LBL NO. DUPLICATE
Change the label number.
Function instruction LBL specified by JMPB is not found. Add the
E:E-6070 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPB)
LBL function instruction.
Function instruction JMPB is found between function instructions
COM and COME. No jump can be made beyond COM and
E:E-6071 COM FUNCTION MISSING (JMPB) COME. Ensure that JMPB is not inserted between COM and
COME. Alternatively, also create specified function instruction
LBL between COM and COME.
The JMPB instruction allows a jump to be made to a
E:E-6072 JMPB FUNCTION MISSING sub-program only. Ensure that a jump is made to a point within a
sub-program.
Function instruction LBL, specified by JMPC, is not found. Add
E:E-6073 LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPC)
function instruction LBL.
Specified function instruction LBL is found between function
instructions COM and COME. A jump cannot be made to a point
E:E-6074 COM FUNCTION MISSING (LBL) between COM and COME. Ensure that LBL is not inserted
between COM and COME. Alternatively, also create function
instruction JMPC between COM and COME.
Function instruction JMPC is not specified in a sub-program.
E:E-6075 JMPC FUNCTION MISSING
Create function instruction JMPC in a sub-program.
Function instruction LBL, specified by function instruction JMPC,
E:E-6076 LBL FUNCTION MISSING (JMPC) is not specified at the second level of a ladder. Create function
instruction LBL at the second level of a ladder.
E:E-6077 An illegal program number is specified for Use a P address as the parameter of functional instruction ****.
the **** instruction.
E:E-6078 An illegal label number is specified for the Use a L address as the parameter of functional instruction ****.
**** instruction.
E:E-6080 LADDER ILLEGAL A ladder is incorrect. Reenter the ladder.

- 392 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

E:E-6090 RELAY OR COIL FORBIT An unnecessary relay or coil is set. Delete the relay or coil.
E:E-6092 HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL Connect the horizontal line of the net.
E:E-6093 FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL Connect the function instruction correctly.
E:E-6094 RELAY OR COIL NOTHING A relay or coil is missing. Add a relay or coil.
E:E-6095 VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL Connect the vertical line of the net.
The parameters of a function instruction are missing. Set the
E:E-6096 PARAMETER NOTHING
parameters.
E:E-6097 ADDRESS NOT DETECTED Set an address.
The net being edited has become larger than the edit buffer.
E:E-6100 NET TOO LARGE
Reduce the size of the net being edited.
E:E-6101 PLEASE COMPLETE NET
E:E-6102 LARGE NET APPEARED Reduce the size of the net.
E:E-6111 ERROR NET FOUND Modify the error net.
E:E-6115 PARA NO. RANGE ERR
E:E-6130 There is no CE instruction. Although the functional instruction CS is used, there is no
functional instruction CE that means the end.
E:E-6131 **** instruction can not be used excluding Use the functional instruction **** in the LEVEL2 or the
the 2nd level main program. subprogram.
E:E-6132 **** instruction can not be used in the Do not use functional instruction **** between COM and COME.
range controlled COM instruction.
E:E-6133 Another CS instruction can not be used in Use CS and CE in a pair. And don’t nest a pair of CS and CE.
the range of CS instruction.
E:E-6134 CM instruction must be used between CS Use functional instruction CM between CS and CE
and CE instruction.
E:E-6135 CE instruction must be used in CS Use CS and CE in a pair. And don’t nest a pair of CS and CE.
instruction and a pair.
E:E-6136 Use only CM instruction between CS and Do not use other instructions except the functional instruction CM
CE instruction. between CS and CE.
The ladder diagram is not modified, but an attempt was made to
E:E-6150 Ladder diagram has not been modified.
update or restore it.
E:E-6152 Ladder data write error.
E:E-6154 Temporary file load error.
Program read error.
E:E-6155 Allocate conventional memory.
Not enough program memory.
Program read error.
E:E-6156
Error status = ****
A selected program does not match the program in PMC
E:E-6160 The program is not corresponding memory. By specifying, loading, or by storing a correct program,
ensure a match with the program in PMC memory.
The online edit/input/output function (sequence program
load/store) is protected. Check the keep relay.
E:E-6183 This function is protected.
Display of the data table control screen is protected. Check the
keep relay.
E:E-6187 Write protect. The signal status is write-protected. Check the keep relay.
E:E-6197 INPUT NET TOO LARGE
Ladder diagram on the PMC side is being
E:E-6362
edited now.
The type of symbol specified as basic
E:E-6701
instruction is erroneous.
The output prohibition symbol was
E:E-6702
specified as the coil.

- 393 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

Error code Message Cause/action

The type of symbol specified as functional
E:E-6703
instruction is erroneous.
The output prohibition symbol was
E:E-6704
specified as the functional instruction.
The symbol of incorrect type was
E:E-6705
specified as the functional instruction.
E:E-6706 The address of symbols undefined.
This functional instruction cannot use the
E:E-6707
local symbol.
E:E-6708 The symbol is undefined.

12.2.6 Message Editing

Error code Message Cause/action

G:E-6000 Specify A address. Specify an A address like A0.0.
The characters you can use for addressing are the letter A, a
G:E-6001 Illegal address data.
period (.), and digits 0 to 9.
G:E-6002 Illegal range data. The maximum allowed A address is exceeded.
When the PMC model is PA3, full-size characters cannot be
G:W-7000 KANJI is not allowed
used.

12.2.7 Print

Error code Message Cause/action

H:F-2005 Source program has wrong file
H:F-2008 Cannot open **** file

12.2.8 Compile

Error code Message Cause/action

I:F-2100 Not enough disk space

I:F-2101 Out of memory

I:E-3100 **** read error The source program could not be read.
I:E-3101 **** write error The results of compilation could not be written.
I:E-3102 **** Source program name illegal. An invalid source program name was specified.
I:E-3103 **** Source program not found. The **** source program is not found.
I:E-3104 **** file not found
I:E-3105 **** Source program format is different. The format of the source program is FORMAT-A.
I:E-3106 **** file read error.
I:E-3107 System parameter read error. A source file containing system parameter data is missing.
I:E-3108 Title read error. A source file containing title data is missing.
I:E-3109 I/O module read error. A source file containing I/O module data is missing.
I:E-3110 Verification error An entered password does not match the set password.
This word can not be used as password.
I:E-3111 Try another password.
Try another word
Only alphabetical and numerical A password including other than alphanumeric characters was
I:E-3112
characters are allowed entered.
An instruction that cannot be handled with a selected type of
I:E-3200 There is an undefined instruction.
program is included.

- 394 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

There is no coil in the functional
I:E-3201 For a function instruction that requires a coil, no coil is set.
instruction which needs the coil.
In a parameter of the **** instruction, a numeric value outside the
I:E-3220 The **** parameter is out of range.
specifiable range is specified.
Program number is different from In a parameter of the sub-program start instruction SP, a program
I:E-3221
program name. number that does not match the file name is specified.
In a parameter of the **** instruction, a program number outside
An illegal program number is specified for
I:E-3222 the specifiable range or an address other than a program number
the **** instruction.
is specified.
In a parameter of the **** instruction, a label number outside the
An illegal label number is specified for the
I:E-3223 specifiable range or an address other than a label number is
**** instruction.
specified.
The contents of a ladder program are empty. The END1 or END2
I:E-3250 There is no LADDER program.
instruction is required.
The size of LADDER program is too The size of a ladder program exceeds the maximum specifiable
I:E-3251
large. size of a selected type of program.
I:E-3252 LADDER program is broken. An instruction is destroyed and unrecognizable.
The execution of the first level of the main program takes an
LADDER execution time at the 1st level is excessively long time, so that the ladder cannot be executed.
I:E-3253
too large. Reduce the first level or increase the value of the system
parameter by specifying a ladder execution time ratio.
The number of divisions of the second level of the main program
exceeded the maximum allowable value (99), so that the ladder
The number of division of LADDER
I:E-3254 cannot be executed. Reduce the size of the second level or
exceeds 99.
increase the value of the system parameter by specifying a
ladder execution time ratio.
SP instruction can not be used in the SP is the sub-program start instruction. SP cannot be used with a
I:E-3270
main program. main program.
SPE instruction can not be used in the SPE is the sub-program end instruction. SPE cannot be used
I:E-3271
main program. with a main program.
JMPC is an instruction for making a jump from a sub-program to
JMPC instruction can not be used in the
I:E-3272 the second level of the main program. JMPC cannot be used with
main program.
a main program.
No sub-program can be called from a level other than the second
CALL instruction can not be used
I:E-3273 level of the main program. So, the CALL instruction cannot be
excluding the 2nd level main program.
used.
No sub-program can be called from a level other than the second
CALLU instruction can not be used
I:E-3274 level of the main program. So, the CALLU instruction cannot be
excluding the 2nd level main program.
used.
There is no SP instruction at the top of Start a sub-program with the SP instruction used to specify the
I:E-3290
the subprogram. start of a sub-program.
There is no SPE instruction at the bottom End a sub-program with the SPE instruction used to specify the
I:E-3291
of the subprogram. end of a sub-program.
LADDER program exists beyond SPE SPE is the sub-program end instruction. After SPE, no instruction
I:E-3292
instruction. can be specified.
SP instruction is detected in the SP is the sub-program start instruction. SP cannot be specified in
I:E-3293
subprogram. the middle of a sub-program.
I:E-3310 There is no END1 instruction. At the end of the first level, the END1 instruction is missing.
I:E-3211 There is no END2 instruction. At the end of the second level, the END2 instruction is missing.
I:E-3312 There is no END3 instruction. At the end of the third level, the END3 instruction is missing.
LADDER program exists beyond END1 END1 is the end instruction for the first level. After END1, no
I:E-3313
instruction. instruction can be specified.

- 395 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

Error code Message Cause/action

LADDER program exists beyond END2 END2 is the end instruction for the second level. After END2, no
I:E-3314
instruction. instruction can be specified.
LADDER program exists beyond END3 END3 is the end instruction for the third level. After END3, no
I:E-3315
instruction. instruction can be specified.
LADDER program exists beyond END END is the end instruction for all ladder programs. After END, no
I:E-3316
instruction. instruction can be specified.
I:E-3317 END1 instruction can not be used. The END1 instruction is used at a level other than the first level.
The END2 instruction is used at a level other than the second
I:E-3318 END2 instruction can not be used.
level.
I:E-3319 END3 instruction can not be used. The END3 instruction is used at a level other than the third level.
I:E-3320 END instruction can not be used. The END instruction is used at the first level.
The COM instruction for starting a COM instruction control range
I:E-3330 There is no COME instruction. is defined, but the COME instruction for ending .the range is not
defined.
CALL instruction can not be used in the A sub-program cannot be called from within a COM instruction
I:E-3331
range controlled COM instruction. control range. So, the CALL instruction cannot be used.
CALLU instruction can not be used in the A sub-program cannot be called from within a COM instruction
I:E-3332
range controlled COM instruction. control range. So, the CALLU instruction cannot be used.
Another COM instruction can not be used In a COM instruction control range, the COM instruction for
I:E-3333
in the range controlled COM instruction. starting a control range is defined again.
COME instruction must be the pair with If a COM instruction control range is not started, the COME
I:E-3334
COM. instruction for ending a control range cannot be used.
If the end of a COM instruction control range is defined by
COME instruction is detected though the
I:E-3335 specifying the number of coils, the COME instruction for ending a
case of the coil number specification.
control range cannot be used.
The JMP instruction for specifying a jump start position is defined,
I:E-3340 There is no JMPE instruction.
but the JMPE instruction for specifying a jump end position is not.
Between a JMP instruction for specifying a jump start position
Another JMP instruction can not be used
I:E-3341 and a JMPE instruction for specifying a jump end position,
in the range of JMP instruction.
another JMP instruction is defined.
If the JMP instruction for specifying a jump start position is not
JMPE instruction must be the pair with
I:E-3342 defined, the JMPE instruction for specifying a jump end position
JMP.
cannot be used.
If a jump end position is defined by specifying the number of
JMPE instruction is detected though the
I:E-3343 coils, the JMPE instruction for specifying a jump end position
case of the coil number specification.
cannot be used.
The label **** for indicating the jump destination of a JMPB
I:E-3350 There is no label of ****.
instruction cannot be found.
At the jump destination of the LBL instruction, the same label
I:E-3351 The label of **** is used twice or more.
number **** is defined. Define a different label number.
The total number of LBL instruction jump destinations defined
I:E-3352 Too many labels. exceeded the maximum allocable value of a selected type of
program. Reduce the number of jump destinations defined.
The JMPB instruction cannot be used to make a jump from within
a COM instruction control range to an external point, or from a
The destination of JMPB instruction is point outside a COM instruction control range to a point within the
I:E-3353
beyond COM/COME instruction. range. The JMPB instruction can only be used to make a jump
from one position to another both within a COM instruction control
range or outside a COM instruction control range.
A step sequence program includes an instruction that cannot be
I:E-3400 There is an undefined instruction.
handled by a selected type of program, or a destroyed instruction.
Program number is different from In a parameter of program start instruction SP, a program
I:E-3420
program name. number that does not match the file name is specified.

- 396 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

An illegal step number is specified for the In the **** instruction, a step number outside the specifiable
I:E-3421
**** instruction. range or an address other than a step number is specified.
An illegal program number is specified for In the **** instruction, a program number outside the specifiable
I:E-3422
the **** instruction. range or an address other than a program number is specified.
An illegal label number is specified for the In the **** instruction, a label number outside the specifiable
I:E-3423
**** instruction. range or an address other than a label number is specified.
There is no SP instruction at the top of A sub-program must start with the SP instruction for specifying
I:E-3440
the subprogram. the start of a sub-program.
There is no SPE instruction at the bottom A sub-program must end with the SPE instruction for specifying
I:E-3441
of the subprogram. the end of a sub-program.
Step sequence program exists beyond SPE is the sub-program end instruction. After SPE, no instruction
I:E-3442
SPE instruction. can be specified.
SP instruction is detected in the SP is the sub-program start instruction. SP cannot be specified
I:E-3443
subprogram. within a sub-program.
The label **** is assigned for two or more At a jump destination, the same label number **** is defined.
I:E-3460
step programs. Define a different label number.
The total number of jump destinations defined exceeded the
I:E-3461 Too many labels. maximum allocatable value for step sequence editing. Reduce
the number of jump destinations defined.
The label representing the jump destination of a DSTEP
I:E-3462 DSTEP instruction without DLBL.
instruction cannot be found.
The step number **** is assigned for two For a different step, the same step number **** is used. Define a
I:E-3480
or more step programs. different step number.
The total number of message data characters exceeded the
I:E-3570 The size of the message data is too large. maximum allowable value of a selected type of program. Reduce
the total number of characters.
The total size of the ladders and step sequences exceeded the
Data too large.(LADDER + step
I:E-3600 maximum allowable value of a selected type of program. Reduce
sequence)
the size of the ladders/step sequences.
The total size of the messages, symbols, comments, ladders, and
Data too large.(message + symbol +
I:E-3601 step sequences exceeded the maximum allowable value of a
comment + LADDER + step sequence)
selected type of program. Reduce the amount of data.
Because the sub-program file with number **** is not included in
I:E-3620 There is no subprogram ****. the selected program, the file cannot be called. Create a
sub-program with number ****.
A sub-program exists, but the END instruction is specified at the
LADDER/step sequence program exists end of level 2.
I:E-3640
beyond END instruction. The END instruction is specified at the end of a sub-program, but
a sub-program with a greater program number exists.
Label **** representing the jump destination of the JMPC
I:E-3650 There is no label of ****.
instruction cannot be found.
In the main program, the same label number **** is defined as the
I:E-3651 The label of **** is used twice or more. jump destination of the LBL instruction. Define a different label
number.
The total number of LBL instruction jump destinations defined in
the main program exceeded the maximum allowable value of a
I:E-3652 Too many labels.
selected type of program. Reduce the number of jump
destinations defined.
JMPC is the instruction for making a jump from a sub-program to
The label of **** to refer exists in another
I:E-3653 the second level of the main program. Define the jump
level.
destination label **** at the second level.

- 397 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

Error code Message Cause/action

The jump destination label **** of the JMPC instruction is
The label of **** exists in the range of the
I:E-3654 specified within a COM instruction control range. Specify the label
COM instruction.
**** outside the control range.
I: E-6270 CS instruction can not be used excluding Use functional instruction CS in the LEVEL2 or the subprogram.
the 2nd level main program.
I: E-6271 CM instruction can not be used excluding Use functional instruction CM in the LEVEL2 or the subprogram.
the 2nd level main program.
I: E-6272 CE instruction can not be used excluding Use functional instruction CE in the LEVEL2 or the subprogram.
the 2nd level main program.
I: E-6330 CS instruction can not be used in the Do not use functional instruction CS between COM and COME.
range controlled COM instruction.
I: E-6331 CM instruction can not be used in the Do not use functional instruction CM between COM and COME.
range controlled COM instruction.
I: E-6332 CE instruction can not be used in the Do not use functional instruction CE between COM and COME.
range controlled COM instruction.
I: E-6360 There is no CE instruction. Although the functional instruction CS is used, there is no
functional instruction CE that means the end.
I: E-6361 Another CS instruction can not be used in Use CS and CE in a pair. And don’t nest a pair of CS and CE.
the range of CS instruction.
I: E-6362 CM instruction must be used between CS Use functional instruction CM between CS and CE
and CE instruction.
I: E-6363 CE instruction must be used in CS Use CS and CE in a pair. And don’t nest a pair of CS and CE.
instruction and a pair.
I: E-6365 Use only CM instruction between CS and Do not use other instructions except the functional instruction CM
CE instruction. between CS and CE.
I: E-6751 File I/O error.
I: E-6752 The range of the assignment is illegal.
I: E-6753 The range of assignment overlaps.
I: E-6754 The allocation range is not enough.
The title data which could not be display
Title data includes characters such as kana characters. Those
I:W-4100 on the CNC was replaced with space
characters are replaced with blank characters.
code.
A system parameter is set to use the FS0 operator's panel, but
addresses (such as a key input address and LED output address)
Illegal OP.PANEL( PARAMETER ).
I:W-4101 are not set.
Proceed to compile using 'NO'
Compilation is performed, assuming that the FS0 operator's
panel is not used.
I:W-4102 Editing sub-program has not completed. A sub-program is being edited. Complete the editing.
A sub-program with the same number exists (for example,
Multiple sub-programs with same number
I:W-4103 P1.#LA and P1.#SS). The ladder program is compiled first
exist.
(P1.#.LA, for example).
The source-program is FORMAT-B. This
I:W-4104 parameter is ignored: FORMAT-B outputs symbols/comments at all times.
SYMBOL/COMMENT
The source-program is FORMAT-B. This FORMAT-B data does not include a net comment. Setting this
I:W-4105
parameter is ignored: NET COMMENT item has no effect.
A ladder program is empty. The ladder program is not output to a
I:W-4200 There is no LADDER program.
memory card format file.
LADDER execution time at the 1st level is Reduce the first level, or increase the value of the system
I:W-4201
too large. parameter by specifying a ladder execution time ratio.

- 398 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

The end of a COM instruction control range cannot be defined
The coil number specification of COM using the number of coils. The specification of the number of coils
I:W-4202
instruction is not allowed. is ignored, and the end of a COM instruction control range is
determined based on the COME instruction.
The end position of a jump cannot be defined using the number
The coil number specification of JMP
I:W-4203 of coils. The specification of the number of coils is ignored, and
instruction is not allowed.
the end position is determined based on the JMPE instruction.
A ladder program includes a pointer to a lost net comment
I:W-4204 Unused NET COMMENT pointer found. character string. The pointer is not output to a memory card
format file.
A step sequence program is empty. The step sequence program
I:W-4400 There is no step sequence program.
is not output to a memory card format file.
The symbol data which could not be Symbol data includes special characters that cannot be displayed
I:W-4500 display on the CNC was replaced with by the CNC. Those characters only are replaced with blank
space code. characters.
The comment data which could not be Comment data includes special characters that cannot be
I:W-4501 display on the CNC was replaced with displayed by the CNC. Those characters only are replaced with
space code. blank characters.
Comment data size exceeds 64KB. The total number of comment data characters exceeded 65535.
I:W-4502 Symbol/comment data is not converted to None of the symbols/comment data is output to a memory card
the Memory card format file. format file.
The character * in the comment may not The comment uses a character code not available to the CNC
I:W-4503
be displayed on the CNC. and, therefore, may not be displayed.
Double-sized space character in
e comments uses a double-byte space character, and the
I:W-4504 comment was changed to two
character is replaced by two single-byte space characters.
single-sized speces.
A symbol that exceeds the character length limit (six characters)
I:W-4505 Too long strings for symbol data.
is found, and is deleted. (The comment remains valid.)
The message data which could not be Message data includes special characters that cannot be
I:W-4570 display on the CNC was replaced with displayed by the CNC. Those characters only were replaced with
space code. blank characters.
The **** sub-program is not called from any program, but is
I:W-4600 Unreferenced subprogram ****.
output to a memory card format file.
I:W-4601 $ number * is duplicated.
I:W-6500 Address is illegal.
The original symbol may be unable to
I:W-7500
display by decompiling.
Assignment was started from address
I: W-7551
boundary.

12.2.9 Decompile

Error code Message Cause/action

There is a mismatch between the function codes in a memory
Function code error
card format file and the function codes of the system. DATA is for
J:F-2100 DATA:***************
the file side, and DATA is for the system side. Install the correct
SYSTEM:************
system.
PMC series is different from **** Memory The type of memory card format file **** differs from the type of a
J:F-2101
card format file. selected program. Select a correct program.
The specified memory card format file **** is not found. Prepare
J:F-2102 **** Memory card format file not found.
a file.
Execution is rejected because the password is incorrect. Enter
J:F-2103 Mismatched password.
the correct password.

- 399 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

Error code Message Cause/action

The memory card format file **** could not be read. The file is
J:F-2104 **** Memory card format file read error.
invalid.
J:F-2105 **** source program write error. The source program **** could not be written.
An instruction that cannot be handled by a selected type of
J:E-3100 There is an undefined instruction.
program, or a destroyed instruction is included.
There is no SPE instruction at the bottom A sub-program in a selected program does not end with the SPE
J:E-3101
of the subprogram. instruction.
The number of symbol data items in a selected program
The number of symbol data in source
J: E-3200 exceeded the maximum allowable value defined with the system.
program exceeds the limit.
Reduce the number of symbol data items.
The ID code defined at address **** in the I/O module data
J:E-3300 ID code (I/O module) error.(address ****) cannot be recognized correctly. Prepare a correct memory card
format file.
The number of steps of a sub-program in a ladder program
The size of LADDER program is too exceeded the maximum allowable value of a selected type of
J:W-4100
large. program, but the sub-program is output to the source program.
Make corrections by ladder editing as required.
**** net comment pointers not corresponding to net comment
**** unused NET COMMENT pointer character strings were detected. The net comment pointers are
J:W-4101
found. not output to the source program. Make corrections by ladder
editing as required.
**** net comment character strings not corresponding to net
**** unused NET COMMENT strings comment pointers were detected. The net comment character
J:W-4102
found. strings are deleted. Make corrections by ladder editing as
required.
**** duplicate net comment pointers were detected. Character
**** duplicated NET COMMENT pointer
J:W-4103 strings are copied so that the same net comment character string
found.
corresponds to the same net comment pointer.
The step number of **** is used twice or The same step number **** is used for different steps. Make
J:W-4104
more. corrections by step sequence editing.
Some sub-programs are protected. These
J:W-4105
sub-programs have not been decompiled.
During symbol data merge processing, the total number of data
The number of symbol data exceeds the items at address ****/symbol **** exceeded the maximum
J: W-4200
limit.(address, symbol) allowable value defined with the system. Data beyond the symbol
data is not output to the source program.
**** duplicate symbol data items defined for the same address
**** symbol data at duplicated address
J:W-4201 were detected. Either source data or memory card data is valid
found.
according to the setting of the symbol merge option.
The symbol character string defined in the symbol data at
Same symbol exists.(address **** symbol
J:W-4202 address ****/symbol **** is already defined at another address.
****)
The symbol data is not output to the source program.
The symbol data at address ****/symbol **** is determined to be
invalid by a symbol character string check based on the IEC
J: W-4203 Illegal symbol.(address, symbol) standard. The symbol data is not output to the source program.
If the check option in the %%%FLSET.CNF setting file is
deselected, the symbol data is output to the source program.
The address in the symbol data containing symbol **** cannot be
J: W-4204 Symbol data address illegal.(symbol) recognized correctly. The symbol data is not output to the source
program.
The specification of an operator's panel in the system parameter
Illegal operator panel (system parameter).
J:W-4300 data is invalid. Execution is continued, assuming that the
Proceed to decompile using 'NO'.
specification of the operator's panel is invalid.

- 400 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

If the PMC version of PMC-RC is less than 3, R/D extended
This Memory card format file is not for
J:W-4301 addresses are not supported. Change the PMC version by
expanded R/D address.
system parameter editing.
The header section of the memory card format file **** is invalid,
J:W-4800 **** Memory card format file illegal.
but execution is continued.
The default setting was used.
Settings in the option file of a selected program cannot be read.
J:W-4900 'OPTION' read failed.
Prepare a file, or correct the settings. Execution is made possible
by option resetting.
Symbol characters are not checked.
Settings in the %%%FLSET.CNF file cannot be read. Prepare a
J:W-4901 '%%%FLSET.CNF' read failed.
file, or correct the settings. Execution is possible if symbol
characters are not checked.
J: W-7200 Prog. is out of range.(Prog.)
J: W-7201 The symbol does not exist.(Address)
The symbol has exceeded the limitation
J: W-7202
length of characters.(Prog., Symbol)
The symbol used the limitation
J: W-7203
character.(Prog., Symbol)
The paragraph of comment exceeded the
J: W-7204
number of limitations.(Prog.:$, Symbol:$)
The comment has exceeded the limitation
J: W-7205
length of characters.(Comment)
The comment used the limitation
J: W-7206
character.(Comment)
J: W-7210 Address and type does not exist.
This symbol cannot be defined as the
J: W-7211
local symbol.(Prog., Symbol, Address)
The symbol of the same name as the
J: W-7212 already inputted global symbol cannot be
inputted.(Prog., Symbol)"
The symbol of the same name as the
J: W-7213 already inputted local symbol cannot be
inputted.(Prog., symbol)
J: W-7214 Prog. is illegal.(Prog.)
J: W-7215 Attribute is illegal.(Attribute)
Address and Attribute are
J: W-7216
contradictory.(Address, Attribute)
Address and Type are
J: W-7217
contradictory.(Address, Type)
J: W-7218 Type does not exist.
J: W-7219 Type is illegal.(Type)

12.2.10 Mnemonic Conversion

Error code Message Cause/action

K:F-2000 Insufficient memory.
K:F-2001 Insufficient disk space.
K:F-2006 Not found **** file.
K:F-2100 Not found * file.
K:F-2101 Set-up file broken.
K:F-2102 Illegal option(s).

- 401 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

Error code Message Cause/action

K:F-2103 Insufficient parameter(s). System parameter /function instruction data is insufficient.
K:F-2104 Too many parameters. Too many parameters are specified in a function instruction.
K:F-2105 Illegal Option-specified file.
K:F-2106 Illegal Idcode.
K:F-2107 Expected terminator.
PMC series is different from
K:F-2108
Source-program.
K:F-2109 Expected Idcode.
K:F-2110 Illegal parameter(s).
Create temporary file(s) in current
K:F-2111
directory.
Not specified environmental variable
K:F-2112
'TMP'.
K:F-2113 Illegal name of Set-up file.
K:F-2114 Not found Set-up file.
K:F-2115 Expected '/PC' option.
K:F-2116 **** executable file not found.
K:F-2117 Input data illegal.
K:F-5001 Prog. is illegal.(Prog.)
K:F-5002 Prog. is out of range.(Prog.)
**** file cannot execute.
K:E-3100
The file cannot be executed.
The data of **** is broken.
K:E-3101
* Symbol & Comment data broken.
When the format of %%%FLSET.CNF is FORMAT-A/B, the
K:E-3102 Cannot be handle data type '%@2-C'.
mnemonic of the extended symbol %@2-C was converted.
Cannot convert files of the PMC series
set up the system.
K:E-3103
The model set with the system cannot
be converted.
K:E-3104 Cannot overwrite existing data.
Cannot specify bit address of A bit address was specified in a byte address parameter of a
K:E-3105
parameter. function instruction.
Cannot specify byte address on basic
K:E-3106 A byte address was specified in a basic instruction.
instruction.
Cannot specify output module at input An output module is specified at the input address of I/O module
K:E-3107
address. data.
Cannot specify input module at output An input module is specified at the output address of I/O module
K:E-3108
address. data.
Cannot specify the address prohibited A parameter prohibition address was specified in the address
K:E-3109
using as parameter. parameter of a function instruction.
K:E-3110 Cannot specify the bit address.
K:E-3111 Cannot specify the byte address.
An output prohibition address was specified in the output address
K:E-3112 Cannot specify the input address.
parameter of a function instruction.
Cannot specify the input address with
K:E-3113 An output prohibition address was specified for a coil.
coil.
An odd-numbered prohibition address was specified as an
K:E-3114 Cannot specify the odd address.
odd-numbered address.
A system parameter includes a numeric value that is not a
K:E-3117 Expected a multiple of 2.
multiple of 2.

- 402 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

A system parameter includes a numeric value that is not a
K:E-3118 Expected a multiple of 5.
multiple of 5.
K:E-3119 Expected address. A basic instruction has no address.
K:E-3120 Expected function number.
K:E-3121 Expected parameter(s). A function instruction has no parameter.
The identification code is not found in
K:E-3122
mnemonic file.
An invalid address was specified as a symbol/ comment
K:E-3123 Illegal address.
data/message setting address.
An invalid address was specified in the data table of a function
K:E-3124 Illegal address in data table.
instruction.
An invalid address was specified in the address parameter of a
K:E-3125 Illegal address of parameter.
function instruction.
Invalid character data is contained in a system parameter, title
K:E-3126 Illegal character(s).
data, symbol/comment data, or message data.
Illegal Source-program name.
K:E-3127 The specified source program name is
illegal.
The specified mnemonic file name is
K:E-3128 illegal.
Illegal Mnemonic file name.
Illegal parameter number.
K:E-3129 An invalid data number was specified in a system parameter.
Illegal title number.
K:E-3130 Illegal value of parameter. An invalid data number was specified as a data identifier.
K:E-3131 Illegal value. Invalid numeric data was specified in a system parameter.
An invalid value was specified for the base data of I/O module
K:E-3132 Illegal value in base data.
data.
An invalid value was specified for the group data of I/O module
K:E-3133 Illegal value in group data.
data.
An invalid value was specified for the slot data of I/O module
K:E-3134 Illegal value in slot data.
data.
An invalid numeric value was specified in the data table of a
K:E-3135 Illegal value of parameter.
function instruction.
K:E-3136 Include KANA or KANJI character(s).
K:E-3137 Input mnemonic file name
K:E-3138 Input the source program name.
The conversion data type number is
illegal.
K:E-3139
The data type number is illegal
Invalid a number of convert data.
K:E-3140 Invalid function's name. An invalid function instruction name was specified.
K:E-3141 Invalid function number.
K:E-3142 Invalid module name. The module name of I/O module data is invalid.
Return status from SPAWN is
K:E-3143
E2BIG(=7).
The model of the specified source
program is illegal.
K:E-3144
Invalid PMC series of specified
Source-program.
An invalid character follows a system parameter, title data,
K:E-3145 Invalid qualifier.
symbol/comment data, ladder, or I/O module data.

- 403 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

Error code Message Cause/action

There is no option by which **** file is
K:E-3146 specified.
Lack of **** file
K:E-3147 Message data too large.
Specified Mnemonic file is not found.
K:E-3148
Mnemonic file not found.
System parameter /function instruction parameters are
K:E-3149 Not enough parameter(s)
insufficient.
K:E-3150 Not found base data. The base data of I/O module data is missing.
K:E-3151 Not found group data. The group data of I/O module data is missing.
K:E-3152 Not found module name. The module name of I/O module data is missing.
K:E-3153 Not found slot data The slot data of I/O module data is missing.
K:E-3154 Not found **** Process interface file.
Not found **** Source-program
K:E-3155
management file.
K:E-3156 Not found **** SUB program file.
K:E-3157 Out of address limits. The address of mnemonic data/I/O module data was specified.
An address outside the specifiable range was specified in the
K:E-3158 Out of address limits in data table.
data table of a function instruction.
An address outside the specifiable range was specified as a
K:E-3159 Out of address limits of address.
message setting address.
An address outside the specifiable range was specified in a
K:E-3160 Out of address limits of parameter
parameter of a function instruction.
A numeric value outside the specifiable range was specified in a
K:E-3161 Out of parameter value.
parameter of a function instruction.
A numeric value outside the specifiable range was specified in a
K:E-3162 Out of value.
system parameter.
Out of value in base data. A value outside the specifiable range was specified for the base
K:E-3163
Not found slot data. data of I/O module data.
A numeric value outside the specifiable range was specified in
K:E-3164 Out of value in data table.
the data table of a function instruction.
A value outside the specifiable range was specified for the group
K:E-3165 Out of value in group data.
data of I/O module data.
A value outside the specifiable range was specified for the slot
K:E-3166 Out of value in slot data.
data of I/O module data.
K:E-3167 Please shorten file name.
K:E-3168 Process error
Specified source program is not found.
K:E-3172
Source-program not found.
Specified source program is not found.
K:E-3173 The specified conversion data is not
found.
Specify the value( Slot ) except 0 at I/O
K:E-3174
UNIT-B *.
K:E-3176 Symbol data count over.
K:E-3177 Symbol data not found. Comment data is set, but symbol data is not.
Data containing a symbol or comment only was converted to an
K:E-3178 Symbol or comment data not found.
address.
The same group base and slot are In I/O module data, the same number is specified for group,
K:E-3179
already specified. base, and slot data.
K:E-3180 Too large of total comment data.

- 404 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

The length of a system parameter, message data, or title data
K:E-3181 Too long strings.
exceeded the maximum allowable value.
The number of characters on one line of mnemonic data, a
mnemonic, or I/O module data in a system parameter, message
K:E-3187 Too mamy characters in 1 line.
data, title data, or symbol/comment exceeded the maximum
allowable value.
K:E-3188 Too many parameters. Too many parameters are set for a function instruction.
The total of the base and slot values of the I/O module data
K:E-3189 Total value of base and slot is over.
exceeded the default.
K:E-3190 Undefined instruction. Data includes an undefined instruction.
K:E-3191 Unexpected address. An address was specified where no address is required.
Parameters were specified in a function instruction that requires
K:E-3192 Unexpected parameter(s).
no parameters.
A nonexistent data number was specified as a system
K:E-3193 Unknown data number.
parameter/data identifier.
K:E-3194 Data entry error. Symbol/comment data could not be registered.
Include KANA or KANJI character(s) in
K:E-3195 Full-size characters cannot be used for symbol data.
symbol data.
K:E-3196 Include KANA or KANJI character(s).
K: E-3197 Column number overlaps in option Confirm the contents of the option setting of "%@3-E".
setting.
K: E-3198 The range of the assignment is illegal. Confirm the range of automatic address assignment.
K: E-3199 The range of assignment overlaps. Confirm whether the range of automatic address assignment
overlaps others.
K: E-3200 The allocation range is not enough. Increase the range of automatic address assignment.
K: E-3201 The label number exceeded the limit. The label is not assigned because limitation of the number of
labels was exceeded.
K: E-3202 Automatic assignment of the address Compile the ladder and perform automatic address assignment.
was unsuccessful.
K:E-6001 Cannot be handle data type '%@2-D'.
K:E-6101 The address of symbol is undefined.
The limitation character is used for the
K:E-6201
symbol.
This functional instruction cannot use
K:E-6202
the local symbol.
K:E-6301 The address of symbol is undefined.
K:W-4100 Comment data not found. Data consisting of symbols only was converted to an address.
System parameters, message data, title data,
K:W-4101 Data not found.
symbols/comments, and I/O module data are not found.
K:W-4102 Deleted KANJI characters.
K:W-4103 Expected control condition(s). No control condition is set for a function instruction.
K:W-4104 Illegal characters are specified at ****.
Invalid data was specified in ****.
Illegal OP.PANEL( PARAMETER ). The system parameter OP.PANEL (parameter) is invalid.
K:W-4105
Proceed to convert with using 'NO'. Conversion is performed assuming "NO."
The symbol data does not satisfy the standard (check level-1).
K:W-4106 Illegal symbol.
(FORMAT-C)
Comment data including full-size characters was converted
Include KANA or KANJI character(s) in
K:W-4108 without selecting the full-size character conversion option (J
comment data.
option).
Logical operated with unused An operation was performed with a register not entered in the
K:W-4109
register(s). ladder data.
K:W-4110 Logical product remains in register(s). A register was not output to ladder data.

- 405 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

Error code Message Cause/action

Message data include KANA OR KANJI Message data **** includes full-size/half-size katakana
K:W-4111
characters at ****. characters.
Not all necessary control conditions are set for a function
K:W-4112 Not enough control condition(s).
instruction.
K:W-4113 Not found data at **** address. At address ****, no message is defined.
Not found parameter numbered ****.
K:W-4114
Not found title numbered $.
K:W-4116 Not found **** PMC-OS file..
K:W-4117 Not used net comment pointer exist. $
K:W-4118 Output unused register(s).
K:W-4119 Overwrote existing data.
An invalid character follows the end ID code (%) of each data
K:W-4120 Invalid qualifier. item (system parameter, message data, title data, ladder,
symbol/comment, and I/O module data).
K:W-4121 Registers overflow.
Upon conversion to FORMAT-B, data that does not belong to the
Some garbage data are found at end of first to third levels or any sub-programs was found.
K:W-4122
ladder data. This message is output when data is found after the last SPE
instruction.
In the I/O module data, the same number is specified for group,
K:W-4123 Specify same group base and slot.
base, and slot data.
Specify same number( Group ) at I/O
K:W-4124
UNIT-B as I/O UNIT-A.
Specify the value( Base ) except 0 at
K:W-4125
I/O UNIT-B.
The following data of **** were deleted
K:W-4126
because of exceeding the limit.
K:W-4127 Too many control conditions. Too many control conditions are set for a function instruction.
Coils were specified for a function instruction that requires no
K:W-4128 Unexpected coil(s).
coils.
A basic instruction was specified for a function instruction that
K:W-4129 Unexpected control condition(s).
requires no control condition.
Redefinition of address data. A symbol definition is made at more than one location for the
same address. If the start ID code of symbol data is %@2, no
K:W-4130
Illegal net comment pointer. **** duplicate definition is allowed. The definition or definitions made
later are ignored.
The same symbol data was specified for different addresses.
K:W-4131 Redefinition of symbol data.
The symbol data defined later is replaced with blank characters.
FORMAT-A/B allows up to 6 characters.
K:W-4132 Too long strings for symbol data. FORMAT-C allows up to 16 characters.
Symbol data is replaced with blank characters.
A maximum of 30 characters can be specified.
K:W-4133 Too long strings for comment data.
Comment data is replaced with blank characters.
For one address, a different symbol is specified at more than one
location. (With FORMAT-C, the same symbol may be specified
K:W-4134 symbol data already exist.
at more than one location.)
The symbol data specified later is replaced with blank characters.
For a relay comment at one address, a different character string
is specified at more than one location. (With FORMAT-C, the
same character string may be specified at more than one
K:W-4135 relay comment data already exist.
location.)
The relay comment data specified later is replaced with blank
characters.

- 406 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

For a coil comment at one address, a different character string is
specified at more than one location. (With FORMAT-C, the same
K:W-4136 coil comment data already exist. character string may be specified at more than one location.)
The coil comment data specified later is replaced with blank
characters.
For a comment title at one address, a different character string is
specified at more than one location. (With FORMAT-C, the same
K:W-4137 comment title data already exist.
character string may be specified at more than one location.)
The comment title data specified later is deleted.
The character string of a relay comment is longer than 16
Too long strings for relay comment
K:W-4138 characters. With FORMAT-C only, relay comment data is
data.
replaced with blank characters.
The character string of a coil comment is longer than 30
K:W-4139 Too long strings for coil comment data. characters. With FORMAT-C only, coil comment data is replaced
with blank characters.
The character string of a comment title is longer than 30
K:W-4140 Too long strings for comment title data. characters. With FORMAT-C only, comment title data is replaced
with blank characters.
The symbol replaced by the specified
K:W-4143 character was not output because it
was duplication definition.
K: W-7000 The space code of the symbol data was The white-space character of a symbol was replaced with the
replaced with the specification specified character.
character.
This symbol cannot be defined as the
K:W-7001
local symbol.(Symbol, Address)
The space code exists in the symbol
K:W-7002
data.
The symbol of the same name as the
K:W-7003 already inputted local symbol cannot be
inputted.(Prog., symbol)
K:W-7004 Too long strings for third comment data.
Too long strings for fourth comment
K:W-7005
data.
K:W-7006 Third comment data already exist.
K:W-7007 Fourth comment data already exist..
It skipped because there was no
K:W-7008
symbol.
The symbol that used the limitation
K:W-7009
character was skipped.(Prog., Symbol)
The symbol that used the limitation
K:W-7010
character was replaced.(Prog., Symbol)
K:W-7011 Address and Type does not exist.
K:W-7012 Type is illegal.(Type)
Address and Type are
K:W-7013
contradictory.(Address, Type)
Address or Type is illegal.(Address,
K:W-7014
Type)"
K:W-7015 Type was changed to LABEL.
K:W-7016 Type cannot be changed.
K:W-7017 Type was changed to PROG.
K: W-7018 Address is illegal. Confirm the address and change into the right address.

- 407 -
12.ERROR MESSAGES B-63484EN/05

Error code Message Cause/action

K: W-7019 Address and Symbol type is undefined. Confirm the type of the address and the symbol and change into
the right address or the right type.
K: W-7020 The quotation mark is not a pair. Confirm the quotation mark (the double quotation mark or the
single quotation mark).
K: W-7021 Address is undefined. Add the address.
K:W-7201 The undefined symbol is used.

12.2.11 Input/Output

Error code Message Cause/action

L:E-6000 I/O Error. Recheck the setting of MONIT on the PMC.
L:E-6001 The system failed in making the thread
L:E-6002 PMC parameter file read error
L:E-6003 PMC parameter file write error
PMC parameter file write error
L:E-6004
Insufficient disk space
This file format is not PMC parameter
L:E-6005
file format
Can not load PMC parameter from PMC
L:E-6006
side(Not EDIT mode)
Can not store PMC parameter to PMC
L:E-6007
side(Not emergency stop nor PWE = 1)

12.2.12 Online

Error code Message Cause/action

The F-ROM is abnormal. Replace the F-ROM.
N:E-3001 Flash ROM Write error
Contact your FANUC service center.
N:E-3002 Flash ROM Read error
The F-ROM is abnormal. Replace the F-ROM.
N:E-3003 Flash ROM Erase error
Contact your FANUC service center.
N:E-3004 Flash ROM Area error
N:E-3005 Flash ROM Program nothing
A sequence program is larger than the F-ROM. Increase the size
N:E-3006 Flash ROM Size error of the F-ROM.
Try the CONDENCE function, which is an offline function.
The CNC is not placed in the emergency stop state. Place the
N:E-3007 Flash ROM Not EMG stop
CNC in the emergency stop state.
A sequence program on the PMC is destroyed. Reenter the
N:E-3008 Flash ROM Program data error
sequence program.
N:E-3009 Flash ROM Access request error
N:E-3011 User C program error occurs on PMC.
N:E-3012 Flash ROM Another used
N:E-3013 Flash ROM Command error
N:E-3014 Flash ROM No space
N:E-3015 Flash ROM File error
N:E-3016 Flash ROM File not match
N:E-3017 Flash ROM Un-known F-ROM
N:E-3018 Flash ROM I/O error
N:E-3019 Flash ROM Undefine error code

- 408 -
B-63484EN/05 12.ERROR MESSAGES

Error code Message Cause/action

The user switched from online editing to the signal trigger stop
N:E-3300 Signal trigger unavailable
function.
The user switched to online editing during signal trigger
N:E-3302 Reject Signal trigger
execution.
Cannot be changed Signal trigger is The user attempted to modify parameter settings during signal
N:E-3307
executing trigger execution.
N:E-3390 Program is running
N:E-3410 Function param is out of range
Signal Analysis function is not The PMC is of a type that does not support the signal analysis
N:E-6000
supported function.
During signal trace function execution, the signal analysis
N:E-6001 Signal Trace function is running
function cannot be executed.
N:E-6002 Address Error A specified address is invalid.
When the condition is <Trigger-ON> or <Trigger-OFF>, set a
N:E-6003 No Trigger Address
trigger address.
[About]/[Before] is illegal on [Start] When the condition is <Start>, <About> and <Before> cannot be
N:E-6004
selected selected as a trigger mode.
N:E-6005 No Signal Address No sampling address is set.
N:E-6006 Sampling Time Error: An invalid sampling time is set.
N:E-6041 The communication to PMC is not ready The connection with the NC is disconnected.

- 409 -
APPENDIX
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX A.CABLE FOR DATA TRANSFER

A CABLE FOR DATA TRANSFER

When data is transferred from the personal computer (PC) to the CNC,
the cable shown below is used.

A02B-0200-K814

PC side CNC side

9-pin, female 25-pin, male

CD(1)
(2)SD
RD(2)
(3)RD
SD(3)
(6)DR
ER(4)
(7)SG
SG(5)
(8)CD
DR(6)
(5)CS
RS(7)
(4)RS
CS(8)
(20)ER

- 413 -
B.CONVERSION USING A SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERTER APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

B CONVERSION USING A SIGNAL

ADDRESS CONVERTER
Table B
Converter file name Applicable function Reference document
FS0T_CNV.SYM PMC-L/M/M(MMC) → PMC-SA1/SA3/SB3/SC3/ FANUC PMC-MODEL
(FS0-T) SB4/SC4/SB5/SB6 PA1/PA3/SA1/SA2/SA3/SB/
(FS16/18/20-T) SB2/SB3/SB4/SB5/SB6/SB7/
FS0M_CNV.SYM PMC-L/M/M(MMC) → PMC-SA1/SA3/SB3/SC3/ SC/SC3/SC4/NB/NB2/NB6
(FS0-M) SB4/SC4/SB5/SB6 Programming Manual
(FS16/18/20-M) (Ladder Language)
PM-C_CNV.SYM PMC-P → PMC-PA3 B-61863E
(Power Mate-MODEL C) (Power Mate-MODEL D/F/H)

The converter files are stored in the subdirectory \APPENDIX of the

system floppy (Vol. 5).

Example of operation: PMC-P → PMC-PA3

<1> By using Ladder Editing Package (Windows), convert a program

of the PMC-P model (conversion source) to a mnemonic file. (A
in the figure below)
<2> By using Ladder Editing Package (Windows), create a program
of the PMC-PA3 model (conversion destination).
<3> Convert the program of <2> to mnemonics. (B in the figure
below)
<4> Start a text editor commercially available, then open the
mnemonic file (conversion destination) created in <3>.
<5> Replace the symbol data of the mnemonic file (conversion
destination) with the converter file. (C in the figure below)
<6> Replace the ladder data of the mnemonic file (conversion
destination) with the ladder data of the mnemonic file
(conversion source) created in <1>. (D in the figure below)
<7> Close the mnemonic file (conversion destination) on the text
editor.
<8> By using Ladder Editing Package (Windows), convert the
mnemonic file (conversion destination) of <7> to a source
program (with the program created in <2> left open).
<9> Delete all symbol comment data.

- 414 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX B.CONVERSION USING A SIGNAL ADDRESS CONVERTER

A Conversion source Converter file B Conversion destination

mnemonic file (PMC-P) PMC-C_CNV.SYM mnemonic file (PMC-PA3)

%@A %@2 %@A

%@0 G0004.3 G68.3 %@0
1 2048 G0005.0 G95.0 2 BINARY
% G0005.2 G95.2 3 NO
%@1 G0005.3 G95.3 4 PMC-PA1
% ….. C %
%@2 ….. Insertion %@1
% X1027.4 X23.4 %
%@3 X1027.5 X23.5 %@2
RD X21.4 X1027.6 X23.6 %
WRT G121.4 X1027.7 X23.7 %@3
RD. NOT X22.3 % %
WRT. NOT G122.3 %@4
SUB 1 %
SUB 2 %@5
% D %
%@E Insertion %@E

- 415 -
C.LANGUAGE PROGRAM LINK FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

C LANGUAGE PROGRAM LINK FUNCTION

This function is used to unite a load module created in C language
with a memory card file created on Ladder Editing Package
(Windows) or loaded from the PMC.

1 Select [File] - [Open Program], and open the program with which
you want to unite a load module.
2 Select [Tool] - [Link of language programs...].

3 The [Link of language programs] dialog box appears.

- 416 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX C.LANGUAGE PROGRAM LINK FUNCTION

4 Select the load module file you want to unite.

5 Click the "OK" button to unite the load module with the
program.

NOTE
1 If not using C language functions, you need not
unite programs.
2 This function is available to models
PMC-SC3/SC4/SC4 (STEP SEQ.)/QC/NB/NB2.

- 417 -
D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

D MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE

CREATION TOOL
This is a PC software tool for creating a memory card format file only
for PMC message from source files, which is same as a mnemonic file
format, for multi-language PMC message on Ladder Editing Package
(Windows), or for creating a source file from the memory card format
file.
To enhance message display using DISPB functional instruction, a
memory card format file only for PMC message (an option file in
CNC Flash-ROM only for message display which is
importable/exportable via PCMCIA memory card) is added. The
language of message actually displayed out of the memory card
format file can be alternated synchronously with CNC Language
parameter setting.
To create a memory card format file only for PMC message, a PC
software tool “Multi-language PMC Message Creation Tool” is
provided. European special character can be edited directly on the text
editor without code input (@0D-01@), if the encoding of a text file is
Unicode (UTF-16). About usable characters on a source file, please
refer to “D.1.2 Usable characters”
This PC software tool is included in the installation disk of Ladder
Editing Package (Windows). And this tool can be used only with the
personal computer in which Ladder Editing Package (Windows) is
installed.
This tool can be executed by command line, so that the process of
generating the file can be automated by batch command.
Personal computer
Source files (text file format) of
Multi-language PMC message
German message (Text file)
Command prompt
Spanish message (Text file)
cd \pmc_message
fpmcmsg germsg.txt + spamsg.txt /o=msg_mcard

Multi-language
PMC Message CNC
Creation TOOL PCMCIA
PMC sequence program
memory card
(Memory card format file)

Multi-language Multi-language
PMC message file PMC message file
(Memory card format file) (Memory card format file)

- 418 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL

Applied PMC type

• 30i-A PMC
• 30i-A PMC (EXT)
• 30i-A PMC (2ND)
• 30i-A PMC (2ND, EXT)
• 30i-A PMC (3RD)
• 30i-A PMC (3RD, EXT)
• 31i-A PMC
• 31i-A PMC (EXT)
• 31i-A PMC (2ND)
• 31i-A PMC (2ND, EXT)
• 31i-A PMC (3RD)
• 31i-A PMC (3RD, EXT)
• 32i-A PMC
• 32i-A PMC (EXT)
• 32i-A PMC (2ND)
• 32i-A PMC (2ND, EXT)
• 32i-A PMC (3RD)
• 32i-A PMC (3RD, EXT)

CNC Option
• 1st-path PMC message multi-language display 128K :
A02B-0303-S977#128K
• 1st-path PMC message multi-language display 256K :
A02B-0303-S977#256K
• 2nd-path PMC message multi-language display 128K :
A02B-0303-S978#128K
• 3rd-path PMC message multi-language display 128K :
A02B-0303-S979#128K

NOTE
The number of messages and F-ROM size.
When F-ROM size is 128KB.
- PMC for Series 30i/31i/32i without extended function : 473 messages or more
- PMC for Series 30i/31i/32i with extended function : 435 messages or more·
When F-ROM size is 256KB.
- PMC for Series 30i/31i/32i without extended function : 946 messages or more
- PMC for Series 30i/31i/32i with extended function : 870 messages or more
Above calculation is the case where:
The maximum size of one message data is as follows (When you use a global
symbol).
- PMC for Series 30i/31i/32i without extended function : Maximum 277 bytes =
(Language ID 3bytes) + (Symbol 16bytes) + (Message string 255bytes) +
(delimiter 3bytes)
- PMC for Series 30i/31i/32i with extended function : Maximum 301 bytes =
(Language ID 3bytes) + (Symbol 40bytes) + (Message string 255bytes) +
(delimiter 3bytes)

- 419 -
D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

Operating system
Windows 2000 Professional
Windows XP Professional
Windows XP Home Edition
Windows 98 SE
Windows Me

NOTE
1 In Windows 2000/XP, ASCII and Unicode(UTF-16)
can be used in the encoding of a text file.
2 In Windows 98/Me, ASCII is recommended in the
encoding of a text file.

- 420 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL

Overview
Personal computer
Multi-language message source files

German message (Text file) In the encoding of a text file, both ANSI and
Unicode (UTF-16) are supported.
If the encoding of a text file is Unicode(UTF-16),
Japanese message (Text file)
european special character can be edited
directly.

Command prompt
Multi-language
PMC Message cd \pmc_message
Creation TOOL fpmcmsg germsg.txt + jpnmsg.txt /o=msg_mcard

Multi-language PMC message file

(Memory card format file)

PCM/CIA card

PMC sequence program CNC

(Memory card format file) Multi-language PMC message file
Title data (Memory card format file)
CNC display
System parameter German message language

IO module data German

Japanese message
Message
Symbol/Comment Japanese display
data screen
English
Ladder data (Other)

Message data

NOTE
1 Multi-language PMC message file can be loaded from CNC boot menu or PMC I/O
screen through PCM/CIA card.
2 Multi-language PMC message can be modified without modifying the PMC
sequence program.
3 When the alarm number of the same A address in PMC sequence program and
multi-language PMC message file is not corresponding, alarm number of PMC
sequence program is displayed
4 In message data of PMC sequence program, please prepare the message number
whenever you should display the message number. And please specify the same
message number in multi-language PMC message file.

- 421 -
D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

D.1 FILE FORMAT OF A MESSAGE SOURCE FILE

This section describes the source file format of multi-language PMC

message.

File format
File type : Text file
Encoding : ANSI / Unicode(UTF-16)

A message source file for multi-language display

(Identification code)
(Title information)
(Message data 1)
(Message data 2)
(Line comment)
(Message data 3)
:
(Message data n)
(Identification code)

(a) Identification code

Specify the start/end of message data.
Start : %@4-D
End : :%

(b) Title information

Title information is enclosed in double quotation marks.
Maximum length: 256 characters
Title information can be omitted.

The character string in title information is considered to be a

language of OS excluding the part input by the character-code
(@02xxxx01@, @0Dxxxx01@, e.t.c.).

(c) Message data

Language ID Address (Symbol) Message string

Ex.) $0 %A0000.0 DOOR OPEN
$0 %A0000.1 EMERGENCY STOP

The delimiter of each column is a white space character or a TAB

code.

- 422 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL

(i) Language ID
A string of message is displayed according to the display
language of CNC by specifying language ID.

Language ID
0: English 1: Japanese 2: German
3: French 4: Traditional Chinese 5: Italian
6: Korean 7: Spanish 8: Dutch
9: Danish 10: Portuguese 11: Polish
12: Hungarian 13: Swedish 14: Czech
15: Simplified Chinese

(Example)
English -> $0 (symbol or address) ‘(A string of message)’
German -> $2 (symbol or address) ‘(A string of message)’
Korean -> $6 (symbol or address) ‘(A string of message)’
Simplified Chinese -> $15 (symbol or address) ‘(A string
of message)’

(ii) Address (Symbol)

Please describe % at the top of the address. The symbol is
available only for PMC type of the extended function.

Method of specifying address

Method of specifying PMC type without PMC type with
Example when describing
address extended function extended function
Address (with %) %A0000.0
Global symbol DOOR_OPEN X
Local symbol %P1.ON_DELAY_100MS X
TIMER.ON_DELAY_100MS X
Address without % A0123.4 X
: Possible to specify, X: Impossible to specify
: Address with % is strongly recommended.

(iii) Message string

Please refer to “D.1.2 Usable characters”.

(d) Line comment

Line comment is enclosed in double quotation marks.
Line comment is not created into a multi-language PMC message
file (memory card format file).

- 423 -
D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

D.1.1 Sample File

(a) Encoding: ANSI
%@4-D
“Create：11-Dec-2003 Edition：0002
Multi-language message English / German / Japanese”
“English message”
$0 %P1.ALM1001 1001 FUSE IS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER)
$0 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON
$0 ALM1003 1003 TIME OVER (M100-M109)
“German message”
$2 %P1.ALM1001 1001 FUSEIS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER)
$2 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON
$2 ALM1003 1003 TIME @0DB101@VER (M100-M109)
“Japanese message”
$1 %P1.ALM1001 1001 ﾋｭｰｽﾞ切れ(ｻｰｼﾞｷﾗｰ)
$1 %A000.1 1002 外部非常停止になりました
$1 ALM1003 1003 ﾀｲﾑｵｰﾊﾞｰ (M100-M109)
%

NOTE
European special character can be entered by
code input (@0D-01@) on a text editor not capable
of Unicode.

(b) Encoding: Unicode (UTF-16)

%@4-D
“Create：11-Dec-2003 Edition：0002
Multi-language message English / German / Japanese”
“English message”
$0 %P1.ALM1001 1001 FUSE IS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER)
$0 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON
$0 ALM1003 1003 TIME OVER (M100-M109)
“German message”
$2 %P1.ALM1001 1001 FUSEIS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER)
$2 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON
$2 ALM1003 1003 TIME ÕVER (M100-M109)
“Japanese message”
$1 %P1.ALM1001 1001 ﾋｭｰｽﾞ切れ(ｻｰｼﾞｷﾗｰ)
$1 %A000.1 1002 外部非常停止になりました
$1 ALM1003 1003 ﾀｲﾑｵｰﾊﾞｰ (M100-M109)
%

NOTE
1 European special character (umlaut) can be edited
directly by using appropriate text editor capable of
Unicode (UTF-16)
2 When managing the message source files using
other application software such as version
management tools, such software is required to
support the encoding of ANSI and Unicode
(UTF-16).

- 424 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL

D.1.2 Usable Characters

The types of characters usable in message text vary depending on the

PMC model. See the following table for details.

Table D.1.2 (a)

Characters that can be entered
Alphabetical
Japanese characters European Simplified Korean
PMC Numerical characters
special Chinese (Hangul)
characters Upper Lower JIS level-1/-2 Half-size
characters characters characters
case case kanji set kana
30i-A PMC
30i-A PMC (EXT)
30i-A PMC (2ND)
30i-A PMC (2ND, EXT)
30i-A PMC (3RD)
30i-A PMC (3RD, EXT)
31i-A PMC
31i-A PMC (EXT)
31i-A PMC (2ND)
A A A B A B A B
31i-A PMC (2ND, EXT)
31i-A PMC (3RD)
31i-A PMC (3RD, EXT)
32i-A PMC
32i-A PMC (EXT)
32i-A PMC (2ND)
32i-A PMC (2ND, EXT)
32i-A PMC (3RD)
32i-A PMC (3RD, EXT)
A: Usable
B: Some characters cannot be displayed on CNC side. Multi-language PMC message creation tool cannot check
whether they can be displayed.

(a) Input method of European special characters

(i) Direct input (Only when the encoding of a text file is
Unicode.)
(ii) Code input
Please input the code of european special character between
@0D and 01@.
Ex.) TIME @0DB101@VER

About the code of European special characters, please see “Table

D.1.2(b)”

(b) Input method of JIS level 1/2 kanji set

(i) Direct input using Japanese IME
(ii) Code input
Please input JIS code between @02 and 01@.
Ex.) @0248733E6F44643B5F01@

(c) Input method of half size kana

(i) Direct input using Japanese IME
(ii) Code input
Please input half size kana code between @ and @.
Ex.) @CBADB0BDDE@

- 425 -
D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

(d) Input method of Simplified Chinese characters

(i) Direct input using Chinese IME

(e) Input method of Korean characters

(Only when the encoding of a text file is Unicode.)
(i) Direct input using Korean IME

Table D.1.2 (b) Code table of European special character (1/2)

Code Char. Code Char. Code Char. Code Char.

A0 A8 B0 B8

A1 A9 B1 B9

A2 AA B2 BA

A3 AB B3 BB

A4 AC B4 BC

A5 AD B5 BD

A6 AE B6 BE

A7 AF B7 BF

- 426 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL

Table D.1.2 (b) Code table of European special character (2/2)

Code Char. Code Char. Code Char. Code Char.

C0 C8 D0 D8

C1 C9 D1 D9

C2 CA D2 DA

C3 CB D3 DB

C4 CC D4 DC

C5 CD D5

C6 CE D6

C7 CF D7

- 427 -
D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

Table D.1.2 (c) Supported Korean (Hangul) characters on CNC

- 428 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL

D.1.3 Entering Special Characters

D.1.3.1 New line character

Input method of new line character in the source file.

(a) Direct input

Press <Enter> key

(b) Code input

Please input “@0A@”

D.1.3.2 Numeric data

Input method of numerical data in the source file

(a) Signed
[Ibid, ]
Address where the numerical data is stored
Set binary data in the specified address.
The specifying of address using symbol is not
supported.

Set the "bid" data after the letter "I":

b: Number of bytes (1, 2, or 4)
i: Number of digits in the integer part (0 to 8)
d: Number of digits in the decimal part (0 to 8)

(b) Unsigned
[Ubid, ]
Address where the numerical data is stored
Set binary data in the specified address.
The specifying of address using symbol is not
supported.

Set the "bid" data after the letter "U".

b: Number of bytes (1, 2, or 4)
i: Number of digits in the integer part (0 to 8)
d: Number of digits in the decimal part (0 to 8)

NOTE
1 Sum of integer part digits and fractional part digits
must be within 8.
2 Blank is displayed for digits exceeding 8 digits.
3 Do not use any space between the brackets, [ ].

- 429 -
D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

Example)
The following message includes 3 digits tool number at the
spindle and the offset data ( . ) for this tool. And these data
are contained in memory address of 2bytes:
SPINDLE TOOL NO. = [I230, ]
OFFSET DATA = [I212, ∆∆∆∆]

D.1.3.3 Reservation character

@ is used to input codes (New line character and e.t.c.). And square
brackets ( [] ) are used to input numeric data.
The above 3 characters are treated as a reservation character in the source
file.
To display the reservation character in error message, you have to
describe the reservation character as listed below.

(a) @ => @40@

(b) [ => @5B@

(c) ] => @5D@

Example)
“@Fuse [100mA] is blown.” is as follows.
@40@Fuse @5B@100mA@5D@ is blown.

- 430 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL

D.2 USAGE

This section describes the usage of multi-language PMC message

creation tool.

This tool is included in the installation disk of Ladder Editing Package

(Windows). But this tool can be executed by command line, so that
the process of generating the file can be automated by batch
command.

1) Creating a memory card format file of multi-language PMC

message file from source files.

Fmsgcnv [drive:][path]message-file1 [+ [drive:][path]message-file2] [+ …]

[/m=[drive:][path]lad-mcard-file]
[/l=[drive:][path]lad-file]
[/p=pmc-path-number]
/o=[drive:][path] mcard-file

Parameter
[drive:][path]message-file1, [drive:][path]message-file2, …
Specify the location and name of a multi-language message file.
Two or more multi-language message files can be specified by using +.
When only the file name is specified, the multi-language message file is
considered to be on current folder.

/m=[drive:][path]lad-mcard-file
To confirm the multi-language message not correctly displayed, please specify
this parameter.
In lad-mcard-file, specify the name of a sequence program (memory card
format file) related to source files.
When only the file name is specified, lad-mcard-file is considered to be on current
folder.
This parameter can be omitted.

/l=[drive:][path]lad-file
To confirm the multi-language PMC message not correctly displayed, please specify
this parameter.
In lad-file, specify the name of .LAD file related to source files.
When only the file name is specified, lad-file is considered to be on current folder.
This parameter can be omitted.
Please do not execute this tool while the .LAD file specified by /l parameter
has been opened by FANUC LADDER-III.

/p=pmc-path-number (1=1st-path PMC, 2=2nd-path PMC, 3=3rd-path PMC)

Specify the pmc path number of the separated message file.
When this parameter is omitted, multi-language PMC message file of 1st-path
PMC is created.

/O=[drive:][path]mcard-file
Specify the location and name of a multi-language PMC message file.
When only the file name is specified, a multi-language PMC message file is created
on current folder.

- 431 -
D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

(2) Creating a source file from a multi-language PMC message file.

Fmsgcnv [drive:][path]mcard-file
[/unicode]
/o=[drive:] [path]message-text-file

Parameter
[drive:][path]mcard-file
Specify the location and name of a multi-language PMC message file.
When only the file name is specified, a multi-language PMC message file is
considered to be on current folder.

/unicode
The encoding of a source file becomes to Unicode.
When this parameter is omitted, the encoding of a source file becomes to
ANSI.

/o=[drive:][path]message-text-file
Specify the location and name of a source file.

NOTE
1 FPMCMSG.EXE exists on the install folder of
Ladder Editing Package (Windows).(A default
folder is “C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC
Programmer\LADDER EDITING PACKAGE”.)
2 Usually, FPMCMSG.EXE sends the output of
command to your screen.To redirect the output of a
command, use the greater-than sign (>).The
greater-than sign (>) sends the output of a
command to a file or a device, such as a printer.
3 In creating a multi-language PMC message file
from source files, line comment except title
information is not created into a multi-language
PMC message file.

- 432 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL

[Example –1]
Create a multi-language PMC message file “msg_mcard” from a
source file “multi_msg.txt”.
Multi-language message text file (ANSI)
(multi_msg.txt)
%@4-D
“Create：11-Dec-2003 Edition：0002
Multi-language message English / German / Japanese”
“English message” 1st-path PMC
$0 ALM1001 1001 FUSE IS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER) multi-language
$0 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON
PMC message file
$0 LEVEL1.ALM10031003.TIME OVER (M100-M109)
“German message”
(msg_mcard)
$2 ALM1001 1001 FUSEIS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER)
$2 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
$2 LEVEL1.ALM10031003 TIME @0DB101@VER (M100-M109)
“Japanese message”
$1 ALM1001 1001 ﾋｭｰｽﾞ切れ(ｻｰｼﾞｷﾗｰ)
$1 %A000.1 1002 外部非常停止になりました
$1 LEVEL1.ALM10031003 ﾀｲﾑｵｰﾊﾞｰ (M100-M109)
%

- Command
cd \pmc_message
fmsgcnv multi_msg.txt /o=msg_mcard

[Example –2]
Create a multi-language PMC message file of 2nd-path PMC from
source files divided by a language.
English message text file (ANSI)
%@4-D
$0 ALM1001 1001 FUSE IS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER)
$0 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON
$0 %P7.ALM1003 1003.TIME OVER (M100-M109)

German message text file (Unicode)

%@4-D 2nd-path PMC
$2 ALM1001 1001 FUSEIS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER) multi-language
$2 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON PMC message file
$2 %P7.ALM1003 1003 TIME ÕVER (M100-M109) (msg_mcard)

Japanese message text file (ANSI(SHIFT-JIS))

%@4-D
$1 ALM1001 1001 ﾋｭｰｽﾞ切れ(ｻｰｼﾞｷﾗｰ)
$1 %A000.1 1002 外部非常停止になりました
$1 %P7.ALM1003 1003 ﾀｲﾑｵｰﾊﾞｰ (M100-M109)

- Command
cd \pmc_message
fmsgcnv engmsg.txt + germsg.txt + jpnmsg.txt /p=2
/o=msg_mcard

- 433 -
D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

[Example-3]
Create a source file “multi_msg.txt” from a multi-language PMC
message file “msg_mcard”.

Multi-language PMC message text file (ANSI)

(multi_msg.txt)
%@4-D
“Create：11-Dec-2003 Edition：0002
Multi-language message English / German / Japanese”
1st-path PMC $0 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
multi-language ON
PMC message file $0 ALM1001 1001 FUSE IS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER)
(msg_mcard) $0 %P3.ALM1003 1003 EMERGENCY STOP
$1 %A000.1 1002 外部非常停止になりました
$1 ALM1001 1001 ﾋｭｰｽﾞ切れ(ｻｰｼﾞｷﾗｰ)
$1 %P3.ALM1003 1003 非常停止です
$2 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
$2 ALM1001 1001 FUSEIS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER)
$2 %P3.ALM1003 1003 TIME @0DB101@VER(M100-M109)

- Command
cd \pmc_message
fmsgcnv msg_mcard /o=multi_msg.txt

[Example-4]
Create a source file “multi_msg.txt” with Unicode (UTF-16) from a
multi-language PMC message file “msg_mcard”.

Multi-language PMC message text file (Unicode)

(multi_msg.txt)
%@4-D
“Create：11-Dec-2003 Edition：0002
3rd-path PMC Multi-language message English / German / Japanese”
multi-language $0 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON
PMC message file $0 ALM1001 1001 FUSE IS BLOWN (SURGE KILLER)
(msg_mcard) $0 LEVEL2.ALM1003 1003 TIME OVER(M100-M109)
$1 %A000.1 1002 外部非常停止になりました
$1 ALM1001 1001 ﾋｭｰｽﾞ切れ(ｻｰｼﾞｷﾗｰ)
$1 LEVEL2.ALM1003 1003 ﾀｲﾑｵｰﾊﾞｰ (M100-M109)
$2 %A000.1 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
$2 ALM1001 1001 FUSEIS BLOWN. (SURGE KILLER)
$2 LEVEL2.ALM1003 1003 TIME ÕVER(M100-M109)
%

- Command
cd \pmc_message
fmsgcnv msg_mcard /unicode /o=multi_msg.txt

- 434 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL

D.3 ERROR MESSAGES

This section describes the error messages that may be displayed by
Multi-language PMC Message Creation Tool.

D.3.1 Error List

Message Cause & Remedy

filename(line number): Message file symbol The message was defined by the symbol which does not exist.
undefined (Symbol:****)
(Ex.)When the message is defined for the undefined symbol “ALM1001”.

Message file symbol undefined (Symbol:ALM1001)

* ”Symbol undefined” is checked when /m or /l parameter is specified.

filename(line number): Message file symbol The message was defined by the symbol which is not A address.
invalid (Symbol:****, Address:****)
(Ex.) When the address of symbol “ALM1001” is R0.1.

Message file symbol invalid(Symbol:ALM1001,

Address:R0000.1)

* ”Symbol invalid” is checked when /m or /l parameter is specified.

filename(line number): Message file address The message character string has already been defined in symbol ****
duplicate (Symbol:****, Address:****) (or Address:****).

(Ex.) When two messages are defined in A0000.0 (The address of

symbol ”ALM1003” is A0000.0)

Message file address duplicate (Address:A0000.0)

Message file address duplicate (Symbol:ALM1003,
Address:A0000.0)

* ”Address duplicate” is checked when /m or /l parameter is specified.

filename(line number): Message file number Message number of the ladder program is not corresponding to message
error (Ladder:mmmm, Source:nnnn) number of the source file. When displaying this message, message
number of the ladder program is used. (mmmm and nnnn are message
numbers.)
(Ex.) In the sequence program, the message number in A0000.0 is 1001.
In the source program, the message number in A0000.0 is 1234.
(The message number 1001 is displayed on the CNC screen.)

Message file number error (Ladder:1001, Sorce:1234)

* ”Number error” is checked when /m or /l parameter is specified.

filename(line number): Illegal address An illegal address was specified.
filename(line number): Illegal language ID. An illegal language ID was specified.
filename(line number): There is a character The character which cannot be displayed on CNC is included in the
which cannot be displayed on CNC. message character string . The character which cannot be displayed is
replaced with '?', and output to the memory card format file.
filename(line number): Title information size The maximum size of title information is 256 bytes.
over

- 435 -
D.MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION TOOL APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

Message Cause & Remedy

Command line error. The mistake is found in the command line. Please check the command
“(command line character string)” line character string.(Example: There are the same two parameters or
more, etc)
Invalid parameter (/l, /m) /l parameter and/m parameter is specified at the same time.
Please specify only either parameter.
“LAD filename” /l paremeter invalid A memory card format file in the specified LAD file does not exist. Please
compile the source program.
“filename” file open error The specified file in the command line is not found. Or it can not be
opened.
“filename” Illegal file format The specified file is not a source file, a memory card format file or a LAD
file.
“filename” unsupported PMC type The PMC type of the file specified by /m or /l parameter does not support
“PMC message multi-language display function”.
“filename” Expected identification code Identification code is not found in the message source file.
"%@4-D"
“filename” Illegal file format The specified file is not a source file, a memory card format file or a LAD
file.
filename(line number): The number of 16 languages or less can be made. The message of language ID** is not
maximum languages was exceeded. output.
(Language ID:**)

- 436 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX E.THE DATA FORMAT OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE

E THE DATA FORMAT OF THE EXTERNAL

SYMBOL FILE
Convert the symbol and comment data to CSV (Comma Separated
Value format), and add identification code at the top/bottom of the
file.

• Identification code
It is the character string which starts with %. The external
symbol file needs identification code ("%@2-E") for the
symbol/comment of CSV.

Table E (a)
Identification code Meaning
%@2-E(Option) Symbol and comment (CSV file)
% End of data

- 437 -
E.THE DATA FORMAT OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

E.1 OPTION OF IDENTIFICATION CODE

Specify the column of the symbol/comment in the parenthesis

after %@2-E.

Table E.1 (a)

30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/
Option Description Remarks Extended
32i-A
function
SYM= Specify a column no. of symbol 1st column when omitted Available Available
SCP= Specify a column no. of symbol scope Symbol scope is global when Not
Available
(LEVEL1->L1, LEVEL2->L2, P0001->P1,,). omitted available
TYP= Specify a column no. of symbol type 3rd column when omitted Not
Available
(BOOL/BYTE/WORD/DWORD) available
ADR= Specify a column no. of address 4th column when omitted Available Available
CM1= Specify a column no. of comment 1 The comment1, 2, 3, and 4 are
Available
CM2= Specify a column no. of comment 2 not read when omitted.
Available
CM3= Specify a column no. of comment 3 Not
CM4= Specify a column no. of comment 4 available
SEP= Specify a character of delimiter Delimiter is comma when
Available Available
omitting
+ Plus is used to connect strings of two or Example : CM1=5+10
Available Available
more comment columns
JOI= Specify a character to connect strings of Strings of two or more columns
two or more comment columns. are directly connected when Available Available
omitted
LBL The first effective line is a column label When LBL exists, the conversion
definition line. of the first line in effective data is Available Available
skipped.
(white- Delimiter of option setting
Available Available
space)
O: Available X: Not available

NOTE
1 If unsupported option is specified, warning will be
displayed, and the option is disregarded.
2 If you use the quotation mark, please put the whole
option among them.
(Example) "%@2-E(....)" or '%@2-E(....)'
" (the double quotation mark) is
omissible.

- 438 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX E.THE DATA FORMAT OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE

The contents of option when Output

The identification code of the external symbol file is decided by
existence of specification of an extended function.

• In 30i/31i/32i-A
Table E.1 (b)
Identification code
%@2-E(SYM=1 ADR=2 CM1=3 CM2=4)
%

(Example output)
The symbol is the 1st row, the address is the 2nd row, the
comment1 is the 3rd row and the comment2 is outputted to
the 4th row.

%@2-E(SYM=1 ADR=2 CM1=3 CM2=4)

%@2-E(SYM=1 ADR=2 CM1=3 CM2=4)

STOP,Y0.0,Output Line No.43,Stop signal on
POWER_OFF,X32.0,Input Line No.183,Power off status
DOOR,X32.1,Input Line No.184,Safety door open
%

• In 30i/31i/32i-A Extended function

Table E.1 (c)
Identification code
%@2-E(SYM=1 SCP=2 TYP=3 ADR=4 CM1=5 CM2=6 CM3=7
CM4=8)
%

(Example output)
The symbol is the 1st row, the address is the 2nd row, the
type is the 3rd row, the program is the 4th row, the
comment1 is the 5th row and and the comment2 is outputted
to the 6th row.

%@2-E(SYM=1 ADR=2 TYP=3 SCP=4 CM1=5 CM2=6)

%@2-E(SYM=1 ADR=2 TYP=3 SCP=4 CM1=5 CM2=6)

STOP,Y0.0,BOOL,,Output Line No.43,Stop signal on
POWER_OFF,X32.0,BOOL,,Input Line No.183,Power off status
DOOR,X32.1,BOOL,,Input Line No.184,Safety door open
%

- 439 -
E.THE DATA FORMAT OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

E.2 ABOUT THE CHARACTER OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL

FILE
• About the unusable character of the external symbol file
In the 30i/31i/32i-A Extended function, if the following character
is used for the symbol, the symbol is not read.
Unusable characters for the %$
first character (Example) %SYMBOL $SYMBOL
Unusable characters Space, Full-size Japanese character,
:(Colon) ;(Semicolon) .(Period)

• About the export of an external symbol file

When you use '(single quotation mark), "(double quotation mark),
and $ (dollar) characters in the symbol or the comment, it is
outputted to the external symbol file as follows.
Table E.2 (a) Comment data
Screen External
display symbol Remarks
(Comment) file
' $' $ is added.
$ $$ $ is added.
" """" " is added and double quote the whole
comment with ".
, "," Double quote the whole comment with ".
Table E.2 (b) Symbol data
Screen External
display symbol Remarks
(Symbol) file
' ' The same
$ $ The same
" """" " is added and double quote the whole
comment with ".
, "," Double quote the whole comment with ".

• About the import of an external symbol file

When you use '(single quotation mark), "(double quotation mark),
and $ (dollar) characters in the symbol or the comment, it is
necessary to write to the external symbol file as follows.
Table E.2 (c) Comment data
External symbol Screen display
Remarks
file (Comment)
$' ' $' is replaced with '
$$ $ $$ is replaced with $
"""" " """" is replaced with "
"," , "," is replaced with ,
Table E.2 (d) Symbol data
External symbol Screen display
Remarks
file (Symbol)
' ' The same
$ $ The same
"""" " """" is replaced with "
"," , "," is replaced with ,

- 440 -
B-63484EN/05 APPENDIX E.THE DATA FORMAT OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE

E.3 COMPATIBILITY OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE

To read the external symbol file of 30i/31i/32i-A in 30i/31i/32i-A extended

function

- Operation
1 Display the export screen in 30i/31i/32i-A, and output the
external symbol file.
%@2-E(SYM=1 ADR=2 CM1=3 CM2=4)
STOP,Y0.0,Output Line No.43,Stop signal on
POWER_OFF,X32.0,Input Line No.183,Power off status
DOOR,X32.1,Input Line No.184,Safety door open
%

2 Display the import screen in 30i/31i/32i-A extended function,

and input the external symbol file.
The following types are set by the address if TYP option is not
specified.
Bit address BOOL
Byte address BYTE
L address LABEL
P address PROG

About the unusable character of the symbol

The symbol is not read if the following unusable character is
used for the symbol.
Unusable characters %$
for the first character (Example) %SYMBOL $SYMBOL
Unusable characters Space, Full-size Japanese character,
:(Colon) ;(Semicolon) .(Period)

- 441 -
E.THE DATA FORMAT OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE APPENDIX B-63484EN/05

To read the external symbol file of 30i/31i/32i-A extended function in

30i/31i/32i-A

- Operation
1 Display the export screen in 30i/31i/32i-A extended function.
Check Performing automatic address assignment. Output the
external symbol file.
2 Display the import screen in 30i/31i/32i-A, and input the external
symbol file.
3 When reading the external symbol file for 30i/31i/32i-A, there
are the following limitations.

Table E.3 (a) Limitations

Items Contents
The symbol The symbol is not read.
character is over Reads the address and the comment, when there is the
17 characters. comment.
The comment Reads to until 30 characters.
character is over The 1st comment and the 2nd comment are read as the
31 characters. comment of 30 characters.
The 3rd comment and the 4th comment are not read.
Local symbol The local symbol is not read.
Only the global symbol is read.
Automatically Cannot read the symbol of only the address character.
assigned When you output the external symbol file, assign the
address address using the automatic address assignment
function.

- 442 -
B-63484EN/05 INDEX

INDEX
Changing Signal Addresses and Function Instruction
<A>
Parameters in the Display Window...........................80
ABOUT SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA ...................... 330
Changing the ladder editing mode...................................86
ABOUT THE CHARACTER OF THE EXTERNAL
CHECKING DUPLICATE COIL .................................166
SYMBOL FILE ...................................................... 440
Checking Syntax ...........................................................124
About the Deletion of the Unused Net Comment.......... 149
Checking the Number of Program Steps .........................82
About the Distinction of Symbol and Address.............. 333
CLEARING PMC AREAS ...........................................319
About the Symbol Type ................................................ 333
Collective Display...........................................................68
ACTIVATING THE I/O LINK..................................... 320
Collective display function............................................345
Add New Symbol and Comment................................... 336
Comment of Contact and Coil.......................................343
Adding Ladder Subprograms .......................................... 54
COMPARING WITH PMC ..........................................270
Adding Page Breaks........................................................ 60
COMPATIBILITY OF THE EXTERNAL SYMBOL
Adding Step Sequence Subprograms ............................ 125
FILE ........................................................................441
Addition of Symbol/Comment and Net comment ......... 225
COMPILATION ................................................... 203, 362
Address Decision .......................................................... 358
COMPILATION AND DECOMPILATION ................202
ALL format ................................................................... 242
Compile.........................................................................394
AUTOMATIC ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
Conversion by Changing System Parameters................381
FUNCTION ............................................................ 356
CONVERSION USING A SIGNAL ADDRESS
AUTOMATIC COMPILATION AND
CONVERTER.........................................................414
DECOMPILATION................................................ 213
CONVERTING FROM DOS-VERSION FANUC
Automatic input of the CTR parameter of a functional
LADDER-II ............................................................378
instruction ............................................................... 107
CONVERTING MNEMONIC FILES TO SOURCE
Automatic input of the TMR parameter of a functional
PROGRAMS...........................................................223
instruction ............................................................... 106
CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS.................377
Automatic Input of Timer, Counter, Rising/Falling-edge
CONVERTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS BETWEEN
Numbers.................................................................. 105
PMC MODELS.......................................................381
AUTOMATIC NUMBERING OF TMRB/ TMRBF/
CONVERTING SOURCE PROGRAMS TO
DIFU/DIFD............................................................. 217
MNEMONIC FILES...............................................220
Automatic Sampling Function at Power-On ................. 328
Converting Step Sequence Programs between Different
Automatic Signal Sampling Function at Power-On ...... 318
Models ....................................................................384
Automatic Trace Function at Power-On........................ 311
CONVERTING STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS TO
<B> MNEMONIC FILES.....................................................
BASICS........................................................................... 11 CONVERTING TO DOS-VERSION FANUC
Beginning of Parallel Branch ........................................ 121 LADDER-II ............................................................380
Beginning of Selective Branch...................................... 120 CONVERTING TO MNEMONIC................................360
CONVERTING TO SOURCE PROGRAMS ...............359
<C>
Converts to the External Symbol File ...........................221
C ADDRESS (COUNTER)........................................... 369
Counter..........................................................................292
CABLE FOR DATA TRANSFER................................ 413
CREATING AND EDITING SEQUENCE
Changing Contacts and Coils in the Display Window ........
PROGRAMS.............................................................19
Changing Ladder Programs............................................. 39
Cut, Copy and Paste of Symbol or Comment Data .......338
Changing Ladder Programs on the Display Window ...... 86

i-1
INDEX B-63484EN/05

<D> EXECUTING AND STOPPING SEQUENCE

D ADDRESS (DATA TABLE) .................................... 370 PROGRAMS...........................................................272
Data for PMC control software ..................................... 294 Executing collective display............................................72
Data Table ..................................................................... 295 EXECUTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS....................273
DECOMPILATION .............................................. 208, 363 Executing the signal trigger stop function.....................280
Decompile ..................................................................... 399 Export of the External Symbol file................................163
Deleting collective display extraction conditions............ 74 EXPORTING PROGRAMS .........................................159
Deleting Ladder Subprograms......................................... 55 EXTENDED SYMBOL/COMMENT FUNCTION......329
Deleting Net Comments .................................................. 59
Deleting Nets................................................................... 62
<F>
File388
Deleting Page Breaks ...................................................... 61
FILE FORMAT OF A MESSAGE SOURCE FILE......422
Deleting Step Sequence Subprograms........................... 126
FORMAT OF EXTERNAL SYMBOL FILE ...............245
Deleting Symbol and Comment Data............................ 338
Function Symbols..........................................................386
Deleting Symbol or Comment Data ................................ 97
Device Selection ............................................................. 27 <G>
DIAGNOSIS ................................................................. 275 [Gridline Format] Screen...............................................318
Display Items ................................................................ 307
DISPLAYING VERSION INFORMATION .................. 18
<H>
Duplicate Coil Screen ................................................... 166 How to Add Sub-program .............................................350
How to Change Symbol or Address ..............................343
<E> How to Create Ladder Program.....................................341
Edit Toolbar .................................................................... 17 How to Display and Modify Ladder Program ...............340
[Edit] Screen ................................................................. 277 How to View whole Program ........................................340
EDITING I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT.................... 141
EDITING LADDER DIAGRAMS ......................... 31, 340
<I>
EDITING MESSAGES................................................. 134 I/O module ....................................................................241

Editing Net Comments .................................................... 56 I/O Module Editing .......................................................389

EDITING STEP SEQUENCES .................................... 108 Import of the External Symbol File...............................156

EDITING SYMBOL AND COMMENT ...................... 334 IMPORTING PROGRAMS ..........................................150

EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS .................. 128 Input data range.............................................................297

EDITING SYSTEM PARAMETERS........................... 144 Input of Jump Label by Symbolic Name.......................352

EDITING TITLES .......................................................... 29 INPUT/OUTPUT ..........................................................248

End of Parallel Branch .................................................. 121 Input/Output ..................................................................408

End of Selective Branch................................................ 120 Inserting an edit line........................................................87

Entering and Deleting Vertical Lines.............................. 53 Inserting Ladders from the Edit Window into a Ladder

Entering and deleting vertical lines ................................. 96 Program.....................................................................42

Entering Basic Instructions ....................................... 44, 88 Installation.........................................................................4

Entering Function Instructions .................................. 48, 91 INSTALLATION AND UNINSTALLATION.................4

Entering Horizontal Lines ......................................... 52, 95 <K>

Entering Special Characters .......................................... 429 K ADDRESS (KEEP RELAY) .....................................370
Entering Steps ............................................................... 118 Keep Relay....................................................................293
Entering Transitions ...................................................... 119
Error List ....................................................................... 435 <L>
ERROR MESSAGE FORMAT .................................... 386 Ladder ................................................................... 240, 376

ERROR MESSAGES.................................... 385, 388, 435 Ladder Diagram is Outputted to the Text File...............100

i-2
B-63484EN/05 INDEX

Ladder diagram without the net number is output to Option............................................................................245

the text file .............................................................. 104 OPTION OF IDENTIFICATION CODE......................438
LADDER MONITORING ............................................ 276
<P>
Ladder/Step Sequence Editing ...................................... 390
Parameter ......................................................................231
LANGUAGE PROGRAM LINK FUNCTION............. 416
Partial Protect Functions ...............................................215
LOADING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS FROM
PMC ALARM STATUS ...............................................304
THE PMC (DURING CONNECTION WITH THE
PMC PARAMETERS ...................................................290
PMC)....................................................................... 259
PMC Programming Method ............................................24
LOADING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS FROM
PMC STATUS ..............................................................306
THE PMC (DURING DISCONNECTION WITH
PMC Type (Step Sequence and I/O Link Expansion)
THE PMC).............................................................. 252
Setting .......................................................................26
<M> Preparing for Offline Editing ..........................................31
Main Menu...................................................................... 15 Preparing for Online Editing. ..........................................31
Memory Addresses Required to Display Messages ...... 136 Print...............................................................................394
Menu Bar ...................................................................... 270 PRINTING .................................................................... 364
Message......................................................................... 241 PRINTING BIT ADDRESS MAPS ..............................190
Message Classification.................................................. 387 Printing Cross Reference...............................................367
Message Editing ............................................................ 394 PRINTING CROSS-REFERENCES.............................186
Method of Displaying the Ladder Diagram Editing PRINTING I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT..................182
Screen ....................................................................... 33 PRINTING LADDER DIAGRAMS .............................173
Mnemonic Conversion .................................................. 401 PRINTING MESSAGES...............................................180
MNEMONIC EDITING................................................ 219 PRINTING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS........................170
MNEMONIC FILE FORMAT.............................. 227, 373 PRINTING STEP SEQUENCES ..................................176
MNEMONIC FILE SAMPLE....................................... 231 PRINTING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS................178
Mnemonic Monitor ....................................................... 284 PRINTING SYSTEM PARAMETERS ........................184
MNEMONIC OPTIONS............................................... 244 Printing the Bit Address ................................................367
Models and Quantity of Usable Characters................... 136 Printing the Ladder Diagram.........................................366
Modifying collective display extraction conditions ........ 73 Printing the Symbol Comment ......................................365
Modifying Symbol and Comment Data ........................ 337 Printing the System Parameters.....................................364
[Monitor] Screen ........................................................... 276 PRINTING TITLES......................................................171
MULTI-LANGUAGE PMC MESSAGE CREATION Procedure for Creating Sequence Programs ....................20
TOOL...................................................................... 418 Program Transfer Wizard..............................................271
Multiple used check of the functional instruction Programmer protect function.........................................298
parameter number ................................................... 278 PROTECTING LADDER PROGRAMS BY
PASSWORDS.........................................................214
<N>
New line character ........................................................ 429 <R>
New Line Character, Numeric Data .............................. 137 Relation between the Global Symbol and the Local
Notes at Editing Ladder Program.................................. 351 Symbol ....................................................................331
Numeric data ................................................................. 429 Replace............................................................................83
Replace function............................................................347
<O>
Reservation character ....................................................430
Online............................................................................ 408
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ......................................2 <S>
Operation to Import from CSV-file............................... 247 Sample File ...................................................................424

i-3
INDEX B-63484EN/05

Sample of an External Symbol File............................... 246 Starting Ladder Editing Package (Windows) (Online
SAVING AND READING OPTION FILE .................. 193 Connection)...............................................................13
SAVING PROGRAMS WITH NAMES....................... 149 Status Monitor.................................................................17
Search.............................................................. 63, 127, 339 Step Sequence Configuration ........................................111
Search Function............................................................. 343 STOPPING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS .......................274
Selecting a transfer direction......................................... 271 STORING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS IN THE PMC
Selecting a transfer method ........................................... 271 (DURING CONNECTION WITH THE PMC) ......261
SEQUENCE PROGRAMS ............................................. 20 STORING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS IN THE PMC
Set of Display Language for Comment ......................... 361 (DURING CONNECTION WITH THE PMC) ......267
Set of Symbol................................................................ 357 Switching the Language in Which PMC Alarm
Set Screen...................................................................... 356 Messages Are Displayed .........................................305
Setting collective display extraction conditions .............. 68 Symbol and comment....................................................239
Setting Details of Trace Mode ...................................... 325 Symbol and Comment Data ..........................................128
Setting items.................................................................. 299 Symbol Comment..........................................................374
Setting Ladder Display.................................................... 75 SYSTEM FILES .............................................................12
Setting Options.............................................................. 251 SYSTEM PARAMETER ..............................................361
Setting PMC Setting Parameters ................................... 298 System Parameter..........................................................373
Setting Property............................................................. 201 System Parameter Editing .............................................390
Setting screen of the selectable I/O link assignment
<T>
function ................................................................... 302
T ADDRESS (TIMER) .................................................369
Setting the maximum number of undo operations........... 99
Terminating Ladder Editing Package (Windows) ...........13
Setting Trace Parameters............................................... 323
Terminating the signal trigger stop function .................281
Setting Trace Parameters (Sampling Addresses)........... 326
THE DATA FORMAT OF THE EXTERNAL
SETTING UP COMMON OPTIONS ........................... 192
SYMBOL FILE.......................................................437
SETTING UP COMMUNICATION............................. 249
The example of an output file........................................103
Setting up Pages ............................................................ 196
Timer.............................................................................290
SETTING UP PRINTER .............................................. 195
Title ...............................................................................239
SETUP ..............................................................................1
Title Editing ..................................................................389
Shortcut key list ............................................................ 283
TOOLTIPS INDICATION............................................372
SIGNAL ANALYSIS ................................................... 312
[Trigger Parameter] screen............................................282
[Signal Analysis Format] Screen................................... 317
[Signal Analysis Parameter] Screen .............................. 315 <U>
SIGNAL STATUS ................................................ 287, 368 Undo / Redo ....................................................................98
SIGNAL TRACE FUNCTION ..................................... 321 Uninstallation ....................................................................9
[Signal Trace Parameter] Screen................................... 310 Usable Characters..........................................................425
SIGNAL TRACING ............................................. 308, 371 USAGE .........................................................................431
Signal Trigger Stop Function ........................................ 279 Using System Program Data for Another Program .......383
Single Format ................................................................ 231
<W>
Soft Keys................................................................... 17, 67
Warning message ..........................................................301
Specifying Jump-to Label ............................................. 122
WINDOW NAMES AND FUNCTIONS........................14
Specifying Label Jump.................................................. 123
Work Folders and Online Program Files .........................25
START AND END ......................................................... 13
WRITING SEQUENCE PROGRAMS INTO F-ROM .269
Starting Ladder Editing Package (Windows) .................. 13

i-4
 Revision Record

FANUC OPEN CNC Ladder Editing Package (Windows) OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-63484EN)

- Addition of following Items

3.3.17 Changing Signal Addresses and Function Instruction
Parameters in the Display Pan
3.3.18 Changing Contacts and Coils in the Display Pane
7.1 SETTING UP COMMUNICATION
7.7 COMPARING WITH PMC
03 Sep., 2001 9.4.2 Switching the Language in Which PMC Alarm
Messages Are Displayed
C LANGUAGE PROGRAM LINK FUNC
- Replacement of the screens
- Addition of the other explanations
- Correction of errors

- Addition of following Items

3.3.13 Search
3.3.14 Collective Display
3.3.15 Setting the Number of Columns per Row - Total revision
3.4.13 Search ⋅ Applied to Series 30i/31i/32i PMC
02 Aug., 2000 9.1.4 Signal Trigger Stop Function 05 Jan., 2005 ⋅ Addition of “Extended symbol/comment function”
Appendix B CONVERSION USING A SIGNAL ⋅ Addition of “Multi-language PMC message creation tool”
ADDRESS CONVERTER - Correction of errors
- Replacement of the screens
- Addition of the other explanations
- Correction of errors

- Addition of following Items

3.3.19 Setting Ladder Display
3.3.22 Checking the Number of Program Steps
3.3.23 Replace
3.3.24 Changing Ladder Programs on the Display Window
01 Apr., 2000 04 Nov., 2002 3.3.25 Deleting Symbol or Comment Data
6.5 CONVERTING STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAMS TO
MNEMONIC FILES
- Replacement of the screens
- Addition of the other explanations
- Correction of errors

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents